2016 Ford Mustang Manual

Owner's Manual FORD MUSTANG

GR3J 19A321 AKA

July 2015First Printing

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest ofcontinuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any timewithout notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in aretrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.Errors and omissions excepted.© Ford Motor Company 2015

All rights reserved.Part Number: GR3J 19A321 AKA 06/2015 20150610012556

IntroductionAbout This Manual...........................................5Symbols Glossary.............................................5Data Recording..................................................7Replacement Parts

Recommendation........................................8Mobile Communications

Equipment......................................................8

At a GlanceFront Exterior Overview..................................9Rear Exterior Overview.................................10Vehicle Interior Overview...............................11Instrument Panel Overview - LHD............12Instrument Panel Overview - RHD...........13

Child SafetyInstalling Child Restraints............................15Child Restraint Positioning..........................18

SeatbeltsFastening the Seatbelts................................21Seatbelt Reminder.........................................22

Supplementary RestraintsSystem

Principle of Operation...................................23Driver Airbag.....................................................23Passenger Airbag...........................................24Front Passenger Sensing System............24Side Airbags.....................................................26Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags.........27Side Curtain Airbags - Coupe.....................27Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator........28

Pedestrian ProtectionPrinciple of Operation..................................30

Keys and Remote ControlsGeneral Information on Radio

Frequencies..................................................32Remote Control...............................................32Replacing a Lost Key or Remote

Control...........................................................34

MyKey™Principle of Operation..................................35Creating a MyKey...........................................36Clearing All MyKeys........................................37Checking MyKey System Status...............38Using MyKey With Remote Start

Systems.........................................................39MyKey Troubleshooting...............................39

LocksLocking and Unlocking................................40Keyless Entry....................................................42

SecurityPassive Anti-Theft System.........................45Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With:

Perimeter Alarm.........................................45Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With: Interior

Sensor............................................................45Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With:

Integral Battery...........................................47

Steering WheelAdjusting the Steering Wheel...................49Audio Control..................................................49Voice Control...................................................50Cruise Control.................................................50Information Display Control......................50

Wipers and WashersWindshield Wipers..........................................51Autowipers.........................................................51Windshield Washers.....................................52

1

Mustang (CZG) Vehicles Built From: 13-07-2015, GR3J 19A321 AKA enGBR, Edition date: 06/2015, First Printing

Table of Contents

LightingGeneral Information......................................53Lighting Control..............................................53Autolamps........................................................54Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................55Headlamp Exit Delay....................................55Daytime Running Lamps.............................55Front Fog Lamps............................................55Rear Fog Lamps.............................................56Headlamp Leveling.......................................56Direction Indicators........................................57Welcome Lighting..........................................57Interior Lamps..................................................57Ambient Lighting............................................57

Windows and MirrorsPower Windows.............................................58Global Opening...............................................58Exterior Mirrors................................................59Interior Mirror...................................................60Sun Visors.........................................................60

Instrument ClusterGauges................................................................61Warning Lamps and Indicators.................63Audible Warnings and Indicators.............65

Information DisplaysGeneral Information......................................67Information Messages..................................75

Climate ControlPrinciple of Operation..................................83Air Vents............................................................83Manual Climate Control..............................84Automatic Climate Control........................86Hints on Controlling the Interior

Climate...........................................................87Heated Windows and Mirrors...................90

Cabin Air Filter.................................................90

SeatsSitting in the Correct Position....................91Head Restraints...............................................91Manual Seats...................................................92Power Seats.....................................................93Rear Seats........................................................94Climate Controlled Seats...........................94

Auxiliary Power PointsAuxiliary Power Points.................................96Cigar Lighter.....................................................96

Storage CompartmentsCup Holders......................................................97Center Console................................................97Glasses Holder................................................97

Starting and Stopping theEngine

General Information.....................................98Keyless Starting..............................................98Steering Wheel Lock....................................99Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................99Engine Block Heater.....................................101

Fuel and RefuelingSafety Precautions......................................103Fuel Quality....................................................104Fuel Filler Funnel Location.......................104Running Out of Fuel....................................104Catalytic Converter......................................105Refueling.........................................................105Fuel Consumption........................................107

TransmissionManual Transmission.................................109Automatic Transmission...........................109

2


Table of Contents

Rear AxleLimited Slip Differential..............................113

BrakesGeneral Information.....................................114Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock

Brakes............................................................114Parking Brake..................................................114Hill Start Assist...............................................115

Traction ControlPrinciple of Operation..................................117Using Traction Control.................................117

Stability ControlPrinciple of Operation..................................118Using Stability Control................................119

Parking AidsPrinciple of Operation.................................122Rear Parking Aid............................................122Rear View Camera........................................123

Cruise ControlPrinciple of Operation.................................127Using Cruise Control....................................127

Driving AidsDrive Control...................................................129

Load CarryingGeneral Information.....................................131

TowingTowing a Trailer..............................................132Towing Points.................................................132Transporting the Vehicle............................132Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......133

Convertible TopOpening the Convertible Top...................134Closing the Convertible Top......................135

Driving HintsBreaking-In......................................................137Reduced Engine Performance.................137Economical Driving.......................................137Cold Weather Precautions........................138Driving Through Water................................138Floor Mats.......................................................138

Roadside EmergenciesHazard Warning Flashers..........................140First Aid Kit.....................................................140Warning Triangle..........................................140Fuel Shutoff...................................................140Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................141Post-Crash Alert System...........................143

FusesFuse Specification Chart...........................144Changing a Fuse.............................................151

MaintenanceGeneral Information....................................152Opening and Closing the Hood...............152Under Hood Overview - 2.3L

EcoBoost™.................................................154Under Hood Overview - 5.0L...................155Engine Oil Dipstick.......................................156Engine Oil Check...........................................156Engine Coolant Check................................156Automatic Transmission Fluid

Check.............................................................157Brake Fluid Check.........................................158Clutch Fluid Check - Manual

Transmission..............................................158Washer Fluid Check.....................................158Fuel Filter.........................................................159

3


Table of Contents

Changing the 12V Battery..........................159Checking the Wiper Blades......................160Changing the Wiper Blades - LHD.........160Changing the Wiper Blades - RHD..........161Adjusting the Headlamps - LHD.............162Adjusting the Headlamps - RHD............163Changing a Bulb...........................................164Bulb Specification Chart...........................168

Vehicle CareCleaning the Exterior...................................169Cleaning the Interior....................................169Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............170Cleaning the Alloy Wheels........................170

Wheels and TiresGeneral Information......................................171Temporary Mobility Kit.................................171Tire Care............................................................177Using Summer Tires....................................178Using Winter Tires........................................178Using Snow Chains......................................178Tire Pressure Monitoring System............179Changing a Road Wheel............................183Driving at High Speed.................................188Technical Specifications...........................189

Capacities and Specific-ations

Vehicle Dimensions - Coupe.....................191Vehicle Dimensions - Convertible..........192Vehicle Identification Plate.......................193Vehicle Identification Number................194Capacities and Specifications - 2.3L

EcoBoost™................................................194Capacities and Specifications -

5.0L...............................................................196Fuel Consumption Figures........................198

Audio SystemGeneral Information....................................199Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/

FM/CD.........................................................200Digital Radio...................................................201USB Port.........................................................203Media Hub......................................................203

SYNC™ 2General Information...................................204Settings..............................................................211Entertainment...............................................225Phone...............................................................233Information.....................................................241Climate............................................................245Navigation......................................................248SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................258

AppendicesElectromagnetic Compatibility..............266End User License Agreement..................267Type Approvals............................................289

4


Table of Contents

ABOUT THIS MANUALThank you for choosing Ford. Werecommend that you take some time toget to know your vehicle by reading thismanual. The more that you know aboutyour vehicle, the greater the safety andpleasure you will get from driving it.

WARNINGDriving while distracted can result inloss of vehicle control, crash andinjury. We strongly recommend that

you use extreme caution when using anydevice that may take your focus off theroad. Your primary responsibility is the safeoperation of your vehicle. We recommendagainst the use of any hand-held devicewhile driving and encourage the use ofvoice-operated systems when possible.Make sure you are aware of all applicablelocal laws that may affect the use ofelectronic devices while driving.

Note: This manual describes productfeatures and options available throughoutthe range of available models, sometimeseven before they are generally available. Itmay describe options not fitted to thevehicle you have purchased.Note: Some of the illustrations in thismanual may show features as used indifferent models, so they may appeardifferent to you on your vehicle.Note: Always use and operate your vehiclein line with all applicable laws andregulations.Note: Pass on this manual when sellingyour vehicle. It is an integral part of yourvehicle.This manual may qualify the location of acomponent as left-hand side or right-handside. The side is determined when facingforward in the seat.

E154903

Right-hand side.ALeft-hand side.B

SYMBOLS GLOSSARYThese are some of the symbols you maysee on your vehicle.

Safety alert

See Owner's Manual

E162384

Air conditioning system

Anti-lock braking system

Avoid smoking, flames or sparks

Battery

Battery acid

Brake fluid - non petroleumbased

5


Introduction

Brake system

Cabin air filter

Check fuel cap

Child safety door lock or unlock

Child seat lower anchor

Child seat tether anchor

E71340

Cruise control

Do not open when hot

Engine air filter

Engine coolant

Engine coolant temperature

Engine oil

Explosive gas

Fan warning

Fasten seatbelt

Front airbag

Front fog lamps

Fuel pump reset

Fuse compartment

Hazard warning flashers

Heated rear window

Heated windshield

Interior luggage compartmentrelease

Jack

E161353

Keep out of reach of children

Lighting control

Low tire pressure warning

Maintain correct fluid level

Note operating instructions

Panic alarm

6


Introduction

E139213

Parking aid

Parking brake

Power steering fluid

Power windows front/rear

Power window lockout

Service engine soon

Side airbag

E167012

Shield the eyes

E138639

Stability control

Windshield wash and wipe

DATA RECORDINGA large number of electronic componentsof your vehicle contain data storagemodules temporarily or permanentlystoring technical data about the conditionof the vehicle, events and malfunctions.

In general, this technical informationdocuments the condition of parts,modules, systems or the environment:• Operating conditions of system

components (e.g. filling levels).• Status messages of the vehicle and its

individual components (e.g. number ofwheel revolutions/rotational speed,deceleration, lateral acceleration).

• Malfunctions and defects in importantsystem components (e.g. lighting andbrake system).

• Vehicle reactions in particular drivingsituations (e.g. inflation of an airbag,activation of the stability regulationsystem).

• Environmental conditions (e.g.temperature).

These data are exclusively technical andhelp identification and correction ofmalfunctions as well as optimisation ofvehicle functions. Motion profiles indicatingtravelled routes cannot be created withthese data.If services are used (e.g. repair works,service processes, warranty cases, qualityassurance), employees of the servicenetwork (including manufacturers) areable to read out this technical informationfrom the event and malfunction datastorage modules using special diagnosticdevices. If required, you will receive furtherinformation. After a malfunction has beencorrected, these data are deleted from themalfunction storage module or they areconstantly overwritten.When using the vehicle, situations mayoccur in which these technical data relatedto other information (accident report,damages on the vehicle, witnessstatements, etc.) may be associated witha specific person - possibly, with theassistance of an expert.

7


Introduction

Additional functions contractually agreedupon with the client (e.g. vehicle locationin emergency cases) allow thetransmission of particular vehicle datafrom the vehicle.

REPLACEMENT PARTSRECOMMENDATIONYour vehicle has been built to the higheststandards using quality parts. Werecommend that you demand the use ofgenuine Ford and Motorcraft partswhenever your vehicle requires scheduledmaintenance or repair. You can clearlyidentify genuine Ford and Motorcraft partsby looking for the Ford, FoMoCo orMotorcraft branding on the parts or theirpackaging.

Scheduled Maintenance andMechanical RepairsOne of the best ways for you to make surethat your vehicle provides years of serviceis to have it maintained in line with ourrecommendations using parts thatconform to the specifications detailed inthis Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford andMotorcraft parts meet or exceed thesespecifications.

Collision RepairsWe hope that you never experience acollision, but accidents do happen. GenuineFord replacement collision parts meet ourstringent requirements for fit, finish,structural integrity, corrosion protectionand dent resistance. During vehicledevelopment we validate these partsdeliver the intended level of protection asa whole system. A great way to know forsure you are getting this level of protectionis to use genuine Ford replacementcollision parts.

Warranty on Replacement PartsGenuine Ford and Motorcraft replacementparts are the only replacement parts thatbenefit from a Ford Warranty. Damagecaused to your vehicle as a result of thefailure of non-Ford parts may not becovered by the Ford Warranty. Foradditional information, refer to the termsand conditions of the Ford Warranty.

MOBILE COMMUNICATIONSEQUIPMENTUsing mobile communications equipmentis becoming increasingly important in theconduct of business and personal affairs.However, you must not compromise yourown or others’ safety when using suchequipment. Mobile communications canenhance personal safety and security whenappropriately used, particularly inemergency situations. Safety must beparamount when using mobilecommunications equipment to avoidnegating these benefits. Mobilecommunication equipment includes, butis not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,portable email devices, text messagingdevices and portable two-way radios.



8


Introduction

FRONT EXTERIOR OVERVIEW

E177478

Locks. See Locking and Unlocking (page 40).ARain sensor. See Autowipers (page 51). See Autolamps (page 54).BFront wiper blades. See Changing the Wiper Blades (page 160).CEngine. See Maintenance (page 152).DFront exterior lamps. See Changing a Bulb (page 164).ETire pressures. See Technical Specifications (page 189).FWheels and tires. See Changing a Road Wheel (page 183).G

9


At a Glance

REAR EXTERIOR OVERVIEW

E206022

BCD

E

Rear exterior lamps. See Changing a Bulb (page 164).ALuggage compartment release button. See Locks (page 40).BTire pressure. See Technical Specifications (page 189).CWheels and tires. See Changing a Road Wheel (page 183).DFuel tank filler door. See Refueling (page 105).E

10


At a Glance

VEHICLE INTERIOR OVERVIEW

E177481

Gearshift lever. See Transmission (page 109).APower window switches. See Power Windows (page 58).BInterior release lever. See Locking and Unlocking (page 40).CHead restraints. See Head Restraints (page 91).DSeatbelts. See Fastening the Seatbelts (page 21).ERear seats. See Rear Seats (page 94).FFront seats. See Seats (page 91).GHood release lever. See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 152).H

11


At a Glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW - LHD

E206023

Air vents. See Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate (page 87).ADirection indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 57).BInstrument cluster. See Gauges (page 61).CWiper lever. See Wipers and Washers (page 51).DInformation and entertainment display. See SYNC™ 2 (page 204).EAudio unit. See Audio System (page 199).FDrive control switches. See Drive Control (page 129).GClimate controls. See Climate Control (page 83).HClimate controlled seats. See Climate Controlled Seats (page 94).IHazard flasher switch. See Hazard Warning Flashers (page 140).JKeyless start button. See Keyless Starting (page 98).KAudio control. See Audio Control (page 49).LSteering wheel adjustment. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 49).M

12


At a Glance

Horn.NCruise control switches. See Cruise Control (page 127).OInformation display controls. See Information Display Control (page 50).PLuggage compartment release button. See Locking and Unlocking (page40).

Q

Lighting control. See Lighting (page 53).R

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW - RHD

E199408

Air vents. See Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate (page 87).ADirection indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 57).BInstrument cluster. See Instrument Cluster (page 61).CWiper lever. See Wipers and Washers (page 51).DInformation and entertainment display. See SYNC™ 2 (page 204).EAudio unit. See Audio System (page 199).F

13


At a Glance

Drive control switches. See Drive Control (page 129).GClimate controls. See Climate Control (page 83).HClimate controlled seats. See Climate Controlled Seats (page 94).IHazard flasher switch. See Hazard Warning Flashers (page 140).JKeyless start button. See Keyless Starting (page 98).KAudio control. See Audio Control (page 49).LSteering wheel adjustment. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 49).MHorn.NCruise control switches. See Cruise Control (page 127).OInformation display controls. See Information Display Control (page 50).PLuggage compartment release button.QLighting control. See Lighting Control (page 53).R

14


At a Glance

INSTALLING CHILDRESTRAINTS

E161855

E68916

WARNINGSNEVER use a rearward facing childrestraint on a seat protected by anACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH

OR SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD canoccur.

Use an approved child seat to securechildren less than 150 cm (59 in) tallon the rear seat.Read and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions when you are fitting achild seat.Do not modify child seats in any way.

WARNINGSDo not hold a child on your lap whenthe vehicle is moving.To avoid risk of injury, do not leavechildren or pets unattended in yourvehicle.If your vehicle has been involved in acrash, have the child seats checkedby an authorized dealer.

Only child seats certified to ECE-R44.03or later have been tested and approved foruse in your vehicle. A choice of child seatsare available from authorized dealers.Note: Mandatory use of child seats variesfrom country to country.Note: Children should be properlyrestrained in a rear seating positionwhenever possible.

Child Restraints for Different MassGroupsUse the correct child restraint as follows:

Child Safety Seat

E68920

Secure children that weigh between 13 kg(29 lb) and 18 kg (40 lb) in a child safetyseat (Group 1) on the rear seat.

15


Child Safety

Booster SeatsWARNINGS

Do not install a booster seat or abooster cushion with only the lapstrap of the safety belt.Do not install a booster seat or abooster cushion with a safety beltthat is slack or twisted.Do not put the safety belt under yourchild’s arm or behind your child'sback.Do not use pillows, books or towelsto boost your child’s height.Make sure that your children sit in anupright position.Make sure the child seat rests tightlyagainst the vehicle seat. If necessary,adjust the seat backrest to an upright

position. It may also be necessary to lift orremove the head restraint. See HeadRestraints (page 91).

You must reinstall the head restraintfollowing the removal of the childseat. See Head Restraints (page

91).

Secure children that weigh more than 15 kg(33 lb) but are less than 150 cm (59 in) tallin a booster seat or a booster cushion.Note: When using as child seat on a rearseat, adjust the front seat in a position toprevent contact with the rear passenger,child feet or child legs.

Booster Seat (Group 2)

E70710

We recommend that you use a boosterseat that combines a cushion with abackrest instead of a booster cushion only.The raised seating position will allow youto position the shoulder strap of the adultsafety belt over the center of your child’sshoulder and the lap strap tightly acrossits hips.

Booster Cushion (Group 3)

E68924

16


Child Safety

ISOFIX Anchor Points

E68945

WARNINGUse an anti-rotation device whenusing the ISOFIX system. Werecommend the use of a top tether

or support leg.

Your vehicle has ISOFIX anchor points thataccommodate universally approvedISOFIX child restraints.The ISOFIX system comprises two rigidattachment arms on the child restraint thatattach to anchor points on the outboardrear seats, where the cushion and backrestmeet. Tether anchor points are locatedbehind the outboard rear seats for childseats with a top tether.Note: When you are purchasing an ISOFIXrestraint, make sure that you know thecorrect mass group and ISOFIX size classfor the intended seating locations. SeeChild Restraint Positioning (page 18).

Top Tether Anchor Points

E174400

The top tether anchor points are locatedat the rear of the rear seat backrest.

Attaching a Child Seat With TopTethers

WARNINGDo not attach the top tether strap toanything other than the correct toptether strap anchor point.

Follow the child seat manufacturer’sinstructions for installing a child seat witha top tether.1. Route the tether strap to the anchor

point.

17


Child Safety

E87145

2. Push the child seat back firmly toengage the ISOFIX lower anchor points.

3. Tighten the tether strap.

Attaching a Child Seat With aSupport Leg

WARNINGSMake sure the support leg is longenough to reach the vehicle floor.Make sure that the child seatmanufacturer lists your vehicle assuitable for use with this type of child

seat.

Follow the child seat manufacturer'sinstructions for installing a child seat witha support leg.

E165606

CHILD RESTRAINTPOSITIONING

WARNINGSDo not use a rearward facing childrestraint on a seat protected by anair bag in front of it.When using a child seat with asupport leg, the support leg mustrest securely on the floor.When using a child seat with a seatbelt, make sure that the seat belt isnot slack or twisted.The child seat must rest tightlyagainst the vehicle seat. It may benecessary to lift or remove the head

restraint. See Head Restraints (page 91).

18


Child Safety

Note: When using a child seat on a frontseat, always adjust the front passenger seatto its fully rearward position. If it provesdifficult to tighten the lap section of the seatbelt without slack remaining, adjust theseatback to the fully upright position andraise the height of the seat. See Sitting inthe Correct Position (page 91).

Mass group categories

Seating positions 3210+0

22 - 36 kg15 - 25 kg9 - 18 kgUp to 13 kgUp to 10 kg

UF¹UF¹UF¹XXFront passenger seat

XXXXXRear seats

X Not suitable for children in this mass group.UF¹ Suitable for universal category forward facing child restraints approved for use inthis mass group. However, we recommend that you secure children in the rear seat.The rear outboard passengers seating positions are equipped with ISOFIX lower anchors.All passenger rear outboard seating positions are equipped with ISOFIX upper anchors.See Installing Child Restraints (page 15).The passenger front seat is not equipped with ISOFIX upper or lower anchors. Werecommend that you secure children in the rear seat.

19


Child Safety

ISOFIX Child Seats

Mass group categories

Seating positions10+0

Rear facingForwardfacingRear facing

20 - 40 lbs (9 - 18 kg)Up to 29 lbs (13 kg)

Not ISOFIX equipped

SizeclassFront passenger

seat Seattype

XB, B11XSizeclassRear outboard

seat ISOFIXILIL, IUF2ILSeat

type

IL Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraints systems of the semi-universal category.Please consult child restraints systems suppliers' vehicle recommendation lists.IUF Suitable for ISOFIX forward facing child restraints systems of universal categoryapproved for use in this mass group and ISOFIX size class.1The ISOFIX size class for both universal and semi-universal child seat systems is definedby the capital letters A to G. These identification letters are displayed on the ISOFIX childseat.2At time of publishing, the recommended Group 1 ISOFIX child seat is the Britax RomerDuo. See an authorized dealer for the latest details relating to our recommended childseats.

20


Child Safety

FASTENING THE SEATBELTS

WARNINGSInsert the tongue into the buckle untilyou hear a distinct click. You havenot fastened the safety belt correctly

if you do not hear a click.Make sure that your safety belt issecurely stored away and is notoutside your vehicle when closing the

door.

A web guide is included on the outboardside of the front seats. Depending onoccupant size and seating position, youmay need to route the belt through theguide for a proper fit. If the safety belt doesnot route across the middle of theshoulder, route the belt through the webguide.Convertible

E175860

Coupe

E175859

Recaro

E175163

E204921

21


Seatbelts

Pull the belt out steadily. It may lock if youpull it sharply or if your vehicle is on a slope.Press the red button on the buckle torelease the belt. Hold the tongue and let itretract completely and smoothly to itsstowed position.

Using Safety Belts DuringPregnancy

E170730

WARNINGPosition the safety belt correctly foryour safety and that of your unbornchild. Do not use only the lap strap

or the shoulder strap.

Pregnant women should always wear theirsafety belt. The lap belt portion of acombination lap and shoulder belt shouldbe positioned low across the hips belowthe belly and worn as tight as comfort willallow. The shoulder belt should bepositioned to cross the middle of theshoulder and the center of the chest.

SEATBELT REMINDER

WARNINGThe system will only provideprotection when you use the seatbeltcorrectly.

The warning lamp illuminates and anaudible warning will sound when thefollowing conditions have been met:• The front seatbelts have not been

fastened.• Your vehicle exceeds a relatively low

speed.It will also illuminate and sound if a frontseatbelt is unfastened when your vehicleis moving.If you do not fasten your seatbelt thewarning switches off automatically afterapproximately five minutes.

Turning the Seatbelt Reminder OffContact an authorized dealer.

22


Seatbelts

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGSExtreme Hazard! Never use arearward facing child restraint on aseat protected by an active airbag in

front of it. Death or serious injury to thechild can occur.

Do not modify the front of yourvehicle in any way. This couldadversely affect deployment of the

airbags. Failure to adhere to this warningcould result in serious personal injury ordeath.

Wear a seatbelt and keep sufficientdistance between yourself and thesteering wheel. Only when you use

the seatbelt correctly, can it hold you in aposition that allows the airbag to achieveits optimum effect. See Sitting in theCorrect Position (page 91). Failure toadhere to this warning could result inserious personal injury or death.

Repairs to the steering wheel,steering column, seats, airbags andseatbelts must be carried out by an

authorized dealer. Failure to adhere to thiswarning could result in serious personalinjury or death.

Keep the areas in front of the airbagsfree from obstruction. Do not affixanything to or over the airbag covers.

In the event of a crash, hard objects couldcause serious personal injury or death.

Do not puncture the seat with sharpobjects. This could damage andadversely affect deployment of the

airbags. Failure to adhere to this warningcould result in serious personal injury ordeath.

Use seat covers designed for seatswith side airbags. Have these fittedby an authorized dealer. Failure to

adhere to this warning could result inserious personal injury or death.

Note: You will hear a loud bang and see acloud of harmless powdery residue if anairbag deploys. This is normal.Note: Only wipe airbag covers with a dampcloth.

DRIVER AIRBAG

E74302

The airbag will deploy during significantfrontal collisions. The airbag will inflatewithin a few thousandths of a second anddeflate on contact with the occupant, thuscushioning forward body movement.During minor frontal collisions, overturns,rear collisions and side collisions, theairbag will not deploy.

23


Supplementary Restraints System

PASSENGER AIRBAG

E151127

The passenger airbag will deploy duringsignificant frontal or near-frontal collisions.The airbag will inflate within a fewthousandths of a second and deflate oncontact with the occupant, thus cushioningforward body movement. During minorfrontal collisions, overturns, rear collisionsand side collisions, the front passengerairbag will not deploy.

FRONT PASSENGER SENSINGSYSTEM

WARNINGSEven with Advanced RestraintsSystems, children 12 and undershould be properly restrained in a

rear seating position. Failure to follow thiscould seriously increase the risk of injury ordeath.

Do not use a rearward facing childrestraint on a seat protected by anairbag in front of it.

WARNINGSSitting improperly out of position orwith the seatback reclined too farcan take off weight from the seat

cushion and affect the decision of the frontpassenger sensing system, resulting inserious injury or death in a crash. Alwayssit upright against your seatback, with yourfeet on the floor.

To reduce the risk of possible seriousinjury: Do not stow objects inseatback map pocket or hang

objects off seatback if a child is in the frontpassenger seat. Do not place objectsunderneath the front passenger seat orbetween the seat and the center console.Check the passenger airbag off indicatorlamp for proper airbag status. Failure tofollow these instructions may interfere withthe front passenger sensing system.

Any alteration or modification to thefront passenger seat may affect theperformance of the front passenger

sensing system.

This system works with sensors that arepart of the front passenger seat andseatbelt to detect the presence of aproperly-seated occupant and determineif the front passenger frontal airbag shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not.

E179527

24



The front passenger sensing system usesa passenger airbag off indicator which willilluminate and stay lit to remind you thatthe front passenger frontal airbag isdisabled.The indicator lamp is located on theoverhead console.Note: When the ignition is first tuned on,the indicator lamp will illuminate for a shortperiod of time to confirm it is functional.The front passenger sensing system isdesigned to disable (will not inflate) thefront passenger frontal airbag when a rearfacing infant seat, a forward-facing childrestraint, or a booster seat is detected.Even with this technology, parents arestrongly encouraged to always properlyrestrain children in the rear seat. Thesensor also turns off the passenger frontairbag and seat-mounted side airbag whenthe passenger seat is empty.• When the front passenger sensing

system disables (will not inflate) thefront passenger frontal airbag, theindicator lamp will illuminate and staylit to remind you that the frontpassenger frontal airbag is disabled.

• If the child restraint has been installedand the indicator lamp is not lit, thenturn the vehicle off, remove the childrestraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe restraint following the childrestraint manufacturer's instructions.

The front passenger sensing system isdesigned to enable (may inflate) the frontpassenger frontal airbag anytime thesystem senses that a person of adult sizeis sitting properly in the front passengerseat.• When the front passenger sensing

system enables the front passengerfrontal airbag (may inflate), theindicator lamp will be unlit and stayunlit.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the frontpassenger seat, but the airbag off indicatorlamp is lit, it is possible that the person isnot sitting properly in the seat. If thishappens:• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person

to place the seatback in the full uprightposition.

• Have the person sit upright in the seat,centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended.

• Restart the vehicle and have the personremain in this position for about twominutes. This will allow the system todetect that person and enable thepassenger’s frontal airbag.

• If the indicator lamp remains lit evenafter this, the person should be advisedto ride in the rear seat.

Passenger airbagPassenger airbag OFF indic-ator

Occupant

DisabledUnlitEmpty

DisabledLitChild

EnabledUnlitAdult

25



Note: When the front passenger airbag offlight is illuminated, the passenger (seatmounted) side airbag may be disabled toavoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries.After all occupants have adjusted theirseats and put on seatbelts, it is veryimportant that they continue to sitproperly. A properly seated occupant sitsupright, leaning against the seatback, andcentered on the seat cushion, with theirfeet comfortably extended on the floor.Sitting improperly can increase the chanceof injury in a crash event. For example, ifan occupant slouches, lies down, turnssideways, sits forward, leans forward orsideways, or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash is greatlyincreased.If you think that the status of the passengerairbag off indicator lamp is incorrect, checkfor the following:• Objects lodged underneath the seat.• Objects between the seat cushion and

the center console.• Objects hanging off the seatback.• Objects stowed in the seatback map

pocket.• Objects placed on the occupant's lap.• Cargo interference with the seat.• Other passengers pushing or pulling on

the seat.• Rear passenger feet and knees resting

or pushing on the seat.The conditions listed above may cause theweight of a properly seated occupant tobe incorrectly interpreted by the frontpassenger sensing system. The person inthe front passenger seat may appearheavier or lighter due to the conditionsdescribed in the list above.

Make sure the front passenger sensingsystem is operating properly. See CrashSensors and Airbag Indicator (page 28).If the airbag readiness light is lit, do thefollowing:The driver and adult passengers shouldcheck for objects lodged underneath thefront passenger seat, or cargo interferingwith the seat.If there are lodged objects, or cargo isinterfering with the seat, take the followingsteps to remove the obstruction:• Pull the vehicle over.• Turn the vehicle off.• Driver and adult passengers should

check for any objects lodgedunderneath the front passenger seator cargo interfering with the seat.

• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).• Restart the vehicle.• Wait at least two minutes and verify

that the airbag readiness light is nolonger illuminated.

• If the airbag readiness light remainsilluminated, this may or may not be aproblem due to the front passengersensing system.

Do not attempt to repair or service thesystem. Take your vehicle immediately toan authorized dealer.

SIDE AIRBAGS

WARNINGUse seat covers designed for seatswith side airbags. Have these fittedby an authorized dealer.

26



Coupe

E152533

Convertible

E174777

The airbags are located inside theseatback of the front seats. There is a labelattached to the side of the seatback toindicate this.

DRIVER AND PASSENGERKNEE AIRBAGS

WARNINGSKeep the glove box door closed whiledriving for optimal performance ofthe passenger knee airbag during a

crash.To reduce risk of injury, do notobstruct or place objects in thedeployment path of the knee airbag.

A driver knee airbag is located under orwithin the instrument panel. A passengerknee airbag is located within the glove boxdoor. During a crash, the restraints controlmodule may activate the driver andpassenger knee airbags based on crashseverity and occupant conditions. Undercertain crash and occupant conditions, thedriver and passenger knee airbag maydeploy but the driver front airbag may notactivate. As with front and side airbags, itis important to be properly seated andrestrained to reduce the risk of death orserious injury.

Make sure the knee airbags areoperating properly. See CrashSensors and Airbag Indicator

(page 28).

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS -COUPE

E204765

The airbags are located over the front andrear side windows.The airbags will deploy during significantside crashes or when a certain likelihoodof a rollover event is detected by therollover sensor. The side curtain airbagsmay deploy in significant frontal angledcrashes.

27



CRASH SENSORS ANDAIRBAG INDICATOR

WARNINGModifying or adding equipment tothe front end of the vehicle (includinghood, frame, bumper system, front

end body structure, tow hooks and hoodpins) may affect the performance of theairbag system and deployable hoodsystem, increasing the risk of injury. Do notmodify the front end of the vehicle.

Your vehicle has a collection of crash,occupant and pedestrian sensors whichprovide information to the restraintscontrol module. The restraints controlmodule deploys (activates) the frontseatbelt pretensioners, driver airbag,passenger airbag, knee airbag(s), seatmounted side airbags, side curtain airbagsand deployable hood system (forpedestrian protection). Based on the typeof crash (frontal impact, side impact,rollover or pedestrian impact), therestraints control module will deploy theappropriate safety devices.The restraints control module alsomonitors the readiness of the above safetydevices plus the crash, occupant andpedestrian sensors. The readiness of thesafety system is indicated by a warningindicator light in the instrument cluster orby a backup tone if the warning light is notworking. Routine maintenance of theairbags and deployable hood system is notrequired.A difficulty with the system is indicated byone or more of the following:

The readiness light will notilluminate immediately after theignition is turned on.

• The readiness light will either flash orstay lit.

• A series of five beeps will be heard. Thetone pattern will repeat periodicallyuntil the problem, the light or both arerepaired.

If any of these things happen, evenintermittently, have the supplementalrestraint system and deployable hoodsystem serviced at an authorized dealerimmediately. Unless serviced, the systemmay not function properly in the event ofa crash.The seatbelt pretensioners and the frontairbag supplemental restraint system aredesigned to activate when the vehiclesustains frontal deceleration sufficient tocause the restraints control module todeploy a safety device.The fact that the seatbelt pretensionersor front airbags did not activate for bothfront seat occupants in a crash, or thedeployable hood system did not activatein a pedestrian crash does not mean thatsomething is wrong with the system.Rather, it means the restraints controlmodule determined the accidentconditions (crash severity, belt usage)were not appropriate to activate thesesafety devices.• The design of the front airbags is to

activate only in frontal and near-frontalcrashes (not rollovers, side impacts orrear impacts unless the crash causessufficient frontal deceleration).

• The seatbelt pretensioners aredesigned to activate in frontal,near-frontal and side crashes.

• The knee airbag(s) may deploy basedon crash severity and occupantconditions.

28



• The design of the side airbags is toinflate in certain side crashes. Thedesign of the side curtain airbags is toinflate in certain side impact crashesand when a certain likelihood ofrollover is detected by the rolloversensor. Side airbags and the sidecurtain airbags may activate in othertypes of crashes if the vehicleexperiences sufficient sideways motionor deformation, or rollover likelihood.

• The deployable hood system isdesigned to activate in a pedestrianimpact between the speeds of about20 km/h (12 mph) and 50 km/h(31 mph). Events similar to a pedestrianimpact may deploy the hood system.See Pedestrian Protection (page 30).

29




WARNINGSDo not drive your vehicle if the hoodhas been deployed.Do not place your hand or objects ormount equipment on or near thehood lifters that may come into

contact with a deploying hood lifter. Failureto follow these instructions may causeserious injury during a deployment.

Do not attempt to service, repair ormodify the hood lifters as you couldbe seriously injured or killed. Contact

your authorized dealer as soon as possible.Do not attempt to service, repair ormodify the hood hinges as you couldcompromise the deployable hood

system. Contact your authorized dealer assoon as possible.

If the deployable hood system hasdeployed, the system will notfunction again. The deployable hood

system including the hood, hinges, hoodlifters, bumper system and crash sensorsmust be inspected and serviced by anauthorized dealer.

Modifying or adding equipment tothe front end of your vehicle(including hood, bumper system,

frame, front end body structure, tow hooksand hood pins) may affect theperformance of the deployable hoodsystem, increasing the risk of injury. Do notmodify or add equipment to the front endof your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an enhancedpedestrian protection system in the eventof a pedestrian impact. The bumperincludes energy absorbing material in itsconstruction, and sensors that can detecta pedestrian impact and trigger adeployable hood system.

Deployable Hood System

E94698

The system releases the hood hinges andraises the rear edge of the hood by about100 mm (4 in). This increases the gapbetween the hood and the componentswithin the engine compartment to provideadditional cushioning in case thepedestrian makes contact with the hood.The deployable hood system consists of:• Hood.• Hood hinges.• Hood lifters located near the hood

hinges.• Crash sensors and monitoring system

with readiness indicator. See CrashSensors and Airbag Indicator (page28).

• Deployable hood system caution labelsplaced under the hood near the hoodlifters to show their location for serviceand emergency personnel.

30


Pedestrian Protection

E199514

These labels show the location of the hoodlifters for service and emergency personnel.The deployable hood system is active onlywhen the ignition is on and the vehicle isdriven between the speeds of about20 km/h (12 mph) and 50 km/h (31 mph).

After DeploymentAfter an impact that has activated thedeployable hood system, the deployablehood system will be raised and remainspermanently attached to the vehicle, bythe hood hinges and latch. The vehicleshould not be driven when the hood hasbeen deployed. If the deployable hoodsystem has been activated, stop thevehicle as soon as it is safe to do so, andtransport the vehicle to the nearestauthorized dealer.

If the readiness lamp lights stayson, the vehicle should betransported to the nearest

authorized dealer.

The hood can be opened using the hoodlatch after the deployable hood has beentriggered. Make sure the hood is securelyclosed and latched before transporting thevehicle to the nearest authorized dealer.

Deployable Hood Monitoring SystemThe deployable hood system does notrequire routine maintenance.

If a fault is detected in thesystem, the monitoring systemwill turn on the readiness

indicator in the instrument cluster.

If the readiness lamp is lit, do thefollowing:Do not attempt to repair or service thesystem. Take your vehicle immediately toan authorized dealer.If the deployable hood system activates,we recommend that these parts bereplaced:• The hood.• Hood hinges.• Hood lifters.These parts should be inspected by anauthorized dealer and replaced ifnecessary:• Crash sensors.• Bumper and energy absorbing material.

Hood Lifter DisposalContact your authorized dealer as soon aspossible. Hood lifters must be disposed ofby qualified personnel.

31


Pedestrian Protection

GENERAL INFORMATION ONRADIO FREQUENCIESNote: Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the party responsiblefor compliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.The typical operating range for yourtransmitter is approximately 10 m (33 ft).A decrease in operating range could becaused by:• weather conditions• nearby radio towers• structures around your vehicle• other vehicles parked next to your

vehicle.The radio frequency used by your remotecontrol can also be used by other radiotransmitters, for example amateur radios,medical equipment, wireless headphones,wireless remote controls, cell phones,battery chargers and alarm systems. If thefrequencies are jammed, you will not beable to use your remote control. You canlock and unlock the doors with the key.Note: Make sure your vehicle is lockedbefore leaving it unattended.Note: If you are in range, the remote controlwill operate if you press any buttonunintentionally.Note: The remote control contains sensitiveelectrical components. Exposure to moistureor impact may cause permanent damage.

REMOTE CONTROLIntelligent Access Key

E186183

Your intelligent access keys operate thepower locks. The key must be in yourvehicle to use the push button start.

Removable Key BladeThe intelligent access key also contains aremovable key blade that you can use tounlock your vehicle.

E151796

Slide the release on the back of the remotecontrol and pivot the cover off to accessthe key blade.

32


Keys and Remote Controls

E151795

Note: Your vehicle keys came with asecurity label that provides important keycut information. Keep the label in a safeplace for future reference.

Using the Key BladeThe key cylinder is under a cap on the driverdoor handle.To remove the cap:

E151956

1. Insert the key blade into the slot on thebottom of the handle and press up.

2. While maintaining upward pressure,move the cap rearward to release it.Gently remove the key while doing so.

To install the cap:

E151957

1. Place the cap just forward of the keycylinder.

2. While applying pressure to the cap,move it forward until it is in place. Youmay hear a snap as it engages.

Make sure you have correctly installed thecap by trying to move it rearward.

Changing the Remote ControlBatteryNote: Refer to local regulations whendisposing of transmitter batteries.Note: Do not wipe off any grease on thebattery terminals or on the back surface ofthe circuit board.Note: Replacing the battery does not erasethe programmed key from your vehicle. Thetransmitter should operate normally.A message appears in the informationdisplay when the remote control batteryis low. See Information Messages (page75).

Intelligent Access KeyThe remote control uses two coin-typethree-volt lithium batteries CR2025 orequivalent.

33



E151796

1. Slide the release on the back of theremote control and pivot the cover off.

E153890

2. Insert a coin into the slot and twist toseparate the housing.

E176226

3. Remove the batteries.4. Install new batteries with the + facing

each other.

Note: Make sure to replace the labelbetween the two batteries.5. Reinstall the battery cover.

REPLACING A LOST KEY ORREMOTE CONTROLYou can purchase replacement keys orremote controls from an authorized dealer.Authorized dealers can program remotecontrols for your vehicle. See Replacinga Lost Key or Remote Control (page 34).To re-program the passive anti-theftsystem see an authorized dealer.

34



PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONMyKey allows you to program keys withrestricted driving modes to promote gooddriving habits. All but one of the keysprogrammed to the vehicle can beactivated with these restricted modes.Any keys that have not been programmedare referred to as administrator keys oradmin keys. These can be used to:• Create a MyKey.• Program configurable MyKey settings.• Clear all MyKey features.When you have programmed a MyKey, youcan access the following information usingthe information display:• How many admin keys and MyKeys are

programmed to your vehicle.• The total distance your vehicle has

traveled using a MyKey.Note: All MyKeys are programmed to thesame settings. You cannot program themindividually.Note: For vehicles with intelligent accesswith push-button start, when both a MyKeyand an admin intelligent access key fob arepresent, the admin fob will be recognizedby the vehicle while switching the ignitionon to start the vehicle.

Non-configurable SettingsThe following settings cannot be changedby an admin key user:• Seatbelt reminder. You cannot disable

this feature. The audio system willmute when the front seat passengers’seatbelts are not fastened.

• Early low fuel. The low-fuel warningactivates earlier, giving the MyKey usermore time to refuel.

• Driver assist features, if equipped onyour vehicle, are forced on: rear parkingaid, blind spot information system,cross traffic alert, lane departurewarning, collision warning system andnavigation.

• Track Mode, if your vehicle is equippedwith this feature, is restricted.

Configurable SettingsWith an admin key, you can configurecertain MyKey settings when you firstcreate a MyKey and before you recycle thekey or restart the vehicle. You can alsochange the settings afterward with anadmin key.• A vehicle speed limit can be set.

Warnings will be shown in the displayfollowed by an audible tone when yourvehicle reaches the set speed. Youcannot override the set speed by fullydepressing the accelerator pedal or bysetting cruise control.

WARNINGDo not set MyKey maximum speedlimit to a limit that will prevent thedriver from maintaining a safe speed

considering posted speed limits andprevailing road conditions. The driver isalways responsible to drive in accordancewith local laws and prevailing conditions.Failure to do so could result in accident orinjury.

35


MyKey™

• Various vehicle speed minders can beset. Once you select a speed, it will beshown in the display, followed by anaudible tone when the preselectedvehicle speed is exceeded.

• Audio system maximum volume of45%. A message will be shown in thedisplay when you attempt to exceedthe limited volume. Also, thespeed-sensitive or compensatedautomatic volume control will bedisabled.

• Always on setting. When this isselected, you will not be able to turnoff traction control, emergency assist,do not disturb (if your vehicle isequipped with these features), andSport Mode will not be available toMyKey drivers.

CREATING A MYKEYUse the information display to create aMyKey:1. Insert the key you want to program into

the ignition. If your vehicle is equippedwith a push-button start, place theremote control into the backup slot.The location of your backup slot is inanother chapter. See Starting aGasoline Engine (page 99).

2. Switch the ignition on.3. Access the main menu on the

information display controls. Use thearrow keys to get to the following menuselections:

Action and DescriptionMessage

Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings

Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey

Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Create MyKey

When prompted, hold the OK button untilyou see a message informing you to labelthis key as a MyKey. The key will berestricted at the next start.MyKey is successfully created. Make sureyou label it so you can distinguish it fromthe admin keys.You can also program configurablesettings for the key(s). SeeProgramming/Changing ConfigurableSettings.

Programming/ChangingConfigurable SettingsUse the information display to access yourconfigurable MyKey settings.1. Switch the ignition on using an admin

key or remote control.2. Access the main menu on the

information display controls. Use thearrow keys to get to the following menuselections:


Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings

Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey

36


MyKey™

Note: You can clear or change your MyKeysettings at any time during the same keycycle as you created the MyKey. Once youhave switched the vehicle off, however, youwill need an admin key to change or clearyour MyKey settings.

CLEARING ALL MYKEYSYou can clear or change your MyKeysettings using the information displaycontrol on the steering wheel. SeeInformation Displays (page 67).Switch the ignition on using an admin keyor remote control.

To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to accessthe main menu and scroll to:


Press the OK button.Settings

Press the OK button.MyKey

Press and hold the OK button until the following messagedisplays.

Clear MyKey

All MyKeys

ClearedNote: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys totheir original admin key status.

37


MyKey™

CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEMSTATUS

You can find information on programmedMyKey(s) using the information displaycontrol on the steering wheel. SeeInformation Displays (page 67).

To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button toaccess the main menu and scroll to:

DescriptionMessage


Press the OK button.MyKey

Select one of the following:

Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only wayto delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin keyto clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate asexpected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, oran admin key user recently cleared and then recreated aMyKey.

MyKey Dist.

Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle.Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have foryour vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.

{0} MyKeys

Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to yourvehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestrictedkeys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additionalMyKey has been programmed.

{0} Admin Keys

38


MyKey™

USING MYKEY WITH REMOTESTART SYSTEMSMyKey is not compatible with non

Ford-approved, aftermarket remote startsystems. If you choose to install a remotestart system, see an authorized dealer fora Ford-approved remote start system.

MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING

Potential CausesCondition

I cannot create a MyKey. • The key or transmitter used to start thevehicle does not have admin privileges.

• The key or transmitter used to start thevehicle is the only admin key (there alwayshas to be at least one admin key).

• Vehicles with keyless start: The keylessstart transmitter is not placed in the backupposition. See Starting and Stopping theEngine (page 98).

• SecuriLock passive anti-theft system isdisabled.

• The key or transmitter used to start yourvehicle does not have admin privileges.

• No MyKeys are created. See Creating aMyKey (page 36).

I cannot program the configurablesettings.

• The key or transmitter used to start yourvehicle does not have admin privileges.


I cannot clear the MyKeys.

Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.I lost the only admin key.

Contact an authorized dealer.I lost a key.

MyKey distances do not accumulate. • The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.• An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys

and created new MyKeys.• The key system has been reset.

• An admin transmitter is present at vehiclestart.


No MyKey functions with the keylessentry transmitter.

39


MyKey™

LOCKING AND UNLOCKINGYou can use the power door lock controlor the remote control to lock and unlockyour vehicle.

Power Door LocksThe power door lock control is on the driverand front passenger door panels.

E180791

Unlock.ALock.B

Door Lock IndicatorAn LED on each door window trimilluminates when you lock the door. Itremains on for up to 10 minutes after youswitch the ignition off.

Door Lock Switch InhibitorWhen you electronically lock your vehicle,the power door lock switch no longeroperates after 20 seconds. You mustunlock your vehicle with the remotecontrol, or switch the ignition on to restorefunction to these switches. You can switchthis feature on or off in the informationdisplay. See (page 67).

Remote ControlYou can use the remote control at anytime.

Note: The luggage compartment releasebutton only works when your vehicle speedis less than 8 km/h (5 mph).

Unlocking the Doors

E138629

Press the button to unlock alldoors. The direction indicatorswill flash.

Note: The driver door can be unlocked withthe key if the remote control is notfunctioning.Note: When you leave your vehicleunattended for several weeks, the remotecontrol turns off. Your vehicle must beunlocked and the engine started using thekey. Unlocking and starting your vehicle onceenables the remote control.

Reprogramming the Unlocking FunctionYou can reprogram the unlocking functionso that only the driver door is unlocked.Press and hold both the lock and unlockbuttons on the remote control for threeseconds to change between driver door orall doors unlock mode. The directionindicators will flash twice to indicate achange to the unlocking mode. Driver doorunlock mode only unlocks the driver doorwhen you press the unlock button once.All door unlock mode unlocks all doorswhen you press the unlock button once.The unlocking mode applies to the remotecontrol. You can also change between theunlocking modes using the informationdisplay. See (page 67).

Locking the Doors

E138623

Press the button to lock alldoors. The direction indicatorswill flash.

Note: If any door or the luggagecompartment is open, or if the hood is openon vehicles that have an anti-theft alarm orremote start, the direction indicators willnot flash.

40


Locks

Double Locking the Doors

WARNINGDo not use double locking whenpassengers or animals are inside yourvehicle. The doors cannot be

unlocked or opened from the inside whendouble locked.

Double locking is a theft protection featurethat prevents someone from opening thedoors from the inside. It will only operateif all of the doors are fully closed.

E138623

Press the button twice withinthree seconds.

Auto RelockThe doors automatically relock if you donot open a door within 45 seconds ofunlocking the doors with the remotecontrol. The door locks and the alarmreturn to their previous state. You canswitch this feature on or off in theinformation display. See (page 67).

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsFrom InsideUse the power door lock control locatedon the driver and front passenger doorpanels.

Locking and Unlocking the Doorswith the Key BladeLocking the Doors

E180643

If the central locking function does notoperate, lock the doors individually usingthe key in the position shown.

Left-Hand SideTurn clockwise to lock.

Right-Hand SideTurn counterclockwise to lock.

Unlocking the DoorsIf the central locking function does notoperate, unlock the driver door and thenunlock all other doors individually bypulling the interior door handles.

41


Locks

Note: If the doors have been unlocked usingthis method, the doors must be lockedindividually until the central locking functionhas been repaired.

Unlocking the Luggage Compartment(Convertible Only)

E188353

If the power luggage compartment deckliddoes not operate because the battery hasno charge, do the following:1. Pull the left-hand side rear seat

backrest cushion aside.2. Insert the key blade into the key slot.3. Turn the key to release the luggage

compartment.

Opening the LuggageCompartmentFrom Inside Your Vehicle

E188015

Press the button on the instrument panelto open the luggage compartment.

From Outside Your Vehicle

E175208

Press the release button above the licenseplate to unlatch the luggage compartment.Your vehicle must be unlocked or have anintelligent access key within 1 m (3 ft) ofthe luggage compartment.

With the Remote Control

E138630

Press twice within three secondsto open the luggagecompartment.

KEYLESS ENTRYGeneral InformationThe system will not function if:• Your vehicle battery has no charge.• The key battery has no charge.• The passive key frequencies are

jammed.Note: If the system does not function, usethe key blade to lock and unlock yourvehicle. See Remote Control (page 32).The system allows you to unlock, operateand lock your vehicle without using a keyor remote control.

42


Locks

E78276

Passive locking and unlocking requires avalid passive key to be located within oneof the three external detection ranges.These are located approximately 1.5 m(5 ft) from the front door handles and theluggage compartment.Note: The system may not function if thepassive key is close to metal objects orelectronic devices, for example keys or a cellphone.

Passive KeyYour vehicle can be locked and unlockedusing the passive key. You can also use thepassive key as a remote control to lock andunlock your vehicle. See Locking andUnlocking (page 40).

Locking Your VehicleNote: Your vehicle does not automaticallylock. If you do not touch a locking sensoryour vehicle will remain unlocked.

E180792

Touch the top of the door handle to lockyour vehicle. There is a brief delay beforeyou can unlock your vehicle again.Note: Keep the door handle clean to makesure the system operates correctly.Note: Your vehicle will remain locked forapproximately one second. When the delayperiod is over, you can open the doors again,provided the passive key is within therespective detection range.When you lock your vehicle, the directionindicators will flash twice to confirm yourvehicle has locked and the alarm is armed.

Unlocking Your VehiclePull an exterior door handle to unlock andopen the door. Do not touch the locksensor on the front of the handle.Note: A passive key must be located withinthe detection range.When you unlock your vehicle, the directionindicators will flash once to confirm yourvehicle has unlocked and the alarm hasdisarmed.

Unlocking Only the Driver DoorYou can program the system so that onlythe driver door is unlocked. See Lockingand Unlocking (page 40).

43


Locks

If the unlocking function is reprogrammedso that only the driver door is unlocked thefollowing will occur:• If the driver door is the first door

opened, the passenger door will remainlocked. The passenger door can beunlocked from inside your vehicle bypressing the unlock button located onthe driver and passenger door panels.You can unlock the doors individuallyby pulling the interior door handle onthose doors.

• If the passenger door is the first dooropened, the driver door will also unlock.

At the Luggage Compartment

E175208

Press the exterior release button hiddenabove the license plate.Note: A passive key must be located withinthe detection range.

Disabled Passive KeysPassive keys left inside your vehicle whenlocked are disabled.You cannot use a disabled passive key toswitch the ignition on.You must enable all passive keys again touse them. To enable all your passive keys,unlock your vehicle using a valid passivekey. You will reactivate disabled passivekeys when you switch the ignition on usinga valid key.

Note: You can still start your vehicle whenthe passive key is in the back-up position.See Keyless Starting (page 98).

Locking and Unlocking the Doorswith the Key Blade

E151796

Slide the release on the back of the remotecontrol and pivot the cover off to accessthe key blade. See Remote Control (page32).Note: Only the driver door handle has a lockcylinder.

44


Locks

PASSIVE ANTI-THEFTSYSTEMPrinciple of OperationThe system prevents someone fromstarting the engine with an incorrectlycoded key.Note: Do not leave correctly coded keys inthe vehicle. Always take your keys and lockall doors when leaving the vehicle.

Coded KeysIf you lose a key, you can obtain areplacement from an authorized dealer. Ifpossible, provide them with the keynumber from the tag provided with theoriginal keys. You can also obtain extrakeys from an authorized dealer.Note: Have all of your remaining keyserased and recoded if you lose a key. Havereplacement keys coded together withrecoding your remaining keys. See anauthorized dealer for further information.Note: Do not shield your keys with metalobjects. This may prevent the receiver fromrecognizing a coded key.

Arming the Engine ImmobilizerWhen you switch the ignition off the engineimmobilizer will arm automatically after ashort time.

Disarming the Engine ImmobilizerWhen you switch the ignition on the engineimmobilizer will disarm automatically if acorrectly coded key is used.If you are unable to start your vehicle witha correctly coded key, have your vehiclechecked by an authorized dealer.

ANTI-THEFT ALARM -VEHICLES WITH: PERIMETERALARMThe perimeter alarm is a deterrent againstunauthorized access to your vehiclethrough the doors and the hood. It alsoprotects the audio unit.If the alarm is triggered, the alarm horn willsound and the hazard warning flasher willflash.Take all remote controls to an authorizeddealer if there is any potential alarmproblem with your vehicle.

Arming the AlarmTo arm the alarm, lock your vehicle. SeeLocks (page 40).

Disarming the AlarmDisarm and silence the alarm by unlockingthe doors and switching your vehicle on orunlocking the doors with the remotecontrol.Note: A valid passive key must be locatedwithin the detection range of that door forkeyless entry. See Keyless Entry (page 42).

ANTI-THEFT ALARM -VEHICLES WITH: INTERIORSENSORAlarm System

WARNINGDo not arm the alarm with full guardif passengers, animals or othermoving objects are inside your

vehicle.

45


Security

Perimeter AlarmThe perimeter alarm is a deterrent againstunauthorized access to your vehiclethrough the doors and the hood. It alsoprotects the audio unit.

Interior SensorsThe interior lamp unit sensors are locatedin the overhead console.Note: Do not cover up the interior lamp unitsensors.The sensors act as a deterrent againstunauthorized intrusion by sensing anymovement inside your vehicle.

Triggering the AlarmOnce armed, the alarm is triggered in anyof the following ways:• If someone opens a door, the liftgate

or the hood without a valid key orremote control.

• If someone removes the audio unit ornavigation system.

• If you switch your vehicle on without acorrectly coded key.

• If the interior sensors detect movementwithin your vehicle.

If the alarm is triggered, the alarm horn willsound for 30 seconds and the hazardwarning flasher will flash for five minutes.Any further attempts to perform one of theabove will trigger the alarm again.

Full and Reduced GuardFull GuardFull guard is the standard setting.In full guard, the interior sensors are onwhen you arm the alarm.

Reduced GuardIn reduced guard, the interior sensors areoff when you arm the alarm.

Selecting Full or Reduced GuardYou can select full or reduced guard usingthe information display. See GeneralInformation (page 67).

Ask on Exit (If Equipped)You can set the information display to askyou each time which level of guard youwish to set.

Using the information display controls, scroll to:



Press the OK button.Vehicle settings

Press the OK button.Alarm

Press the OK button.Ask on exit

Appears in the information display each time you switch yourvehicle off.

Reduced guard

If you wish to arm the alarm with reduced guard, press theOK button when this message appears.

46


Security


If you wish to arm the alarm with full guard, leave your vehiclewithout pressing the OK button.

Note: Selecting reduced guard does not set the alarm permanently to reduced guard. Itsets it to reduced guard only for the current locking cycle.


Disarming the AlarmDisarm and silence the alarm by unlockingthe doors and switching your vehicle on orunlocking the doors with the remotecontrol.Note: A valid passive key must be locatedwithin the detection range of that door forkeyless entry. See Keyless Entry (page 42).

ANTI-THEFT ALARM -VEHICLES WITH: INTEGRALBATTERYAlarm System

WARNINGDo not arm the alarm with full guardif passengers, animals or othermoving objects are inside your

vehicle.

Perimeter AlarmThe perimeter alarm is a deterrent againstunauthorized access to your vehiclethrough the doors and the hood.

Interior SensorsThe interior lamp unit sensors are locatedin the overhead console.

Note: Do not cover up the interior lamp unitsensors.The sensors act as a deterrent againstunauthorized access by sensing anymovement within your vehicle.

Battery Back-up SounderThe battery back-up sounder is anadditional alarm system, which sounds asiren if your vehicle battery or the batteryback-up sounder is disconnected. Whenyou lock your vehicle the system is armed.The sounder has its own battery and willsound an alarm siren even if someonedisconnects your vehicle battery or thebattery back-up sounder itself.

Triggering the AlarmOnce armed, the alarm is triggered in anyof the following ways:• If someone opens a door, the liftgate

or the hood without a valid key orremote control.

• If someone removes the audio ornavigation system.

• If you switch your vehicle on without acorrectly coded key.

• If the interior sensors detect movementwithin your vehicle.

• On vehicles with a battery back-upsounder, if someone disconnects yourvehicle battery or the battery back-upsounder itself.

If the alarm is triggered, the alarm horn willsound for 30 seconds and the hazardwarning flasher will flash for five minutes.

47


Security

Any further attempts to perform one of theabove sounds the alarm again.

Full and Reduced GuardFull GuardFull guard is the standard setting.In full guard, the interior sensors are onwhen you arm the alarm.

Reduced GuardIn reduced guard, the interior sensors areoff when you arm the alarm.

Selecting Full or Reduced GuardYou can select full or reduced guard usingthe information display. See GeneralInformation (page 67).

Ask on Exit (If Equipped)You can set the information display to askyou each time which level of guard youwish to set.

Using the information display controls, scroll to:



Press the OK button.Vehicle settings

Press the OK button.Alarm

Press the OK button.Ask on exit

Appears in the information display each time you switch yourvehicle off.

Reduced

If you wish to arm the alarm with reduced guard, press theOK button when this message appears.If you wish to arm the alarm with full guard, leave your vehiclewithout pressing the OK button.

Note: Selecting reduced guard does not set the alarm permanently to reduced guard. Itsets it to reduced guard only for the current locking cycle.


Disarming the AlarmNote: A valid passive key must be locatedwithin the detection range of that door forkeyless entry. See Keyless Entry (page 42).

Perimeter AlarmDisarm and silence the alarm by unlockingthe doors and switching your vehicle on orunlocking the doors with the remotecontrol.

Category One AlarmDisarm and silence the alarm by unlockingthe doors and switching your vehicle onwithin 12 seconds or unlocking the doorsor the liftgate with the remote control.

48


Security

ADJUSTING THE STEERINGWHEEL

WARNINGDo not adjust the steering wheelwhen your vehicle is moving.

Note: Make sure that you sit in the correctposition. See Sitting in the CorrectPosition (page 91).

E176634

1. Unlock the steering column.2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired

position.

E176635

3. Lock the steering column.

AUDIO CONTROLYou can operate the following functionswith the control:

E174583

Volume up.ASeek up or next.BVolume down.CSeek down or previous.DMedia.E

MEDIAPress repeatedly to scroll through availableaudio sources.

Seek, Next or PreviousPress the seek button to:• Tune the radio to the next or previous

stored preset.• Play the next or the previous track.Press and hold the seek button to:• Tune the radio to the next station up

or down the frequency band.• Seek or fast forward through a track.

49


Steering Wheel

VOICE CONTROL

E174584

C

D

B

A

End a call.AAnswer a call.BVoice recognition.CMute.D

See your SYNC information.

CRUISE CONTROL

E174594

See Cruise Control (page 127).

INFORMATION DISPLAYCONTROL

E174595

See Information Displays (page 67).

50


Steering Wheel

WINDSHIELD WIPERSNote: Fully defrost the windshield beforeswitching on the windshield wipers.Note: Make sure you switch off thewindshield wipers before entering a carwash.Note: Clean the windshield and wiperblades if they begin to leave streaks orsmears. If that does not resolve the issue,install new wiper blades.Note: Do not operate the wipers on a drywindshield. This may scratch the glass,damage the wiper blades or cause the wipermotor to burn out. Always use thewindshield washers before wiping a drywindshield.

E173728

Single wipeAIntermittent wipeBNormal wipeCHigh speed wipeD

Intermittent Wipe

E173729

Shortest wipe intervalAIntermittent wipeBLongest wipe intervalC

Use the rotary control to adjust theintermittent wipe interval.

Speed Dependent WipersWhen your vehicle speed increases, theinterval between wipes will decrease.

AUTOWIPERSThe feature uses a rain sensor. You will findit in the area around the interior mirror. Therain sensor monitors the amount ofmoisture on the windshield andautomatically turns on the wipers. Itadjusts the wiper speed by the amount ofmoisture that the sensor detects on thewindshield. You can switch this feature onand off in the information display. See(page 67).

51


Wipers and Washers

E173730

Highest sensitivityAOnBLowest sensitivityC

Use the rotary control to adjust thesensitivity of the rain sensor. There are sixsensitivity settings. When you set thecontrol to low sensitivity (the firstposition), the wipers turn on when there isa large amount of moisture on thewindshield. When you set the control tohigh sensitivity (the sixth position), thewipers will turn on when there is a smallamount of moisture on the windshield.Keep the outside of the windshield clean.The rain sensor is very sensitive. If the areaaround the mirror is dirty, then the wipersmay operate if dirt, mist or insects hit thewindshield.Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,snow or salty road mist can causeinconsistent and unexpected wiping orsmearing. You can do the following to helpkeep your windshield clear:• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers

to reduce the amount of smearing.• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.• Switch off the autowipers.Note: Fully defrost the windshield beforeswitching on the windshield wipers.

Note: Make sure you switch off thewindshield wipers before entering a carwash.Note: Clean the windshield and wiperblades if they begin to leave streaks orsmears. If that does not resolve the issue,install new wiper blades.Note: If you switch on the autolampsfeature in conjunction with autowipers, yourlow beam headlamps will turn onautomatically when the rain sensor turns onthe windshield wipers to a normal wipespeed.

WINDSHIELD WASHERSNote: Do not operate the washers whenthe washer reservoir is empty. This maycause the washer pump to overheat.

E173731

To operate the washers and spray thewindshield, pull the lever toward you.

52


Wipers and Washers

GENERAL INFORMATIONCondensation in Lamp AssembliesExterior lamps have vents toaccommodate normal changes in airpressure.Condensation can be a natural by-productof this design. When moist air enters thelamp assembly through the vents, there isa possibility that condensation can occurwhen the temperature is cold. Whennormal condensation occurs, a fine mistcan form on the interior of the lens. Thefine mist eventually clears and exitsthrough the vents during normal operation.Clearing time may take as long as 48 hoursunder dry weather conditions.Examples of acceptable condensation are:• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,

drip marks or large droplets).• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the

lens.Examples of unacceptable condensationare:• A water puddle inside the lamp.• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets

present on the interior of the lens.If you see any unacceptable condensation,have your vehicle checked by an authorizeddealer.

LIGHTING CONTROL

E142449

OffAParking lamps, instrument panellamps, license plate lamps andtail lamps

B

HeadlampsC

High Beams

E162679

Push the lever forward to switch the highbeams on.Push the lever forward again or pull thelever toward you to switch the high beamsoff.

53


Lighting

Headlamp Flasher

E162680

Pull the lever toward you slightly andrelease it to flash the headlamps.

AUTOLAMPS

WARNINGThe autolamps switch position maynot activate the headlamps in all lowvisibility conditions, such as daytime

fog. Always ensure that your headlampsare switched to auto or on, as appropriate,during all low visibility conditions. Failureto do so may result in a collision.

E142451

When the lighting control is in theautolamps position, the headlampsautomatically turn on in low light situationsor when the wipers activate.

If equipped, the following also activatewhen the lighting control is in theautolamps position and you switch themon in the information display:• Configurable daytime running lamps.• Automatic high beam control.• Adaptive headlamp control.The headlamps remain on for a period oftime after you switch the ignition off. Usethe information display controls to adjustthe period of time that the headlampsremain on. See Information Displays(page 67).Note: With the headlamps in theautolamps position, you cannot switch thehigh beam headlamps on until theautolamps system turns the low beamheadlamps on.

Windshield Wiper ActivatedHeadlampsThe windshield wiper activated headlampsturn on within 10 seconds when you switchthe windshield wipers on and the lightingcontrol is in the autolamps position. Theyturn off approximately 60 seconds afteryou switch the windshield wipers off.The headlamps will not turn on by wiperactivation:• During a mist wipe.• When the wipers are on to clear washer

fluid during a wash condition.• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.Note: If you switch autolamps andautowipers on, the headlamps willautomatically turn on when the windshieldwipers continuously operate.

54


Lighting

INSTRUMENT LIGHTINGDIMMERNote: You disable the manual dimmerwhen you adjust the setting to AutoDimming in the information display. SeeInformation Displays (page 67).Note: If you disconnect the battery or itbecomes discharged, the illuminatedcomponents will switch to the maximumsetting.

E161902

Press repeatedly or press and hold untilyou reach the desired level.

HEADLAMP EXIT DELAYAfter you switch the ignition off, you canswitch the headlamps on by pulling thedirection indicator lever toward you. Youwill hear a short tone. The headlamps willswitch off automatically after threeminutes with any door open or 30 secondsafter the last door has been closed. Youcan cancel this feature by pulling thedirection indicator toward you again orswitching the ignition on.

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS

WARNINGAlways remember to switch yourheadlamps on in low light situationsor during inclement weather. The

system does not activate the tail lampsand may not provide adequate lightingduring these conditions. Failure to activateyour headlamps under these conditionsmay result in a collision.

To switch the system on:1. Switch the ignition on.2. Switch the lighting control to the off or

autolamp position.

FRONT FOG LAMPS

E132709

Press the control to switch the fog lampson or off.You can switch the fog lamps on when thelighting control is in any position exceptoff.Note: Only use fog lamps during reducedvisibility, for example, fog, snow or heavyrain.Note: If you switch autolamps on, you canonly switch the fog lamps on onceautolamps has turned the headlamps on.

55


Lighting

REAR FOG LAMPS

E132710

Press the control to switch the fog lampson or off.You can only switch the rear fog lamps onwhen either the front fog lamps or lowbeam headlamps are on.Note: Only use the rear fog lamps whenvisibility is less than 164 feet (50 meters).Note: Do not use the rear fog lamps whenit is raining or snowing.Note: If you switch autolamps on, you canonly switch the fog lamps on onceautolamps has turned the headlamps on.

HEADLAMP LEVELING1. Press to release the pop out button.

E132711

1

2

2

2. Rotate the control to the requiredsetting.

3. Push the button to the closed position.Adjust the level of the headlampsaccording to the load you are carrying inyour vehicle.

Recommended Headlamp Leveling Switch Positions

Switch positionLoad in luggagecompartment

Load

Second row seatsFront seats

0--1-2

0.5-22

1Max22

1Max-1

56


Lighting

DIRECTION INDICATORS

E162681

Push the lever up or down to use thedirection indicators.Note: Tap the lever up or down to make thedirection indicators flash three times toindicate a lane change.

WELCOME LIGHTINGMustang Projection LampsThe lamps are on the bottom of theexterior mirror housings. They will projectan image onto the ground a short distancefrom your vehicle when welcome lightingor lighted entry turns on.Note: Moisture, frost and ice build-up orother types of contamination on the surfaceof the light lens can cause non-permanentdistortion or reduced brightness of theimage. Do not use abrasive materials toclean the lens.

INTERIOR LAMPSThe lamps turn on when:• You open any door.• You press a button on the remote

control.• You press a map lamp button.

Map Lamps

E175199

Left-hand side map lamp.ARight-hand side map lamp.B

You can switch the lamps on individuallyby pressing the buttons.

AMBIENT LIGHTINGYou can adjust the ambient lighting systemin your information display. SeeInformation Displays (page 67).

57


Lighting

POWER WINDOWS

WARNINGSDo not leave children unattended inyour vehicle and do not let them playwith the power windows. They may

seriously injure themselves.When closing the power windows,you should verify they are free ofobstructions and make sure that

children and pets are not in the proximityof the window openings.

E180087

Note: You may hear a pulsing noise whenjust one of the windows is open. Lower theopposite window slightly to reduce thisnoise.Note: Use the singular control (if equipped)to open both rear windows.Press the switch to open the window.Lift the switch to close the window.

One-Touch DownPress the switch fully and release it. Pressagain or lift it to stop the window.

One-Touch Up (Coupe Only)Lift the switch fully and release it. Press orlift it again to stop the window.

Bounce-Back (Coupe Only)The window will stop automatically whileclosing. It will reverse some distance ifthere is an obstacle in the way.

Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature

WARNINGWhen you override the bounce-backfeature the window will not reverseif it detects an obstacle. Take care

when closing the windows to avoidpersonal injury or damage to your vehicle.

Pull up the window switch and hold withintwo seconds of the window reaching thebounce-back position. The window willtravel up with no bounce-back protection.The window will stop if you release theswitch before the window is fully closed.

Accessory DelayYou can use the window switches forseveral minutes after you switch theignition off or until you open either frontdoor.

GLOBAL OPENINGYou can use the remote control to operatethe windows with the ignition off.Note: You can enable or disable this featurein the information display, or see anauthorized dealer. See (page 67).Note: To operate this feature, accessorydelay must not be active.

58


Windows and Mirrors

Opening the WindowsYou can open the windows for a short timeafter you unlock your vehicle with theremote control. After you unlock yourvehicle, press and hold the remote controlunlock button to open the windows.Release the button once movement starts.Press the lock or unlock button to stopmovement.

EXTERIOR MIRRORSPower Exterior Mirrors

WARNINGDo not adjust the mirrors when yourvehicle is moving.

E176804

Left-hand mirrorAAdjustment controlBRight-hand mirrorC

To adjust a mirror:1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.

The control will illuminate.2. Adjust the position of the mirror.3. Press the mirror switch again.

Fold-Away Exterior MirrorsPush the mirror toward the door windowglass. Make sure that you fully engage themirror in its support when returning it to itsoriginal position.

Power-Folding Mirrors

E176805

Press the control to fold the mirror towardthe door window glass. Press the controlagain to fold the mirror back out to itsoriginal position.

Loose MirrorIf your power-folding mirrors are manuallyfolded, they may not work properly, evenafter you re-position them. You need toreset them if:• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.• The mirrors feel loose.• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or

unfolded position.• One of the mirrors is not in its normal

driving position.To reset the power-fold feature, use thepower-folding mirror control and unfoldthe mirrors. You may hear a loud noise asyour reset the power-folding mirrors. Thissound is normal. Repeat this process asneeded each time the mirrors are manuallyfolded.

59


Windows and Mirrors

Heated Exterior MirrorsSee Heated Windows and Mirrors (page90).

Signal Indicator MirrorsThe outer portion of the appropriate mirrorhousing will blink when you switch on theturn signal.

INTERIOR MIRROR

WARNINGDo not adjust the mirror when yourvehicle is moving.

Note: Do not clean the housing or glass ofany mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or otherpetroleum or ammonia-based cleaningproducts.You can adjust the interior mirror to yourpreference. In addition to the standardpivot point, this mirror also includes asecond pivot point, letting you move themirror head up or down and from side toside.

Auto-Dimming MirrorNote: Do not block the sensors on the frontand back of the mirror. Mirror performancemay be affected. A rear center passenger orraised rear center head restraint may alsoblock light from reaching the sensor.To reduce glare, the mirror dimsautomatically when it detects bright lightsfrom behind your vehicle. It automaticallyreturns to normal reflection when youselect reverse (R) gear to make sure youhave a clear view when backing up.

SUN VISORS

E138666

Rotate the sun visor toward the sidewindow and extend it rearward for extrashade.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

E162197

Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.

60


Windows and Mirrors

GAUGES

E174486

Tachometer (Revolutions per minute)AInformation displayBSpeedometer (Ground speed)CFuel gaugeDEngine coolant temperature gaugeE

Information DisplayOdometerLocated in the bottom of the informationdisplay. Registers the accumulateddistance your vehicle has traveled.

Trip ComputerSee (page 67).

Vehicle Settings and PersonalizationSee (page 67).

61


Instrument Cluster

Fuel GaugeNote: The fuel gauge may vary slightlywhen your vehicle is moving or on a gradient.Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge willindicate approximately how much fuel isleft in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent tothe fuel pump symbol indicates on whichside of your vehicle the fuel filler door islocated.The needle should move toward F whenyou refuel your vehicle. If the needle pointsto E after adding fuel, this indicates yourvehicle needs service soon.After refueling some variability in needleposition is normal:

• It may take a short time for the needleto reach F after leaving the gas station.This is normal and depends upon theslope of pavement at the gas station.

• The fuel amount dispensed into thetank is a little less or more than thegauge indicated. This is normal anddepends upon the slope of pavementat the gas station.

• If the gas station nozzle shuts offbefore the tank is full, try a differentgas pump nozzle.

Low Fuel ReminderA low fuel reminder triggers when thedistance to empty value reaches 80 km(50 mi) to empty, with additional warningsat 40 km (25 mi), 20 km (10 mi) and 0 km(0 mi) to empty, provided the message iscleared each time. An additional warningat 120 km (75 mi) to empty is providedwhen the MyKey is being used.

Variations:Note: The low fuel warning and distance-to-empty warning can appear at different fuelgauge positions depending on fuel economy conditions. This variation is normal.

Fuel gauge positionDistance-to-emptyDriving type (fuel economyconditions)

1/8th tank80 km (50 mi)Highway driving

1/4 tank80 km (50 mi)Severe duty driving (trailertowing, extended idle)

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge

WARNINGNever remove the coolant reservoircap while the engine is running or hot.

Indicates engine coolant temperature. Atnormal operating temperature, the levelindicator will be in the normal range. If theengine coolant temperature exceeds thenormal range, stop your vehicle as soon assafely possible, switch off the engine andlet it cool.

62


Instrument Cluster

WARNING LAMPS ANDINDICATORSThe following warning lamps andindicators will alert you to a vehiclecondition that may become serious. Somelamps will illuminate when you start yourvehicle to make sure they work. If anylamps remain on after starting your vehicle,refer to the respective system warninglamp for further information.Note: Some warning indicators appear inthe information display and function thesame as a warning lamp but do not displaywhen you start your vehicle.

Anti-Lock Braking SystemIf it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. You will continue

to have the normal braking system(without ABS) unless the brake systemwarning lamp is also illuminated. Have thesystem checked by your authorized dealer.

BatteryIf it illuminates while driving, itindicates a malfunction. Switchoff all unnecessary electrical

equipment and have the system checkedby your authorized dealer immediately.

Bonnet Ajar

E159324

It illuminates when the ignitionis on and the bonnet is notcompletely closed.

Boot Ajar

E159323

It illuminates when the ignitionis on and the boot is notcompletely closed.

Brake System

E144522

It illuminates when you engagethe parking brake with theignition on.

If it illuminates when you are driving, checkthat the parking brake is not engaged. Ifthe parking brake is not engaged, thisindicates low brake fluid level or a brakesystem malfunction. Have the systemchecked immediately by your authorizeddealer.

WARNINGDriving your vehicle with the warninglamp on is dangerous. A significantdecrease in braking performance

may occur. It will take you longer to stopyour vehicle. Have your vehicle checked byyour authorized dealer immediately. Drivingextended distances with the parking brakeengaged can cause brake failure and therisk of personal injury.

Cruise Control

E71340

It illuminates when you switchthis feature on.

Direction IndicatorIlluminates when the left or rightturn signal or the hazard warningflasher is turned on. If the

indicators stay on or flash faster, check fora burned out bulb. See Changing a Bulb(page 164).

Door AjarDisplays when the ignition is onand any door is not completelyclosed.

63


Instrument Cluster

Engine Coolant TemperatureIlluminates when the enginecoolant temperature is high.Stop the vehicle as soon as

possible, switch off the engine and let cool.See Engine Coolant Check (page 156).

Engine OilIf it illuminates with the enginerunning or when you are driving,this indicates a malfunction.

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe todo so and switch the engine off. Check theengine oil level. See Engine Oil Check(page 156).Note: Do not resume your journey if itilluminates despite the level being correct.Have the system checked by your authorizeddealer immediately.

Fasten Safety BeltIt will illuminate and a chime willsound to remind you to fastenyour safety belt. See Seatbelt

Reminder (page 22).

Front AirbagIf it fails to illuminate when youstart your vehicle, continues toflash or remains on, it indicates

a malfunction. Have the system checkedby your authorized dealer.

Front Fog LampsLights when you switch the frontfog lamps on.

High BeamIt will illuminate when you switchthe high beam headlamps on. Itwill flash when you use the

headlamp flasher.

Low Beam Malfunction

E181350

Lights when there is amalfunction with the low beamheadlamp bulb.

Low Fuel LevelIt will illuminate when the fuellevel is low or the fuel tank isnearly empty. Refuel as soon as

possible.

Low Tire Pressure WarningIt will illuminate when your tirepressure is low. If the lampremains on with the engine

running or when driving, check your tirepressures as soon as possible.It will also illuminate momentarily whenyou switch the ignition on to confirm thelamp is functional. If it does not illuminatewhen you switch the ignition on, or beginsto flash at any time, have the systemchecked by your authorized dealer.

Parking LampsIt will illuminate when you switchthe parking lamps on.

Rear Fog Lamps Indicator

E67040

It will illuminate when you switchthe rear fog lamps on.

64


Instrument Cluster

Service Engine SoonIf the service engine soonindicator light stays illuminatedafter the engine is started, it

indicates that the On Board Diagnosticssystem (OBD) has detected a malfunctionof the vehicle emissions control system.Refer to On board diagnostics (OBD) inthe Fuel and Refueling chapter for moreinformation about having your vehicleserviced.

If the light is blinking, engine misfire isoccurring which could damage yourcatalytic converter. Drive in a moderatefashion (avoid heavy acceleration anddeceleration) and have your vehicleserviced immediately.

WARNINGUnder engine misfire conditions,excessive exhaust temperaturescould damage the catalytic

converter, the fuel system, interior floorcoverings or other vehicle components,possibly causing a fire. Have an authorizeddealer service your vehicle immediately.

The service engine soon indicator lightilluminates when the ignition is first turnedon prior to engine start to check the bulband to indicate whether the vehicle is readyfor Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing.Normally, the service engine soon light willstay on until the engine is cranked, thenturn itself off if no malfunctions arepresent. However, if after 15 seconds theservice engine soon light blinks eight times,it means that the vehicle is not ready forI/M testing.

Stability Control

E138639

It will flash when the system isactive. If it remains illuminatedor does not illuminate when you

switch the ignition on, this indicates amalfunction. During a malfunction thesystem will switch off. Have the systemchecked by your authorized dealerimmediately. See Using StabilityControl (page 119).

Stability Control OffIt will illuminate when you switchthe system off. It will go outwhen you switch the system

back on or when you switch the ignitionoff. See Using Stability Control (page119).

AUDIBLE WARNINGS ANDINDICATORSKeyless Warning AlertThe horn will sound twice when you exityour vehicle with the intelligent access keyand your vehicle is in ON, indicating yourvehicle is still on. The horn will also soundtwice when you exit your vehicle andattempt to lock the doors manually whilethe intelligent access key is still in thevehicle. The doors will not lock if theintelligent access key remains in thevehicle.

Headlamps On Warning ChimeSounds when you remove the key from thevehicle and you have left the headlampsor parking lamps on.

65


Instrument Cluster

Parking Brake On Warning ChimeSounds when you have left the parkingbrake on and drive your vehicle. If thewarning chime remains on after you havereleased the parking brake, have thesystem checked by your authorized dealerimmediately.

66


Instrument Cluster

GENERAL INFORMATION


you use extreme caution when using anydevice that may take your focus off theroad. Your primary responsibility is the safeoperation of your vehicle. We recommendagainst the use of any handheld devicewhile driving and encourage the use ofvoice-operated systems when possible.Make sure you are aware of all applicablelocal laws that may affect the use ofelectronic devices while driving.

Various systems on your vehicle can becontrolled using the information displaycontrols on the steering wheel.Corresponding information is displayed inthe information display.

Information Display Controls

E174488

• Press the up and down arrow buttonsto scroll through and highlight theoptions within a menu.

• Press the right arrow button to enter asub-menu.

• Press the left arrow button to exit amenu.

• Press and hold the left arrow button atany time to return to the main menudisplay (escape button).

• Press the OK button to choose andconfirm settings or messages.

67


Information Displays

Main Menu

Gauge Mode

Trip/Fuel

Track Apps™

Driver assist

Settings

E204495

This icon gives you the ability toswitch a feature on or off. Acheck in the box indicates the

feature is enabled, and uncheckedindicates the feature is disabled.Note: Some options may appear slightlydifferent or not at all if the items areoptional.

Gauge Mode

Distance to empty

Tyre pressure

Virtual gauge shownAir/Fuel ratioGauge summary

Boost/Vacuum

Cylinder head temp

Inlet air temp

Oil pressure

Oil temperature

Transmiss. oil temp

Battery voltage

Note: In order to provide real-time values,some gauges may display more valuefluctuation than other gauges during normaloperation.Some gauges shown in standard measure.Metric similar.

Air/Fuel ratio

Displays the current air to fuel mixture inthe engine.

E174490

68



Boost/Vacuum

Displays the vacuum or boost pressure.

E205147

Cylinder head temp

Displays the engine's cylinder headtemperature.

E205146

Inlet air temp

Displays the temperature of the air in thecold air inlet tube.

E205149

Oil pressure

Displays the engine oil pressure. If thepressure is consistently too high or verylow, contact an authorized dealer.

E205148

Oil temperature

Displays the engine oil temperature. Ifthe temperature rises to the red area,stop in a safe place and let your vehiclecool. If the problem persists, see anauthorized dealer.

E174493

69



Transmiss. oil temp

Displays the transmission fluid operatingtemperature. If the temperature rises tothe red area, stop in a safe place and letthe transmission cool. If the problempersists, see an authorized dealer.

E174494

Battery voltage

Displays your vehicle's battery voltage.If the voltage is consistently too high orvery low, contact an authorized dealer.

E174495

Trip/Fuel

Trip 1 or Trip 2 - Trip timer, Trip distance, km to E and l/100 km

Instant fuel economyFuel economy

l/100 km

km to E

Last 30 minutesFuel history

l/100 km

km to E

Average speed

Note: Press and hold OK to reset thecurrently displayed information.

DescriptionMenu Item

Registers the time of individual journeys.Trip Timer

Registers the mileage of individual journeys.Trip Distance

Shows the approximate distance ourvehicle can travel before running out of fuel.

km to E

70



DescriptionMenu Item

Shows the average fuel usage based ontime.

l/100 km

Shows your instantaneous fuel usage.Instant fuel economy

Shows fuel usage as a bar graph based ontime. The graph is updated each minute

with the fuel economy that you achievedduring 30 minutes of driving.

Fuel history

WARNINGTrack Apps is for track use only.Remember that even advancedtechnology cannot defy the laws of

physics. It is always possible to lose controlof a vehicle due to inappropriate driverinput for the conditions. Aggressive drivingon any road condition can cause you tolose control of your vehicle increasing therisk of personal injury or property damage.

Note: Track Apps are for track use only.They are not to be used under any otherdriving conditions.Note: Viewed or cleared results cannot beused unless your vehicle is at a completestop. The right arrow on the display menuwill be inactive. If your vehicle does notreach 100 mph (160 km/h) during the trackrun, your display may not display your 1/4mile results.Note: The system will disable the collisionwarning system while using track apps orwhen you switch off ESC.

Track Apps™

Virtual gauge shownAccelerometer

Select your speed, distance and start settingsAcceleration timer

Select settingBrake performance

Track (XXX)Lap Timer

Select settingRPMLaunch control

Acceleration timerView/Clear results

Brake performance

All time best

Clear saved data

Clear all time best

Clear acceleration

71



Accelerometer

Displays your vehicle's rate of accelera-tion or deceleration.

E174498

The red dot will move toward the area ofacceleration or deceleration.• LEFT acceleration or deceleration -

When accelerating or decelerating left,the red dot will move to the right on theaccelerometer.

• RIGHT acceleration/deceleration -When accelerating or deceleratingright, the red dot will move to the lefton the accelerometer.

Acceleration timer

Displays your vehicle's rate of accelera-tion.

1. Choose desired speed or distance.2. Choose Automatic Start or Countdown

Start.

3. Follow the on-screen prompts.

Brake performance

Displays your vehicle's rate of decelera-tion.

1. Choose desired speed to startrecording data.

2. Follow the on-screen prompts.

Lap Timer

Gives the driver the ability to record threeseparate lap times.

Launch control

Maximize traction from a standing start.

Line lock

Locks front brakes while allowing rearwheels to turn freely.

View/Clear results

View and clear the last and saved resultsof the acceleration timer, brakeperformance and all time best.

Note: Some items are optional and maynot appear.

Driver assist

ESC

Hill start assist

Rear Park Pilot

Seatbelts

Tyre pressure monitor

72



Tyre pressure

Displays your current vehicle tire pres-sures.

E205145

Note: Some items are optional and maynot appear.

Settings

Ask on exitAlarmsystem

Vehicle settings

Select settingHeadlampdelay

Lighting

Daytime lights

Auto unlockLocks

Mislock

Relock

Select settingUnlocking

Switches inhibit

Oil life reset

Park lock control

Select settingClimatecontrol

Remote start

Seats

Duration

System

Global openWindows

Global close

Courtesy wipeWipers

Rain sensing

73



Settings

Ask on exitAlarmsystem

Vehicle settings

Select colourGauge ColorMyColour

Ambient lightAmbientlight

Select settingAmbient dim

Select colourAmbientcolour

Set MyColour1 - 3

SetMyColour

Select settingMyKey infoMyKey

CreateMyKey

EmergencyAssistance

ESC

Do notdisturb

Max speed

Speedminder

Volume limit

Select settingClearMyKeys

Select settingMeasure unitDisplay settings

Temperatureunit

Tyre pres-sure

Language

74



INFORMATION MESSAGESNote: Depending on your vehicle optionsand instrument cluster type, not all of themessages display or are available. Theinformation display may abbreviate orshorten certain messages.

E174595

Press the OK button to acknowledge andremove some messages from theinformation display. The informationdisplay automatically removes othermessages after a short time.You need to confirm certain messagesbefore you can access the menus.

Airbag

ActionMessage

The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.Remove blockage.

Occupant sensorblocked Remove objects

near passenger seat

Alarm

ActionMessage

Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-TheftAlarm (page 47).

Vehicle alarm Startvehicle to stop alarm

All perimeter sensors are active. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page47).

Alarm system Full guardReduced guard

75



Battery and Charging System

ActionMessage

The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays onor continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon

as possible.

Check Charging system

The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays onor continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon

as possible.

Charging system Servicesoon

The charging system needs servicing. Contact an authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

Charging system Servicenow

The battery management system determines that the batteryis at a low state of charge. Turn your ignition off as soon as

possible to protect the battery. This message clears once yourestart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has

recovered.

Battery state of chargelow

The battery management system detects an extended low-voltage condition. Your vehicle disables various features tohelp preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electricalloads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the

system voltage has recovered, the disabled features operateagain as normal.

Low battery Featurestemporarily turned off

The battery management system determines that the batteryis at a low state of charge. Turn your ignition off as soon as

possible to protect the battery. This message clears once yourestart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has

recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads allowfaster battery state-of-charge recovery.

Turn power off to savebattery

Doors and Locks

ActionMessage

The door(s) listed is not completely closed.X door open

The boot is not completely closed.Boot open

The bonnet is not completely closed.Bonnet open

The system has disabled the door switches.Switches inhibitedSecurity mode

76



Electronic Stability Control

ActionMessage

The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.ESC Service required

The driver has disabled or enabled the traction control.ESC Off On

The system is in sport mode.ESC Sport mode

Engine

ActionMessage

The engine is overheating and the power has been reducedto assist in lowering the temperature. Stop in a safe place as

soon as it is possible.

Power reduced to lowerengine temperature

Fuel

ActionMessage

An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low

The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check fuel fill inlet

Hill Start Assist

ActionMessage

Hill start assist is not available. Contact an authorized dealer.See Hill Start Assist (page 115).

Hill start assist not avail-able

Keys and Intelligent Access

ActionMessage

A reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle.Press brake to start

A reminder to depress the clutch pedal on manual transmis-sion while starting the vehicle.

Press clutch to start

The system does not detect a key in your vehicle. See KeylessStarting (page 98).

No key detected

77



ActionMessage

You pressed the start/stop button to switch off the engineand your vehicle does not detect your intelligent access key

inside your vehicle.

Restart now or key isneeded

Your vehicle is in the accessory ignition state.Accessory power isactive

There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. Seean authorized dealer for service.

Starting systemmalfunction

You have successfully programmed an intelligent access keyto the system.

Key program successful

You have failed to program an intelligent access key to thesystem.

Key program failure

You have programmed the maximum number of keys to thesystem.

Maximum number ofkeys learned

You have not programmed enough keys to the system.Not enough keys learned

The key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible.Key battery low Replacesoon

Inform the driver that they are exiting the vehicle and theengine is on.

Engine ON

Maintenance

ActionMessage

Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off theengine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continuesto come on with your engine running, contact an authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

Engine oil pressure low

The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine OilCheck (page 156).

Change engine oil soon

The oil life left is at 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 156).Oil change required

The brake fluid level is low, inspected the brake systemimmediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 158).

Brake Fluid Level Low

78



ActionMessage

The brake system needs servicing. Stop your vehicle in a safeplace. Contact an authorized dealer.

Check brake system

Your vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This maynot allow some features to operate properly. See an author-

ized dealer.

Transport / factorymode Contact dealer

The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.See manual

MyKey

ActionMessage

You cannot program a MyKey.MyKey not created

MyKey is active.MyKey active Drivesafely

When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displaysthat the MyKey speed limit is on.

Speed limited to XXMPH/km/h

MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehiclespeed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).

Vehicle near top speed

You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.MyKey Vehicle at topspeed

You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.Check speed Drive safely

Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use.Buckle up to unmuteaudio

With a MyKey in use, ESC turns on.MyKey ESC on

With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.MyKey Traction controlon

With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.MyKey Park Pilot cannotbe deactivated

79



Park Brake

ActionMessage

You have set the parking brake and you have driven the vehiclemore than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays on after youhave released the parking brake, contact an authorized dealer.

Park brake applied

Park Pilot

ActionMessage

The system has detected a condition that requires service.Contact an authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page

122).

Check rear Park Pilot

Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Pilot On Off

Seats

ActionMessage

A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.Memory recall notpermitted while driving

Shows where you have saved your memory setting.Memory {0} saved

Starting System

ActionMessage

A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle.Press brake to start

A reminder to apply the clutch when starting your vehicle.Press clutch to start

The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting tostart your vehicle.

Cranking time exceeded

The starter is attempting to start your vehicle.Engine start pendingPlease wait

The system has cancelled the pending start.Pending start cancelled

80



Steering System

ActionMessage

The power steering system has detected a condition thatrequires service. See an authorized dealer.

Steering malfunctionService now

The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehiclein a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.

Steering loss Stop safely

The power steering system has detected a condition withinthe power steering system or passive entry or passive start

system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.

Steering assist malfunc-tion Service required

The steering lock system has detected a condition thatrequires service. See an authorized dealer.

Steering lock malfunc-tion Service now

You need to turn your steering wheel while start your vehicleto unlock your steering column.

Steering lock Reinsertkey while turning wheel

Traction Control

ActionMessage

The status of the traction control system after you switchedit off or on. See Using Traction Control (page 117).

Traction control off /Traction control on

A spinout has occurred and the hazards are on.Spinout DetectedHazards Activated

Transmission

ActionMessage

See your authorized dealer.Transmission malfunc-tion Service now

The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in asafe place as soon as it is possible.

Transmission over-heating Stop safely

The transmission has overheated and needs to cool. Stop ina safe place as soon as it is possible.

Transmission overtem-perature Stop safely

See your authorized dealer.Transmission ServiceRequired

Transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool.Transmission too hotPress brake

81



ActionMessage

Displays when the transmission has overheated and haslimited functionality. See Automatic Transmission (page

109).

Transmission limitedfunction See manual

Transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before youdrive.

Transmission WarmingUp Please Wait

Displays as a reminder to shift into park.Transmission not in Park

Displays as a reminder to press the brake pedal in order toselect a gear.

Press brake pedal

Displays when the transmission has adjusted the shiftstrategy.

Transmission Adjusted

Displays when the transmission is adjusting the shift strategy.Transmission Adapt-Mode

Displays when the transmission shift lever is locked and unableto select gears.

Transmission Indicat-Mode Lockup on

Displays when the transmission shift lever is unlocked andfree to select gears.

Transmission Indicat-Mode Lockup off

Tyre Pressure Monitoring System

ActionMessage

One or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure. SeeTire Pressure Monitoring System (page 179).

Tyre pressure low

The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If thewarning stays on or continues to come on, contact an

authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System(page 179).

Tyre pressure monitormalfunction

A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is inuse. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 179). If

the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact anauthorized dealer as soon as possible.

Tyre pressure sensormalfunction

82



PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONOutside AirKeep the air intakes in front of thewindshield free from obstruction (such assnow or leaves) to allow the climatecontrol system to function effectively.

Recirculated AirWARNING

Prolonged use of recirculated air maycause the windows to mist up. If thewindows mist up, follow the settings

for demisting the windshield.

The air currently in the passengercompartment recirculates. Outside air doesnot enter your vehicle.

HeatingHeating performance depends on thetemperature of the engine coolant.

General Information on Controllingthe Interior ClimateFully close all the windows.

Warming the InteriorDirect the air toward your feet. In cold orhumid weather conditions, direct some ofthe air toward the windshield and the doorwindows.

Cooling the InteriorDirect the air toward your face.

Air ConditioningThe system directs air through theevaporator for cooling. The evaporatorextracts humidity from the air to help keepthe windows free of mist. The systemdirects the resulting condensation to theoutside of your vehicle, which may causea small pool to form under your vehicle.This is normal.Note: The air conditioning operates onlywhen the temperature is above 4°C (39°F).Note: When you use air conditioning, yourvehicle uses more fuel.

AIR VENTSCenter Air Vents

E204054

Side Air Vents

E204055

83


Climate Control

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL

E174095

Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system isoff, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.

A

Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distributionto the instrument panel and footwell vents turns off. You can also use thissetting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.

B

Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window onand off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 90).

C

MAX A/C: Adjust the control to the full cool position to maximize cooling.Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioningautomatically turns on, and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.

D

Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in yourvehicle.

E

MAX Defrost: Adjust the control to the full heat position to switch on defrost.Outside air flows through the windshield vents, air conditioning automaticallyturns on, and fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed. You can also usethis setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. Theheated rear window also automatically turns on when you select maximumdefrost.

F

Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air whenmaximum defrost is on.

84


Climate Control

Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air andrecirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the air currently in thepassenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to coolthe interior (when used with A/C) and may reduce unwanted odors fromentering your vehicle.

G

Note: Recirculated air may turn off automatically (or be prevented from turningon) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce risk of fogging. Recirculatedair may also turn on and off automatically in Panel or Panel and Floor airflowmodes during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency.Air distribution control: Adjust the control to turn airflow from the windshield,instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through anycombination of these vents.

H

A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioningcools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortabletemperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold airthrough the air vents.

I

Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioningcompressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning isswitched off.Fan speed indicators: Illuminates to indicate fan speed.JFan speed control: Adjusts the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.K

85


Climate Control

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

E174096

Heated seats (if equipped): Press the button to switch the heated seats onand off. See Climate Controlled Seats (page 94).

A

Driver temperature control: Adjusts the temperature setting using the controlon the driver side.

B

Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distributionto the instrument panel and footwell vents turns off. You can also use thissetting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.

C

MAX Defrost: Press the button to switch on defrost. Outside air flows throughthe windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and fanautomatically adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting todefrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear windowalso automatically turns on when you select maximum defrost.

D

Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air whenmaximum defrost is on.Fan speed control: Adjusts the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.EPower: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system isoff, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.

F

MAX A/C: Press the button to maximize cooling. Recirculated air flows throughthe instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and the fanautomatically adjusts to the highest speed.

G

86


Climate Control

A/C: Press the button to turn air conditioning compressor on or off. Use airconditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.

H

Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioningcompressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning isswitched off.Passenger temperature control: Adjusts the temperature on the passengerside.

I

Climate controlled seats (if equipped): Press the button to switch theclimate controlled seats on and off. See Climate Controlled Seats (page94).

J

AUTO: Press the button to turn on automatic operation. Select the desiredtemperature using the temperature control. The system adjusts fan speed, airdistribution, air conditioning operation, and selects outside air or recirculatedair to heat or cool the vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature. Youcan also use the AUTO button to turn off dual zone operation by pressing andholding the button for more than two seconds.

K

Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air andrecirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the air currently in thepassenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to coolthe interior (when used with A/C) and may reduce unwanted odors fromentering your vehicle.

L

Note: Recirculated air may turn off automatically (or be prevented from turningon) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce risk of fogging. Recirculatedair may also turn on and off automatically in Panel or Panel and Floor airflowmodes during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency.Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window onand off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 90).

M

HINTS ON CONTROLLING THEINTERIOR CLIMATEGeneral Hints

WARNINGProlonged use of recirculated air maycause the windows to fog up. If thewindows fog up, follow the settings

for demisting the windshield.

Note: You may feel a small amount of airfrom the footwell air vents regardless of theair distribution setting.Note: To reduce humidity build-up insideyour vehicle, do not drive with the systemswitched off or with recirculated air alwaysswitched on.Note: Do not place objects under the frontseats as this may interfere with the airflowto the rear seats.Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves fromthe air intake area at the base of thewindshield.

87


Climate Control

Note: To improve the time to reach acomfortable temperature in hot weather,drive with the windows open until you feelcold air through the air vents.

Manual Climate ControlNote: To reduce fogging of the windshieldduring humid weather, adjust the airdistribution control to the windshield airvents position.

Automatic Climate ControlNote: Adjusting the settings when yourvehicle interior is extremely hot or cold isnot necessary. The system automaticallyadjusts to heat or cool the interior to yourselected temperature as quickly as possible.For the system to function efficiently, theinstrument panel and side air vents shouldbe fully open.

Note: If you select AUTO during coldoutside temperatures, the system directsairflow to the windshield and side windowvents. In addition, the fan may run at aslower speed until the engine warms up.Note: If you select AUTO during hot outsidetemperatures, or when the inside of thevehicle is hot, the system automatically usesrecirculated air to maximize interior cooling.When the interior reaches the selectedtemperature, the system automaticallyswitches to using outside air.

Heating the Interior Quickly

Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control

Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to a high speedsetting.

1

Adjust the temperature control to thedesired setting.

Adjust the temperature control to thefull heat setting.

2

Select the footwell air vents using theair distribution buttons.

3

88


Climate Control

Recommended Settings for Heating


Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the centersetting.

1

Adjust the temperature control to thedesired setting. Use 22°C (72°F) as astarting point, then adjust the setting asnecessary.

Adjust the temperature control to themidway point of the hot settings.

2

Select the footwell air vents using theair distribution buttons.

3

Cooling the Interior Quickly


Press the MAX A/C button.Adjust the temperature control to theMAX A/C position.

1

Drive with the windows fully open untilyou feel cold air through the air vents.

2

Recommended Settings for Cooling


Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the centersetting.

1


Adjust the temperature control to themidway point of the cold settings.

2

Select the instrument panel air ventsusing the air distribution buttons.

3

89


Climate Control

Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather


Press the defrost button.Select the windshield air vents using theair distribution buttons.

1


Press the A/C button if the indicator isoff.

2

Adjust the temperature control to thedesired setting.

3

Adjust the fan speed to a high speedsetting.

4

HEATED WINDOWS ANDMIRRORSHeated Rear WindowNote: Make sure the engine is runningbefore operating the heated windows.

E184884

Press the button to clear theheated rear window of thin iceand fog. The heated rear window

will automatically turn off after a shortperiod of time. Start the engine before youswitch the heated rear window on.Note: Do not use razor blades or othersharp objects to clean or remove decalsfrom the inside of the heated rear window.The vehicle warranty does not coverdamage caused to the heated rear windowgrid lines.

Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)

When you switch the heated rear windowon, the heated exterior mirrors willautomatically turn on.Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrorswith a scraper or adjust the mirror glasswhen it is frozen in place.

Note: Do not clean the mirror housing orglass with harsh abrasives, fuel or otherpetroleum-based cleaning products.

CABIN AIR FILTERYour vehicle is equipped with a cabin airfilter, which gives you and your passengersthe following benefits:• It improves your driving comfort by

reducing particle concentration.• It improves the interior compartment

cleanliness.• It protects the climate control

components from particle deposits.You can locate the cabin air filter behindthe glove box.Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filterinstalled at all times. This prevents foreignobjects from entering the system. Runningthe system without a filter in place couldresult in degradation or damage to thesystem.Replace the filter at regular intervals.For additional cabin air filter information,or to replace the filter, see an authorizeddealer.

90


Climate Control

SITTING IN THE CORRECTPOSITION

WARNINGSDo not recline the seat backrest toofar as this can cause the occupantto slide under the safety belt,

resulting in serious injury in the event of acrash.

Sitting improperly, out of position orwith the seat backrest reclined toofar, can result in serious injury or

death in the event of a crash. Always situpright against your seat backrest, withyour feet on the floor.

Do not place objects higher than theseat backrest to reduce the risk ofserious injury in the event of a crash

or during heavy braking.

E68595

When you use them properly, the seat,head restraint, safety belt and airbags willprovide optimum protection in the eventof a crash.

We recommend that you follow theseguidelines:• Sit in an upright position with the base

of your spine as far back as possible.• Do not recline the seat backrest more

than 30 degrees.• Adjust the head restraint so that the

top of it is level with the top of yourhead and as far forward as possible.Make sure that you remaincomfortable.

• Keep sufficient distance betweenyourself and the steering wheel. Werecommend a minimum of 10 inches(25 centimeters) between yourbreastbone and the airbag cover.

• Hold the steering wheel with your armsslightly bent.

• Bend your legs slightly so that you canpress the pedals fully.

• Position the shoulder strap of thesafety belt over the center of yourshoulder and position the lap straptightly across your hips.

Make sure that your driving position iscomfortable and that you can maintain fullcontrol of your vehicle.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNINGSRaise the rear head restraint whenthe rear seat is occupied by apassenger.Do not remove the front headrestraints when the front seats arein use.

Note: Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of it is level with the top of your head.

91


Seats

Front seat head restraints

E138642

The head restraints consist of:

An energy absorbing headrestraint.

A

Two steel stems.BGuide sleeve adjust and releasebutton.

C

Guide sleeve unlock and removebutton.

D

Adjusting the Head RestraintRaising the Head RestraintPull the head restraint up.

Lowering the Head Restraint1. Press and hold button C.2. Push the head restraint down.

Removing the Head Restraint1. Pull the head restraint up until it

reaches its highest position.2. Press and hold buttons C and D.3. Pull the head restraint up.

Installing the Head RestraintAlign the steel stems into the guide sleevesand push the head restraint down until inlocks.

Tilting Head RestraintsThe front head restraints tilt for extracomfort. To tilt the head restraint, do thefollowing:

E144727

1. Adjust the seatback to an uprightdriving or riding position.

2. Pivot the head restraint forward towardyour head to the desired position.

After the head restraint reaches theforward-most tilt position, pivoting itforward again will then release it to therearward, untilted position.

MANUAL SEATS

WARNINGRock the seat backward and forwardafter releasing the lever to make surethat it is fully engaged.

The manual front seats may consist of:

92


Seats

E174553

A bar to move the seat backwardand forward.

A

A lever to adjust the height of theseat.

B

A lever to adjust the angle of theseatback.

C

POWER SEATS

WARNINGSDo not adjust the driver seat orseatback when your vehicle ismoving. Adjusting your seatback

while your vehicle is in motion may causeloss of control of your vehicle.

WARNINGSReclining the seatback can cause anoccupant to slide under the seat’ssafety belt, resulting in severe

personal injuries in the event of a crash.

E187770

The power seat control is located on theoutboard side of the seat. Move the controlin the direction of the arrows to raise orlower the seat cushion or to move the seatforward, backward, up or down.

Power Lumbar (If Equipped)

The power lumbar control is located onthe side of the driver seat.

E187771

Press one side of the control to increaselower back firmness. Press the other sideof the control to decrease lower backfirmness.

93


Seats

REAR SEATS

WARNINGSWhen folding the seatbacks down,take care not to get your fingerscaught between the seatback and

seat frame.Make sure that the seats and theseatbacks are secure and fullyengaged in their catches.

Note: Your vehicle may have splitseatbacks that you must fold individually.

E207088

Use the seatback release to fold the backof the front seat forward for rear seataccess. The release handle is located onthe upper back of the front seat. Theseatback has memory and locksautomatically in the original position.

Second Row Split-Folding RearSeat (If Equipped)

E175611

To lower the seatback(s):1. Pull the strap to release the seatback.2. Fold the seatback down.When raising the seatback(s), make sureyou hear the seat latch into place. Pulldown on the seatback to make sure thatit has latched.

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATSHeated Seats (If Equipped)

WARNINGPersons who are unable to feel painto the skin because of advanced age,chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord

injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,or other physical conditions, must exercisecare when using the seat heater. The seatheater may cause burns even at lowtemperatures, especially if used for longperiods of time. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates against heat, suchas a blanket or cushion, because this maycause the seat heater to overheat.

Note: Do not do the following:

94


Seats

• Place heavy objects on the seat.• Operate the seat heater if water or any

other liquid spills on the seat. Allow theseat to dry thoroughly.

• Operate the heated seats unless theengine is running. Doing so can causethe battery to lose charge.

E146322

Touch the heated seat symbol to cyclethrough the various heat settings and off.More indicator lights indicate warmersettings.

Cooled Seats (If Equipped)

The cooled seats will only function whenthe engine is running.

E146309

Touch the cooled seat symbol to cyclethrough the various cool settings and off.More indicator lights indicate coolersettings.If the engine falls below 350 RPM whilethe cooled seats are on, the feature willturn itself off. You will need to reactivateit.

95


Seats

12 Volt DC Power PointWARNING

Do not plug optional electricalaccessories into the cigar lightersocket (if equipped). Improper use

of the lighter can cause damage notcovered by your warranty, and can resultin fire or serious injury.

Run the vehicle for full capacity use of thepower point. To prevent the battery fromdischarging accidentally:• Do not use the power point longer than

necessary when the vehicle is notrunning.

• Do not leave devices plugged inovernight or when you park your vehiclefor extended periods.

Note: If used when the vehicle is notrunning, the battery will discharge. Theremay be insufficient power to restart yourvehicle.Note: Do not insert objects other than anaccessory plug into the power point. Thiswill damage the outlet and blow the fuse.Note: Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug.Note: Do not use the power point over thevehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts ora fuse may blow.Note: Always keep the power point capsclosed when not in use.

LocationsPower points may be in the followinglocations:• On the instrument panel.• In the center console storage

compartment.

CIGAR LIGHTER

E103382

Press the element in to use the cigarlighter. It will pop out automatically.Note: Do not hold the cigar lighter elementpressed in.Note: If the power supply does not workafter you switch the ignition off, switch theignition on.Note: If you use the socket when the engineis not running, the battery may lose charge.Note: When you switch the ignition on, youcan use the socket to power 12 voltappliances with a maximum current ratingof 15 amps.

96


Auxiliary Power Points

CUP HOLDERS

WARNINGSDo not place hot drinks in the cupholders when your vehicle is moving.Make sure that cups placed in theholders do not obstruct your visionwhile driving.

CENTER CONSOLEStow items in the cupholder carefully asitems may become loose during hardbraking, acceleration or collisions, includinghot drinks which may spill.The console includes:• Cupholder.• Storage compartment.

E209039

Lift the latch to open the storagecompartment and use the followingfeatures:• Auxiliary power point.• Auxiliary audio input jack.• USB port.• Media hub.

E175706

Locking Storage Bin (If Equipped)

The storage bin locks when the doors areelectronically locked. The bin will unlockwhen the driver door is electronicallyunlocked with the remote control.Note: You cannot lock the storage bin whenthe vehicle is on.

GLASSES HOLDER

E188216

Press near the center of the door to openit. Pull out the tray.

97


Storage Compartments

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGSExtended idling at high enginespeeds can produce very hightemperatures in the engine and

exhaust system, creating the risk of fire orother damage.

Do not park, idle or drive your vehicleon dry grass or other dry groundcover. The emission system heats up

the engine compartment and exhaustsystem, creating the risk of fire.

Do not start the engine in a closedgarage or in other enclosed areas.Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always

open the garage door before you start theengine.

If you smell exhaust fumes insideyour vehicle, have your vehiclechecked by an authorized dealer

immediately. Do not drive your vehicle ifyou smell exhaust fumes.

If you disconnect the battery, your vehiclemay exhibit some unusual drivingcharacteristics for approximately 5 miles(8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. Thisis because the engine management systemmust realign itself with the engine. You candisregard any unusual drivingcharacteristics during this period.The powertrain control system meets allCanadian interference-causing equipmentstandard requirements regulating theimpulse electrical field or radio noise.When you start the engine, avoid pressingthe accelerator pedal before and duringoperation. Only use the accelerator pedalwhen you have difficulty starting theengine.

KEYLESS STARTINGNote: The keyless starting system may notfunction if the key is close to metal objectsor electronic devices such as cellularphones.Note: A valid key must be located insideyour vehicle to switch the ignition on andstart the engine.

Ignition Modes

E146431

The keyless starting system has threemodes:Off: Turns the ignition off.• Without applying the brake pedal,

press and release the button oncewhen the ignition is in the on mode, orwhen the engine is running but thevehicle is not moving.

On: All electrical circuits are operationaland the warning lamps and indicatorsilluminate.• Without applying the brake pedal,

press and release the button once.Start: Starts the engine.• Press the brake pedal (automatic

transmission) or clutch pedal (manualtransmission), and then press thebutton for any length of time. Anindicator light on the button illuminateswhen the ignition is on and when theengine starts.

98


Starting and Stopping the Engine

STEERING WHEEL LOCKYour vehicle has an electronicallycontrolled steering wheel lock thatoperates automatically.The system will lock the steering wheelafter a short period of time once you haveparked your vehicle and the passive key isoutside your vehicle, or when you lock yourvehicle.Note: The system will not lock the steeringwheel when the ignition is on or while yourvehicle is moving.

Unlocking the Steering WheelSwitch the ignition on to unlock thesteering wheel.Note: You may have to rotate the steeringwheel slightly to assist unlocking.

STARTING A GASOLINEENGINEWhen you start the engine, the idle speedincreases, this helps to warm up theengine. If the engine idle speed does notslow down automatically, have yourvehicle checked by an authorized dealer.Note: You can crank the engine for a totalof 60 seconds (without the engine starting)before the starting system temporarilydisables. The 60 seconds does not have tobe all at once. For example, if you crank theengine three times for 20 seconds eachtime, without the engine starting, youreached the 60-second time limit. Amessage appears in the information displayalerting you that you exceeded the crankingtime. You cannot attempt to start the enginefor at least 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, youare limited to a 15-second engine crankingtime. You need to wait 60 minutes beforeyou can crank the engine for 60 secondsagain.

Before starting the engine, check thefollowing:• Make sure all occupants have fastened

their seatbelts.• Make sure the headlamps and

electrical accessories are off.• Make sure the parking brake is on.• Move the transmission selector lever

to park (P) (automatic transmission)or neutral (manual transmission)

Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.Note: You must have your intelligent accesskey in the vehicle in order to shift thetransmission out of position P.1. Fully press the brake pedal.2. Press the button.The system does not function if:• The key frequencies are jammed.• The key battery has no charge.If you are unable to start the engine, do thefollowing:

E174956

1. Remove the rubber covering (A) in thecupholder.

2. Place the remote in the backup slot (B)with the buttons facing up and thekeyring toward the front of the vehicle.

99



3. With the key in this position, press thebrake pedal (automatic transmission)or clutch pedal (manual transmission),then the START button to switch theignition on and start your vehicle.

Fast RestartThe fast restart feature allows you torestart the engine within 20 seconds ofswitching it off, even if a valid key is notpresent.Within 20 seconds of switching the engineoff, press the brake pedal (automatictransmission) or clutch pedal (manualtransmission) and press the button. After20 seconds have expired, you can nolonger restart the engine without the keypresent inside your vehicle.Once the engine has started, it remainsrunning until you press the button, even ifthe system does not detect a valid key. Ifyou open and close a door while the engineis running, the system searches for a validkey. You cannot restart the engine if thesystem does not detect a valid key within20 seconds.

Failure to StartIf you cannot start the engine after threeattempts, wait 10 seconds and follow thisprocedure:1. If your vehicle is equipped with an

automatic transmission, fully press thebrake pedal. If your vehicle is equippedwith a manual transmission, fully pressthe clutch pedal and apply thehandbrake.

2. Move the transmission selector leverto park (P) (automatic transmission)or neutral (manual transmission).

3. Fully press the accelerator pedal andhold it there.

4. Start the engine.

Automatic Engine ShutdownYour vehicle is equipped with a feature thatautomatically shuts down the engine if ithas been idling for an extended period. Theignition also turns off in order to savebattery power. Before the engine shutsdown, a message appears in theinformation display showing a timercounting down from 30 seconds. If you donot intervene within 30 seconds, the engineshuts down. Another message appears inthe information display to inform you thatthe engine has shut down in order to savefuel. Start your vehicle as you normally do.

Automatic Engine Shutdown OverrideNote: You cannot permanently switch offthe automatic engine shutdown feature.When you switch it off temporarily, it turnson at the next ignition cycle.You can stop the engine shutdown, or resetthe timer, at any point before the30-second countdown has expired bydoing any of the following:• You can reset the timer by interacting

with your vehicle (such as pressing thebrake pedal or accelerator pedal).

• You can temporarily switch off theshutdown feature any time the ignitionis on (for the current ignition cycleonly). Use the information display todo so. See Information Displays(page 67).

• During the countdown before engineshutdown, you are prompted to pressOK or RESET (depending on your typeof information display) to temporarilyswitch the feature off (for the currentignition cycle only).

Stopping the Engine When YourVehicle is Stationary1. Move the transmission selector lever

to park (P) (automatic transmission)or neutral (manual transmission).

100



2. Press the button once.3. Apply the parking brake.Note: This switches off the ignition, allelectrical circuits, warning lamps andindicators.Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,the ignition and engine automatically shutdown.

Stopping the Engine When YourVehicle is Moving

WARNINGSwitching off the engine when thevehicle is still moving will result in aloss of brake and steering assistance.

The steering will not lock, but higher effortwill be required. When the ignition isswitched off, some electrical circuits,including air bags, warning lamps andindicators may also be off. If the ignitionwas turned off accidentally, you can shiftinto neutral (N) and re-start the engine.

1. Move the transmission selector leverto the neutral position and use thebrakes to bring your vehicle to a safestop.

2. When your vehicle has stopped, movethe transmission selector lever to park(P) (automatic transmission) orneutral (manual transmission).

3. Press and hold the button for onesecond, or press it three times withintwo seconds.

4. Apply the parking brake.

Guarding Against Exhaust FumesWARNING

If you smell exhaust fumes insideyour vehicle, have your vehiclechecked by your authorized dealer

immediately. Do not drive your vehicle ifyou smell exhaust fumes. Carbonmonoxide is present in exhaust fumes.Take precautions to avoid its dangerouseffects.

Important Ventilating InformationIf you stop your vehicle and the leave theengine idling for long periods, werecommend that you do one of thefollowing:• Open the windows at least 2.5 cm

(1 in).• Set your climate control to outside air.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If

Equipped)

WARNINGSFailure to follow engine block heaterinstructions could result in propertydamage or serious personal injury.Do not use your heater withungrounded electrical systems ortwo-pronged adapters. There is a risk

of electrical shock.

Note: The heater is most effective whenoutdoor temperatures are below 0°F(-18°C).

101



The heater acts as a starting aid bywarming the engine coolant. This allowsthe climate control system to respondquickly. The equipment includes a heaterelement (installed in the engine block) anda wire harness. You can connect thesystem to a grounded 220-240 volt ACelectrical source.We recommend that you do the followingfor a safe and correct operation:• Use an extension cord suitable for use

outdoors and in cold temperatures. Itshould be clearly marked that it issuitable for use with outdoorappliances. Do not use an indoorextension cord outdoors. This couldresult in an electric shock or become afire hazard.

• Use as short an extension cord aspossible.

• Do not use multiple extension cords.• Make sure that when in operation, the

extension cord plug and heater cordplug connections are free and clear ofwater. This could cause an electricshock or fire.

• Make sure your vehicle is parked in aclean area, clear of combustibles.

• Make sure the heater, heater cord andextension cord are firmly connected.

• Check for heat anywhere in theelectrical hookup once the system hasbeen operating for approximately 30minutes.

• Make sure the system is unplugged andproperly stowed before starting anddriving your vehicle. Make sure theprotective cover seals the prongs of theblock heater cord plug when not in use.

• Make sure the heater system ischecked for proper operation beforewinter.

Using the Engine Block HeaterThe engine block heater plug may be foundin one of the following locations:• Under the hood.• In the front fog lamp bezel.• Front lower grille.Make sure the receptacle terminals areclean and dry prior to use. Clean them witha dry cloth if necessary.The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hoursof energy per hour of use. The system doesnot have a thermostat. It achievesmaximum temperature afterapproximately three hours of operation.Using the heater longer than three hoursdoes not improve system performance andunnecessarily uses electricity.

102



SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNINGSDo not overfill the fuel tank. Thepressure in an overfilled tank maycause leakage and lead to fuel spray

and fire.The fuel system may be underpressure. If you hear a hissing soundnear the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel

capless fuel system), do not refuel untilthe sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may sprayout, which could cause serious personalinjury.

Automotive fuels can cause seriousinjury or death if misused ormishandled.Flow of fuel through a fuel pumpnozzle can produce static electricity.This can cause a fire if you are filling

an ungrounded fuel container.Fuel ethanol and gasoline maycontain benzene, which is acancer-causing agent.When refueling always shut theengine off and never allow sparks oropen flames near the filler neck.

Never smoke or use a cell phone whilerefueling. Fuel vapor is extremelyhazardous under certain conditions. Avoidinhaling excess fumes.

Observe the following guidelines whenhandling automotive fuel:• Extinguish all smoking materials and

any open flames before refueling yourvehicle.

• Always turn off the vehicle beforerefueling.

• Automotive fuels can be harmful orfatal if swallowed. Fuel such asgasoline is highly toxic and ifswallowed can cause death orpermanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,call a physician immediately, even if nosymptoms are immediately apparent.The toxic effects of fuel may not bevisible for hours.

• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling toomuch fuel vapor of any kind can leadto eye and respiratory tract irritation.In severe cases, excessive or prolongedbreathing of fuel vapor can causeserious illness and permanent injury.

• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. Iffuel is splashed in the eyes, removecontact lenses (if worn), flush withwater for 15 minutes and seek medicalattention. Failure to seek propermedical attention could lead topermanent injury.

• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbedthrough the skin. If fuel is splashed onthe skin, clothing or both, promptlyremove contaminated clothing andwash skin thoroughly with soap andwater. Repeated or prolonged skincontact with fuel liquid or vapor causesskin irritation.

• Be particularly careful if you are taking“Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiramfor the treatment of alcoholism.Breathing gasoline vapors, or skincontact could cause an adversereaction. In sensitive individuals, seriouspersonal injury or sickness may result.If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptlywash skin thoroughly with soap andwater. Consult a physician immediatelyif you experience an adverse reaction.

103


Fuel and Refueling

FUEL QUALITY

WARNINGSDo not mix gasoline with oil, dieselor other liquids. This could cause achemical reaction.Do not use leaded gasoline orgasoline with additives containingother metallic compounds (e.g.

manganese-based). They could damagethe emission system.

Note: We recommend that you use onlyhigh quality fuel.Note: We do not recommend the use ofadditional additives or other enginetreatments for normal vehicle use.Use minimum 95 octane unleadedgasoline that meets the specificationdefined by EN 228 or the equivalentnational specification.Your vehicle is suitable for use with ethanolblends up to 10% (E5 and E10).

Long-Term StorageMost gasoline contains ethanol. Werecommend that you fill the fuel tank withfuel that does not contain ethanol if youintend to store your vehicle for more thantwo months. Alternatively, we recommendthat you seek advice from an authorizeddealer.

FUEL FILLER FUNNELLOCATIONThe fuel filler funnel is located in the sparewheel storage tray.

RUNNING OUT OF FUELRunning out of fuel can cause damage notcovered by the vehicle Warranty.

If your vehicle runs out of fuel:• Add a minimum of 5 L (1.1 gal) of fuel

to restart the engine. If your vehicle isout of fuel and on a steep slope, morefuel may be required.

• You may need to switch the ignitionfrom off to on several times afterrefueling to allow the fuel system topump the fuel from the tank to theengine. When restarting, cranking timetakes a few seconds longer thannormal.

Filling a Portable Fuel ContainerUse the following guidelines to avoidelectrostatic charge build-up when fillingan ungrounded fuel container:• Only use an approved fuel container to

transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place thecontainer on the ground when filling it.

• Do not fill a fuel container when it isinside your vehicle (including the cargoarea).

• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contactwith the fuel container when filling it.

• Do not use a device that holds the fuelpump nozzle lever in the fill position.

Adding Fuel From a Portable FuelContainer

WARNINGSDo not insert the nozzle of a fuelcontainer or an aftermarket funnelinto the fuel system filler neck. This

may damage the fuel system filler neck orits seal and cause fuel to run onto theground.

Do not try to pry open or push openthe capless fuel system with foreignobjects. This could damage the fuel

system and its seal and cause injury to youor others.

104


Fuel and Refueling

WARNINGSDo not dispose of fuel in thehousehold refuse or the publicsewage system. Use an authorized

waste disposal facility.

When refueling the vehicle fuel tank froma fuel container, use the plastic funnelincluded with your vehicle. See Fuel FillerFunnel Location (page 104).Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels asthey will not work with the capless fuelsystem and can damage it.When refueling the vehicle fuel tank froma fuel container, do the following:1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until

it engages and remove the fuel tankfiller cap.

Note: Capless fuel systems do not have afuel tank filler cap.2. Fully insert the plastic funnel into the

fuel tank filler pipe opening.

E157452

3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuelcontainer.

4. Remove the plastic funnel from thefuel tank filler pipe opening.

5. Replace the fuel tank filler cap andclose the fuel tank filler door.

6. Clean the plastic funnel and place itback in your vehicle or properly disposeof it.

Note: Extra funnels can be purchased froman authorized dealer if you choose todispose of the funnel.

CATALYTIC CONVERTER

WARNINGDo not park or idle your vehicle overdry leaves, dry grass or othercombustible materials. The exhaust

will radiate a considerable amount of heatduring use, and after you have switchedthe engine off. This is a potential firehazard.

Driving with a Catalytic ConverterWARNINGS

Avoid running out of fuel.

Do not crank the engine for longperiods.Do not run the engine when a sparkplug lead is disconnected.Do not push-start or tow-start yourvehicle. Use booster cables. SeeJump Starting the Vehicle (page

141).Do not switch the ignition off whendriving.

REFUELING

WARNINGSFuel vapor burns violently and a fuelfire can cause severe injuries.

105


Fuel and Refueling

WARNINGSRead and follow all the instructionson the pump island.When refueling always shut theengine off and never allow sparks oropen flames near the fuel tank filler

valve. Never smoke or use a cell phonewhile refueling. Fuel vapor is extremelyhazardous under certain conditions. Avoidinhaling excess fumes.

Stay outside your vehicle and do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling your vehicle. This is

against the law in some places.Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.Wait at least 10 seconds beforeremoving the fuel pump nozzle toallow any residual fuel to drain into

the fuel tank.Stop refueling after the fuel pumpnozzle automatically shuts off for thesecond time. Failure to follow this

will fill the expansion space in the fuel tankand could lead to fuel overflowing.

Do not remove the fuel pump nozzlefrom its fully inserted position whenrefueling.

Use the following guidelines to avoidelectrostatic charge build-up, which canproduce a spark, when filling anungrounded fuel container:• Place approved fuel container on the

ground.• Do not fill a fuel container while it is in

the vehicle (including the cargo area).• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact

with the fuel container while filling.• Do not use a device that would hold

the fuel pump handle in the fill position.

Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel SystemWARNING

The fuel system may be underpressure. If you hear a hissing soundnear the fuel filler door, do not refuel

until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel mayspray out, which could cause seriouspersonal injury.

When fueling your vehicle:1. When your vehicle has stopped, shift

into park (P) and switch the ignitionoff.

2. Fully open the fuel tank filler door untilit engages.

E156032

3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to thefirst notch on the nozzle. Hold handlehigher during insertion for easieraccess. Leave the fuel pump nozzlefully inserted until you are donepumping.

106


Fuel and Refueling

E154765

4. Remove the fuel filler nozzle and fullyclose the fuel tank filler door.

Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur ifoverfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill thetank. The fill pipe is equipped with a drainhole. Excess fuel due to overfill may drainthrough the drain hole and drip onto theground.If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed,a service engine warning lamp may appearon the instrument cluster.At the next opportunity, do the following:1. Stop your vehicle as soon as safely

possible and shift the transmission intopark (P).

2. Switch the ignition off.3. Open the fuel filler door and remove

any visible debris from the fuel fillopening.

4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or thefuel fill funnel provided with the vehicleseveral times to allow the inlet to closeproperly. This will dislodge any debrispreventing the inlet from sealing.

If this action corrects the problem, themessage may not reset immediately. Itmay take several driving cycles for themessage to turn off. A driving cycleconsists of an engine start-up (after 4 ormore hours with the engine off) followedby city or highway driving. Continuing todrive with the message on may cause theservice engine soon lamp to turn on aswell.

FUEL CONSUMPTIONWe derive CO2 and fuel consumptionfigures in laboratory tests according toRegulation (EC) 715/2007 or CR (EC)692/2008 and subsequent amendments.They are intended as a comparisonbetween makes and models of vehicles.They are not intended to represent the realworld fuel consumption you may get fromyour vehicle.Real world fuel consumption is governedby many factors, for example driving style,high speed driving, stop-start driving, airconditioning usage, the accessories fitted,payload and towing.The advertised capacity is the indicatedcapacity and the empty reserve combined.Indicated capacity is the difference in theamount of fuel in the fuel tank and whenthe fuel gauge indicates empty. Emptyreserve is the amount of fuel in the fueltank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.Note: The amount of fuel in the emptyreserve varies and should not be relied uponto increase driving range. When refuelingyour vehicle after the fuel gauge indicatesempty, you might not be able to refuel thefull amount of the advertised capacity dueto the empty reserve still present in the fueltank.

107


Fuel and Refueling

Filling the Fuel TankFor consistent results when refueling:• Switch the ignition off.• Allow no more than two automatic

shut-offs when refueling.Results are most accurate when the fillingmethod is consistent.

Calculating Fuel EconomyDo not measure fuel economy during thefirst 1,600 km (1,000 mi) of driving (this isyour engine’s break-in period). A moreaccurate measurement is obtained after3,200 km (2,000 mi) to 4,800 km(3,000 mi). Also, fuel expense, frequencyof fill ups or fuel gauge readings are notaccurate ways to measure fuel economy.1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record

the initial odometer reading.2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, record

the amount of fuel added.3. After at least three fill ups, fill the fuel

tank and record the current odometerreading.

4. Subtract your initial odometer readingfrom the current odometer reading.

To calculate L/100 km (liters per 100kilometers) fuel consumption, multiply theliters used by 100, then divide by kilometerstraveled. To calculate MPG (miles pergallon) fuel consumption, divide milestraveled by gallons used.Keep a record for at least one month andrecord the type of driving (city or highway).This provides an accurate estimate of yourvehicle’s fuel economy under currentdriving conditions. Keeping records duringsummer and winter will show howtemperature impacts fuel economy.

108


Fuel and Refueling

MANUAL TRANSMISSIONSelecting Reverse GearDo not engage reverse gear when yourvehicle is moving. This can cause damageto the transmission.

E99067

Raise the collar when you select reversegear.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNINGSAlways set the parking brake fullyand make sure the gearshift islatched in park (P). Turn the ignition

to the off position and remove the keywhenever you leave your vehicle.

Do not apply the brake pedal andaccelerator pedal simultaneously.Applying both pedals simultaneously

for more than three seconds will limitengine rpm, which may result in difficultymaintaining speed in traffic and could leadto serious injury.

Understanding the Positions ofYour Automatic TransmissionPutting your vehicle in gear:1. Fully press down the brake pedal.2. Press and hold the button on the top

of the gearshift lever.3. Move the gearshift lever into the

desired gear.4. Release the button and your

transmission remains in the selectedgear.

E174572

Park (P)This position locks the transmission andprevents the rear wheels from turning.Come to a complete stop before puttingyour vehicle into and out of park (P).

Reverse (R)With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), yourvehicle provides backward movement.Always come to a complete stop beforeshifting into and out of reverse (R).

Neutral (N)With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), youcan start your vehicle and it is free to roll.Hold the brake pedal down while in thisposition.

109


Transmission

Drive (D)For normal driving, and the best fueleconomy, drive (D) provides operation ingears one through six.

Sport (S)Moving the gearshift lever to Sport (S):• Provides additional grade (engine)

braking and extends lower gearoperation to enhance performance foruphill climbs, hilly terrain ormountainous areas. This may increaseengine RPM during engine braking.

• Provides additional lower gearoperation through the automatictransmission shift strategy.

• Selects gears more quickly and athigher engine speeds.

SelectShift Automatic™TransmissionYour SelectShift Automatic transmissiongives you the ability to change gearsmanually.With your vehicle in drive (D), the paddleshifters provide temporary manual control.They allow you the ability to shift gearsquickly, without taking your hands off thesteering wheel. The system determineswhen temporary manual control is nolonger in use and returns to automaticcontrol.You can achieve extensive manual controlby moving the gearshift lever to the sport(S) position.

E144821

• Pull and release the right paddle (+)to upshift.

• Pull and release the left paddle (–) todownshift.

Upshift to the recommended shift speedsaccording to the following chart:

Upshifts when accelerating (recom-mended for best fuel economy)

Shift from:

15 mph (24 km/h)1 - 2

25 mph (40 km/h)2 - 3

40 mph (64 km/h)3 - 4

45 mph (72 km/h)4 - 5

50 mph (80 km/h)5 - 6

The instrument cluster displays yourcurrently selected gear. The transmissionautomatically upshifts if your engine speedis too high or downshifts if your enginespeed is too low.The system stays in manual control untilyou make another gear selection (forexample, drive [D]).Note: Engine damage may occur ifexcessive engine revving is held withoutshifting.

Brake-Shift InterlockWARNINGS

Do not drive your vehicle until youverify that the brake lamps areworking.When doing this procedure, you willbe taking your vehicle out of parkwhich means your vehicle can roll

freely. To avoid unwanted vehiclemovement, always fully set the parkingbrake prior to doing this procedure. Usewheel chocks if appropriate.

110


Transmission

WARNINGSIf the parking brake is fully released,but the brake warning lamp remainsilluminated, the brakes may not be

working properly. See your authorizeddealer.

Note: Contact an authorized dealer as soonas possible if this procedure is used.Note: For some markets, this feature willbe disabled.Use the brake shift interlock lever to movethe gearshift lever from the park positionin the event of an electrical malfunction orif your vehicle has a dead battery.Apply the parking brake and switch theignition off before performing thisprocedure.

E184747

1. Using a flat head screwdriver or similartool, remove the chrome bezel andgearshift bracket at the base of thegearshift lever.

E174501

2. Locate the white release lever and slidethe lever forward while pulling thegearshift lever out of the park (P)position and into the neutral (N)position.

3. Reinstall the console.4. Start your vehicle and release the

parking brake.

Automatic Transmission AdaptiveLearningThis feature is designed to increasedurability and provide consistent shift feelover the life of your vehicle. A new vehicleor transmission may have firm or softshifts. This operation is normal and doesnot affect function or durability of thetransmission. Over time, the adaptivelearning process will fully updatetransmission operation. Additionally,whenever you disconnect the battery is orinstall a new battery, the system mustrelearn the strategy.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mudor SnowNote: Do not rock your vehicle if the engineis not at normal operating temperature ordamage to the transmission may occur.

111


Transmission

Note: Do not rock your vehicle for morethan a minute or damage to thetransmission and tires may occur, or theengine may overheat.If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,you may rock it out by shifting betweenforward and reverse gears, stoppingbetween shifts in a steady pattern. Presslightly on the accelerator in each gear.

112


Transmission

LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIALThis axle provides added traction onslippery surfaces, particularly when onewheel is on a poor traction surface. Undernormal conditions, the limited-slip axlefunctions like a standard rear axle. The axlemay exhibit a slight noise or vibrationduring tight turns with low vehicle speed.This is normal behavior and indicates theaxle is working.

113


Rear Axle

GENERAL INFORMATIONNote: Occasional brake noise is normal. Ifa metal-to-metal, continuous grinding orcontinuous squeal sound is present, thebrake linings may be worn-out. Have thesystem checked by an authorized dealer. Ifyour vehicle has continuous vibration orshudder in the steering wheel while braking,have it checked by an authorized dealer.Note: Brake dust may accumulate on thewheels, even under normal drivingconditions. Some dust is inevitable as thebrakes wear and does not contribute tobrake noise. See Cleaning the AlloyWheels (page 170).

E144522

See Warning Lamps andIndicators (page 63).

Wet brakes result in reduced brakingefficiency. Gently press the brake pedal afew times when driving from a car wash orstanding water to dry the brakes.

Brake Over AcceleratorIn the event the accelerator pedalbecomes stuck or entrapped, apply steadyand firm pressure to the brake pedal toslow the vehicle and reduce engine power.If you experience this condition, apply thebrakes and bring your vehicle to a safestop. Move the transmission to park (P),switch the engine off and apply the parkingbrake. Inspect the accelerator pedal forany interference. If none are found and thecondition persists, have your vehicle towedto the nearest authorized dealer.

Brake AssistBrake assist detects when you brakerapidly by measuring the rate at which youpress the brake pedal. It providesmaximum braking efficiency as long as youpress the pedal, and can reduce stoppingdistances in critical situations.

Anti-lock Brake SystemThis system helps you maintain steeringcontrol during emergency stops by keepingthe brakes from locking.

This lamp momentarilyilluminates when you turn theignition on. If the light does not

illuminate during start up, remains on orflashes, the system may be disabled. Havethe system checked by an authorizeddealer. If the anti-lock brake system isdisabled, normal braking is still effective.

E144522

If the brake warning lampilluminates when you release theparking brake, have the system

checked by an authorized dealer.

HINTS ON DRIVING WITHANTI-LOCK BRAKESNote: When the system is operating, thebrake pedal may pulse and may travelfurther. Maintain pressure on the brakepedal. You may also hear a noise from thesystem. This is normal.The anti-lock braking system will noteliminate the risks when:• You drive too closely to the vehicle in

front of you.• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.• You take corners too fast.• The road surface is poor.

PARKING BRAKE

WARNINGSIf the parking brake is fully released,but the brake warning lamp remainsilluminated, the brakes may not be

working properly. See your authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

114


Brakes

WARNINGSAlways set the parking brake fullyand make sure that the transmissionis securely latched in park (P)

(automatic transmission) or first gear (1)(manual transmission).

To set the parking brake, pull the parkingbrake handle up as far as possible.To release the parking brake:1. Press and hold the button located at

the end of the parking brake handle.2. Pull the handle up slightly, then push

the handle down.

HILL START ASSIST

WARNINGSThe system does not replace theparking brake. When you leave yourvehicle, always apply the parking

brake and shift the transmission into park(P) (automatic transmission) or first gear(1) (manual transmission).

You must remain in your vehicle onceyou have activated the system.During all times, you are responsiblefor controlling your vehicle,supervising the system and

intervening, if required.If the engine is revved excessively, orif a malfunction is detected, thesystem will be deactivated.

The system makes it easier to pull awaywhen your vehicle is on a slope without theneed to use the parking brake.

When the system is active, your vehicle willremain stationary on the slope for two tothree seconds after you release the brakepedal. This allows you time to move yourfoot from the brake to the acceleratorpedal. The brakes release automaticallywhen the engine has sufficient torque toprevent your vehicle from rolling down thegrade. This is an advantage when pullingaway on a slope, for example from a carpark ramp, traffic lights or when reversinguphill into a parking space.The system will activate automatically onany slope that will cause significant vehiclerollback. For vehicles with a manualtransmission, you can switch this featureoff using the information display. SeeInformation Displays (page 67). Thesystem will remain on or off depending onhow it was last set.Note: There is no warning lamp to indicatethe system is either on or off.Note: If your vehicle is equipped with AutoHold, Hill Start Assist will not be availablewhile Auto Hold is active.

Using Hill Start Assist1. Bring your vehicle to a complete

standstill. Keep the brake pedalpressed and select an uphill gear (forexample, first (1) when facing uphill orreverse (R) when facing downhill).

2. If the sensors detect that your vehicleis on a slope, the system will activateautomatically.

3. When you remove your foot from thebrake pedal, your vehicle will remainon the slope without rolling away forabout two or three seconds. This holdtime will automatically be extended ifyou are in the process of driving off.

4. Drive off in the normal manner. Thebrakes will release automatically.

115


Brakes

Switching the System On and OffYou can switch this feature on or off if yourvehicle is equipped with a manualtransmission and an information display.See (page 67). The system remembersthe last setting when you start your vehicle.If your vehicle is not equipped with amanual transmission and an informationdisplay, you cannot turn the system on oroff. When you switch the ignition on, thesystem automatically turns on.

116


Brakes

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONThe traction control system helps avoiddrive wheel spin and loss of traction.If your vehicle begins to slide, the systemapplies the brakes to individual wheelsand, when needed, reduces engine powerat the same time. If the wheels spin whenaccelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,the system reduces engine power in orderto increase traction.

USING TRACTION CONTROL

WARNINGThe stability and traction controllight illuminates steadily if thesystem detects a failure. Make sure

you did not manually disable the tractioncontrol system using the switch. If thestability control and traction control lightis still illuminating steadily, have thesystem serviced by an authorized dealerimmediately. Operating your vehicle withtraction control disabled could lead to anincreased risk of loss of vehicle control,vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

The system automatically turns on eachtime you switch the ignition on.If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,switching traction control off may bebeneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.Note: When you switch traction control off,stability control remains fully active.

Switching the System Off

E166706

The switch for the stability and tractioncontrol system is on the instrument panel.When you switch the system off, amessage and an illuminated icon appearon the instrument cluster.Use the switch again to return the tractioncontrol system to normal operation.Your vehicle may have MyKey restrictionsregarding this feature. See (page 35).

System Indicator Lights andMessages

E138639

The stability and traction controllight temporarily illuminates onengine start-up and flashes

when a driving condition activates eitherof the systems.

The stability and traction controloff light temporarily illuminateson engine start-up and stays on:

• When you switch the traction controlsystem off.

• If a problem occurs in either of thesystems.

117


Traction Control


WARNINGSVehicle modifications involvingbraking system, aftermarket roofracks, suspension, steering system,

tire construction and wheel and tire sizemay change the handling characteristicsof the vehicle and may adversely affectthe performance of the stability controlsystem. In addition, installing any stereoloudspeakers may interfere with andadversely affect the stability controlsystem. Install any aftermarket stereoloudspeaker as far as possible from thefront center console, the tunnel, and thefront seats in order to minimize the risk ofinterfering with the stability controlsensors. Reducing the effectiveness of thestability control system could lead to anincreased risk of loss of vehicle control,vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

Remember that even advancedtechnology cannot defy the laws ofphysics. It’s always possible to lose

control of a vehicle due to inappropriatedriver input for the conditions. Aggressivedriving on any road condition can causeyou to lose control of your vehicleincreasing the risk of personal injury orproperty damage. Activation of the stabilitycontrol system is an indication that at leastsome of the tires have exceeded theirability to grip the road; this could reducethe operator’s ability to control the vehiclepotentially resulting in a loss of vehiclecontrol, vehicle rollover, personal injury anddeath. If your stability control systemactivates, SLOW DOWN.

If a failure has been detected withinthe traction control system, thestability control light will illuminate

steadily. Verify that the traction controlsystem was not manually disabled usingthe stability control button. If the stabilitycontrol light still illuminates steadily, have

WARNINGSthe system serviced by an authorizeddealer immediately. Operating your vehiclewith traction control disabled could leadto an increased risk of loss of vehiclecontrol, vehicle rollover, personal injury anddeath.

E138639

The stability and traction controllight temporarily lights on enginestart-up and flashes when a

driving condition activates either of thesystems.

The stability and traction controloff light temporarily lights onengine start-up and stays on:

• When you switch the traction controlsystem off.

• When you select an alternative stabilitycontrol mode.

• If a problem occurs in either of thesystems.

The stability control system helps you keepcontrol of your vehicle when on a slipperysurface. The electronic stability controlportion of the system helps avoid skids andlateral slides. The traction control systemhelps avoid drive wheel spin and loss oftraction. See Using Traction Control(page 117).

118


Stability Control

E72903

A A

AB

B

B

B

Vehicle without stability controlA

skidding off its intended route.Vehicle with stability controlmaintaining control on a slipperysurface.

B

USING STABILITY CONTROLElectronic Stability ControlThe system automatically turns on eachtime you switch the ignition on. Theelectronic stability control portion of thesystem is disabled when the transmissionis in reverse (R) or, on some models, if youpress and hold the electronic stabilitycontrol button for more than five secondswhen you apply the brakes and the vehicleis at a stop. You can switch off the tractioncontrol portion of the systemindependently. See Using TractionControl (page 117).

ESC features

Tractioncontrol system

Electronicstabilitycontrol

Stabilitycontrol off

light

ModeButton func-tions

EnabledEnabledOn during bulbcheck

-Default at start-up

DisabledEnabledOnTraction controloff

Button pressedmomentarily

EnabledEnabledOnSport mode (ifequipped)

Button pressedtwice rapidly

DisabledDisabledOnESC disabledButton pressedand held more

than fiveseconds

EnabledEnabledOffESC fullyenabled

Button pressedagain after

deactivation

119


Stability Control

Note: Do not use Sport mode on publicroadways.Some models may also come equippedwith a sport mode which allows the driverto reduce normal electronic stabilitycontrol system intervention and provide amore spirited driving experience. To entersport mode, toggle the stability controlbutton twice rapidly. The message appearsin the information display that the systemis now in sport mode.For vehicles equipped with the selectabledrive mode feature, electronic stabilitycontrol sport mode is not available. Youcan utilize the performance orientedelectronic stability control mode byselecting track drive mode. In this mode,electronic stability control intervention isreduced and tuned specifically for trackuse only and is not for use on public roads.In all of the selectable drive modes, youcan disable traction control and electronicstability control with the electronic stabilitycontrol switch.

Line Lock (If Equipped)

Line Lock is a feature intended for use attracks only and should not be used onpublic roadways. Use of this feature willresult in significantly increased rear tirewear. It is intended to condition the reartires to maximize traction prior to track use.Line Lock maintains brake force at thefront wheels, allowing the rear wheels tospin with minimal vehicle movement.This feature is located in the Track Appsmenu. Make selections through the 5-wayinformation display control and OK buttonlocated on the steering wheel.

Using Line LockThere are three Line Lock stages:

• Initiated.• Engaged.• Off.

Initiating Line LockThe initiation stage verifies that the vehicleis ready for Line Lock function, andconfirms driver intent. Follow the promptsin the information display in to initiate LineLock.The following conditions must be met toinitialize Line Lock:• The vehicle is on a level surface.• The engine is running.• The vehicle is traveling less than 25

mph (40 km/h).• Selectable Drive Mode is not in wet

mode (if equipped).• There are no electronic stability control

faults.If you want to cancel Line Lock once it isinitialized, press the left informationdisplay control. Once initiated, Line Lockis prepared for activation and will remaininitiated up to 25 mph (40 km/h). If vehiclespeed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h), LineLock will be automatically canceled.

Engaging Line LockFollow the prompts in the informationdisplay to engage Line Lock after it isinitialized. To engage, firmly apply thebrakes. Then press the OK button. Onceengaged, release the brake pedal. Thefront brakes will remain applied and therear brakes will release. At this point, theengagement timer is initiated and shownon the driver information display.The following conditions must be met toengage Line Lock:• The vehicle is on a level surface.• The engine is running.

120


Stability Control

• The vehicle is stopped.• The parking brake is not applied.• The driver door is closed.• The transmission is in a forward gear.• Selectable Drive Mode is not in wet

mode (if equipped).• There are no electronic stability control

faults.• The steering wheel must be in the

straight ahead position.

Releasing Line LockWhile Line Lock is engaged, you can exit(release) the feature using the OK button.When you press the OK button, Line Lockreleases immediately and normal vehiclefunction will resume. When Line Lock isengaged, a countdown timer shows theremaining time before Line Lock is releasedautomatically. If you exceed the time limit,or another vehicle condition requires LineLock to release, the system will safelydisengage and normal vehicle function willresume.Note: If the brake pedal is applied whileLine Lock is engaged, Line Lockautomatically cancels and normal brakefunction resumes.

121


Stability Control


WARNINGSTo help avoid personal injury, pleaseread and understand the limitationsof the system as contained in this

section. Sensing is only an aid for some(generally large and fixed) objects whenmoving on a flat surface at parking speeds.Certain objects with surfaces that absorbultrasonic waves, surrounding vehicle'sparking aid systems, traffic controlsystems, fluorescent lamps, inclementweather, air brakes, and external motorsand fans may also affect the function ofthe sensing system; this may includereduced performance or a false activation.

To help avoid personal injury, alwaysuse caution when in reverse (R) andwhen using the sensing system.This system is not designed toprevent contact with small or movingobjects. The system is designed to

provide a warning to assist the driver indetecting large stationary objects to avoiddamaging your vehicle. The system maynot detect smaller objects, particularlythose close to the ground.

Certain add-on devices such as largetrailer hitches, bike or surfboard racksand any device that may block the

normal detection zone of the system, maycreate false beeps.

Note: Keep the sensors, located on thebumper or fascia, free from snow, ice andlarge accumulations of dirt. If the sensorsare covered, the system’s accuracy can beaffected. Do not clean the sensors withsharp objects.Note: If your vehicle sustains damage tothe bumper or fascia, leaving it misalignedor bent, the sensing zone may be alteredcausing inaccurate measurement ofobstacles or false alarms.

Note: The sensing system cannot be turnedoff when a MyKey is present. See (page35).Note: If you attach certain add-on devicessuch as a trailer or bike rack, the rear sensingsystem may detect that add-on device andtherefore provide warnings. It is suggestedthat you disable the rear sensing systemwhen you attach an add-on device to yourvehicle to prevent these warnings.The sensing system warns the driver ofobstacles within a certain range of yourvehicle. The system turns on automaticallywhenever you switch the ignition on.The system can be switched off throughthe information display menu or from thepop-up message that appears once youshift the transmission into reverse (R). See(page 67).If a fault is present in the system, a warningmessage appears in the informationdisplay. See Information Messages(page 75).

REAR PARKING AIDThe rear sensors are only active when thetransmission is in reverse (R). As yourvehicle moves closer to the obstacle, therate of the audible warning increases.When the obstacle is less than 30 cm(12 in) away, the warning soundscontinuously. If the system detects astationary or receding object farther than30 cm (12 in) from the corners of thebumper, the tone sounds for only threeseconds. Once the system detects anobject approaching, the warning soundsagain.

122


Parking Aids

E130178

Coverage area of up to 1.8 m (6 ft) fromthe rear bumper. There may be decreasedcoverage area at the outer corners of thebumper.The system detects certain objects whilethe transmission is in reverse (R) :• Your vehicle is moving toward a

stationary object at a speed of 5 km/h(3 mph) or less.

• Your vehicle is not moving, but amoving object is approaching the rearof your vehicle at a speed of 5 km/h(3 mph) or less.

• Your vehicle is moving at a speed ofless than 5 km/h (3 mph) and a movingobject is approaching the rear of yourvehicle at a speed of less than 5 km/h(3 mph).

The system provides audio warnings onlywhen your vehicle is moving or when yourvehicle is stationary and the detectedobstacle is less than 30 cm (12 in) awayfrom the bumper.

Obstacle Distance Indicator (If

Equipped)

The system provides obstacle distanceindication through the information display.The distance indicator displays when thetransmission is in reverse (R).The indicator displays:• As the distance to the obstacle

decreases the indicator blocksilluminate and move towards thevehicle icon.

• If there is no obstacle detected, thedistance indicator blocks are greyedout.

REAR VIEW CAMERA

WARNINGSThe rear view camera system is areverse aid supplement device thatstill requires the driver to use it in

conjunction with the interior and exteriormirrors for maximum coverage.

You may not see objects that areclose to either corner of the bumperor under the bumper due to the

limited coverage of the camera system.Back up as slow as possible sincehigher speeds might limit yourreaction time to stop your vehicle.Use caution when using the rearvideo camera and the luggagecompartment is ajar. If the luggage

compartment is ajar, the camera will beout of position and the video image maybe incorrect. All guidelines are removedwhen the luggage compartment is ajar.

Use caution when turning camerafeatures on or off. Make sure yourvehicle is not moving.

123


Parking Aids

The rear view camera system provides avideo image of the area behind yourvehicle.During operation, lines appear in thedisplay which represent your vehicle’s pathand proximity to objects behind yourvehicle.

E174502

The camera is located on the luggagecompartment door.

Using the Rear View CameraSystemThe rear view camera system displayswhat is behind your vehicle when you placethe transmission in reverse (R).Note: The reverse sensing system is noteffective at speeds above 5 km/h (3 mph)and may not detect certain angular ormoving objects.The system uses two types of guides tohelp you see what is behind your vehicle:• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path

your vehicle is moving in while reversingin a straight line. This can be helpfulwhen backing into a parking space oraligning your vehicle with anotherobject behind you.

• Centerline: Helps align the center ofyour vehicle with an object.

Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)and the luggage compartment is open, nocamera features will display.The camera may not operate correctlyunder the following conditions:• Nighttime or dark areas if the reverse

lamps are not operating.• Mud, water or debris obstructs the

camera's view. Clean the lens with asoft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasivecleaner.

• The camera is misaligned due todamage to the rear of your vehicle.

Camera GuidelinesNote: Active guidelines are only availablewhen the transmission is in reverse (R).Note: Upon a battery disconnect, the activeguidelines may not be functional until yourvehicle has been driven a short distance andexceeds a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph).

124


Parking Aids

A B C D

F

E

E142436

Active guidelinesACenterlineBFixed guideline: Green zoneCFixed guideline: Yellow zoneDFixed guideline: Red zoneERear bumperF

Active guidelines only show with fixedguidelines. To use active guidelines, turnthe steering wheel to point the guidelinestoward an intended path. If the steeringwheel position changes while reversing,your vehicle might deviate from the originalintended path.

The fixed and active guidelines fade in andout depending on the steering wheelposition. The active guidelines do not showwhen the steering wheel position isstraight.Always use caution while reversing.Objects in the red zone are closest to yourvehicle and objects in the green zone arefarther away. Objects are getting closer toyour vehicle as they move from the greenzone to the yellow or red zones. Use theside view mirrors and rear view mirror toget better coverage on both sides and rearof your vehicle.

Manual Zoom

WARNINGWhen manual zoom is on, the fullarea behind your vehicle does notshow. Be aware of your surroundings

when using the manual zoom feature.

Note: Manual zoom is only available whenthe transmission is in reverse (R).Note: When manual zoom is enabled, onlythe centerline is shown.Selectable settings for this feature areZoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press thesymbol in the camera screen to change theview. The default setting is Zoom OFF.This feature allows you to get a closer viewof an object behind your vehicle. Thezoomed image keeps the bumper in theimage to provide a reference. The zoom isonly active while the transmission is inreverse (R). When the transmission shiftsout of reverse (R), the featureautomatically turns off and must be resetwhen it is used again.

125


Parking Aids

Camera System SettingsTo access any of the rear view camerasystem settings, make the followingselections in the multifunctional displaywhen the transmission is not in reverse (R):

Main Menu

Settings

Vehicle

Camera settings

Enhanced Park Aids or Park PilotSelectable settings for this feature are ONand OFF.The system uses red, yellow and greenhighlights that appear on top of the videoimage when any of the sensing systemsdetect an object.

Vehicles equipped with touchscreenThe system will provide an image of yourvehicle and the sensor zones. The zoneswill highlight green, yellow and red whenthe parking aid sensors detect an object inthe coverage area.The coverage area is up to 1.8 m (6 ft) fromthe rear bumper. There is decreasedcoverage area at the outer corners of thebumper.

E130178

For additional information of the zonecoverage and the rear sensing system. SeeRear Parking Aid (page 122).

Rear Camera DelaySelectable settings for this feature are ONand OFF.The default setting for the rear cameradelay is OFF.When shifting the transmission out ofreverse (R) and into any gear other thanpark (P), the camera image remains in thedisplay until:• Your vehicle speed sufficiently

increases.• You shift your vehicle into park (P).• You pull the hand brake on vehicles

with a manual transmission.

126


Parking Aids

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONCruise control lets you maintain a setspeed without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. You can use cruisecontrol when your vehicle speed is greaterthan 30 km/h (20 mph).

USING CRUISE CONTROL

WARNINGSDo not use cruise control on windingroads, in heavy traffic or when theroad surface is slippery. This could

result in loss of vehicle control, seriousinjury or death.

When you are going downhill, yourvehicle speed may increase abovethe set speed. The system will not

apply the brakes but a warning displays.

Note: Cruise control will disengage if thevehicle speed decreases more than 16 km/h(10 mph) below the set speed while drivinguphill.

E176993

The cruise controls are on the steeringwheel.

Switching Cruise Control On

E176994

Press and release ON.

E144529

The indicator appears in theinstrument cluster.

Setting the Cruise Speed1. Drive to desired speed.2. Press and release SET+.3. Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal.

Changing the Set Speed• Press and release SET+ or SET-. When

you select km/h as the displaymeasurement in the informationdisplay the set speed changes inapproximately 2 km/h increments.When you select mph as the displaymeasurement in the informationdisplay the set speed changes inapproximately 1 mph increments.

• Press the accelerator or brake pedaluntil you reach the desired speed. Pressand release SET+.

• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Releasethe control when you reach the desiredspeed.

127


Cruise Control

Canceling the Set SpeedPress and release CNCL or tap the brakepedal. The set speed does not erase.

Resuming the Set SpeedPress and release RES.

Switching Cruise Control OffPress and release OFF when the systemis in stand by mode or switch the ignitionoff.Note: You erase the set speed when youswitch the system off.

128


Cruise Control

DRIVE CONTROLSelectable Drive ModesSelectable drive modes delivers a drivingexperience through a suite of sophisticatedelectronic vehicle systems. These systemsoptimize steering, handling and powertrainresponse. This provides a single locationto control multiple systems performancesettings.Selectable drive modes consists of thefollowing systems:• Electronically power-assisted steering

adjusts steering effort and feel basedon your selected mode.

• Electronic stability control and tractioncontrol maintain your vehicle controlin adverse conditions or highperformance driving. See StabilityControl (page 118).

• Electronic throttle control enhancesthe powertrain response to your inputs.

Using Selectable Drive ModesSelectable drive modes automaticallytailors your vehicle configuration for eachmode selected.

E174706

To change the drive modesetting, toggle the mode buttonor switch on the instrument

panel under the display. The first press ofthe mode button or switch illuminates theselected mode, subsequent presses willchange the selected mode.Note: Mode changes are not available whenthe vehicle ignition is off or reverse (R) gearis selected. In gear position drive (D), theavailable modes are Normal, Sport+, Trackand Snow/Wet. In gear position sport (S)Snow/Wet and Normal mode areunavailable.

Modes:• Normal – Delivers a balanced

combination of comfort and handling.This mode provides an engaging driveexperience and a direct connection tothe road without sacrificing any of thecomposure demanded from yourvehicle.

• Sport – Engages when you shift yourautomatic transmission into sport (S).Sport mode increases throttleresponse and helps your vehicleaccelerate faster, but does not changethe feel of the steering or stabilitysystem.

• Sport+ – Provides a sportier steeringfeel and throttle response. Sport+mode is ideal for use during morespirited driving.

• Track – Provides a performance drivingexperience. The engine respondsdirectly to your inputs and takes on amore powerful tone. Track mode is foruse when pure performance is desired.A performance oriented tractioncontrol mode is automatically utilizedwhen Track drive mode is selected. Inthis mode, traction control interventionis reduced and tuned specifically fortrack usage only and is not intendedfor public roads. See Using StabilityControl (page 119).

• Snow/Wet - Provides a confidenthandling driving experience during poorweather. This mode provides aconfident drive experience and a directconnection to the road withoutsacrificing any of the composuredemanded from your vehicle.

129


Driving Aids

Note: Selectable driving modes hasdiagnostic checks that continuously monitorthe system to ensure proper operation.Certain selectable drive modes will not beavailable based on gear shifter position (forexample, Snow/Wet is not available whilein sport (S) position). If a selected mode isunavailable due to a system fault or changein gear shifter position, the selected modewill default to Normal.Note: Collision warning with brake supportis automatically disabled when Track modeis selected.

Selectable SteeringNote: The steering setting defaults toNormal if the battery is disconnected orremoved.

E174705

To change the steering feel,toggle the switch on theinstrument panel. The first press

illuminates the selected mode, subsequentpresses will change the selected mode.

Modes:• Normal - Default factory setting.• Sport - Slightly higher effort required

for steering with more road force feltthrough the steering wheel.

• Comfort - Slightly less effort requiredfor steering with less road force feltthrough the steering wheel.

After selecting the desired setting, you mayfeel a soft feedback bump in the steeringwheel when the changeover occurs.Note: If your vehicle is equipped with theselectable drive modes feature, the steeringfeel will change when you select a new drivemode. You can override this automaticselection by pressing the steering button orswitch.

130


Driving Aids

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGSUse load securing straps to anapproved standard, e.g. DIN.Make sure that you secure all looseitems properly.Place luggage and other loads as lowand as far forward as possible withinthe luggage or loadspace.Do not drive with the luggagecompartment or rear door open.Exhaust fumes may enter your

vehicle.Do not exceed the maximum frontand rear axle loads for your vehicle.See Vehicle Identification Plate

(page 193).Do not allow items to contact therear windows.

Note: When loading long objects in to yourvehicle, for example pipes, timber orfurniture be careful not to damage theinterior trim.

131


Load Carrying

TOWING A TRAILER

WARNINGYour vehicle is not approved fortrailer towing. Never tow a trailer withyour vehicle.

TOWING POINTS

WARNINGThe recovery hook has a left-handthread. Turn it counterclockwise toinstall it and make sure that it is fully

tightened. Failure to do so could result inthe recovery hook becoming loose.

The recovery hook is in the spare wheelwell.You must carry the recovery hook in yourvehicle at all times.

E206299

Remove the cover and install the recoveryhook.

TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE

E143886

If you need to have your vehicle towed,contact a professional towing service or,if you are a member of a roadsideassistance program, your roadsideassistance service provider.We recommend the use of a wheel lift anddollies or flatbed equipment to tow yourvehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. FordMotor Company has not approved aslingbelt towing procedure. Vehicledamage may occur if towed incorrectly, orby any other means.Ford Motor Company produces a towingmanual for all authorized tow truckoperators. Have your tow truck operatorrefer to this manual for proper hook-upand towing procedures for your vehicle.

132


Towing

The rear wheels (drive wheels) must beon a tow dolly when towing your vehiclefrom the front using wheel lift equipment.This prevents damage to the transmission.The front wheels should be on a tow dollywhen towing your vehicle from the rearusing wheel lift equipment. This preventsdamage to the front fascia.

TOWING THE VEHICLE ONFOUR WHEELSEmergency Towing

WARNINGIf your vehicle has a steering wheellock make sure the ignition is in theaccessory or on position when being

towed.

You can flat-tow (all wheels on theground, regardless of the powertrain ortransmission configuration) your disabledvehicle (without access to wheel dolliesor vehicle transport trailer) under thefollowing conditions:• Your vehicle is facing forward so you

tow it in a forward direction.• You shift into Neutral (N). If you cannot

shift into Neutral (N), you may need tooverride the transmission. SeeTransmission (page 109).

• Maximum speed is 56 km/h (35 mph).• Maximum distance is 80 km (50 mi).

Recreational TowingNote: Put the climate control system inrecirculated air mode to prevent exhaustfumes from entering your vehicle. SeeClimate Control (page 83).

Follow these guidelines if you have a needfor recreational (RV) towing. An exampleof recreational towing would be towingyour vehicle behind a motorhome. Theseguidelines are to make sure you do notdamage the transmission during towing.Do not tow your vehicle with any wheelson the ground, as vehicle or transmissiondamage may occur. It is recommended totow your vehicle with all four wheels offthe ground, for example when using avehicle transport trailer. Otherwise, youcannot tow your vehicle.

133


Towing

OPENING THE CONVERTIBLETOPWhen you use the top, you must firstunlatch it from the windshield and thenuse the convertible top control.Note: The convertible top does not operateunless the vehicle is stationary or travelingunder 4.8 km/h (3.0 mph). A chime soundsand a warning message appears in theinstrument panel. When you slow down, thetop operates.Note: When you latch or unlatch theconvertible top, the audio system mutesbriefly. This allows the vehicle to optimizethe cabin’s sound quality depending on theposition of the convertible top.To unlatch the convertible top:1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

The ignition must be on. Werecommend that the vehicle remainsrunning when you open the top toprevent draining the battery.

2. Check the convertible top stowagecompartment behind the rear seat tobe sure it is empty. Make sure theconvertible top outer surface is free ofdebris.

3. Move the latch handle, located abovethe interior mirror, down toward thewindshield and rotate the handleclockwise to release the convertibletop.

E174571

The windows open automatically whenyou press the convertible top control.To open the convertible top:1. Press and hold the convertible top

control, located on the overheadconsole, until the windows arecompletely down and the top storescompletely.

2. Release the convertible top control.

E174568

Note: Do not store articles behind rear seat.Articles stored in the convertible topstowage compartment may break the rearglass window when you open the top.Note: Opening the convertible top whenthe top material is wet may cause mold ormildew.

134


Convertible Top (If Equipped)

Using the Tonneau CapsYour convertible top also includes twotonneau caps, one for each side of thevehicle. These caps stow inside the trunk.

E174569

Leading edge.A.

Side edge.B.

After opening your convertible top, placethe tonneau caps between the top andyour vehicle trim moulding:1. Insert A under the trim.2. When A is under the trim cap, angle B

down so the edges slide under thesurrounding moulding and secure intoplace between the trim edges.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the oppositeside of the vehicle to install the secondtonneau cap.

CLOSING THE CONVERTIBLETOPClosing the convertible top is a three-stepprocess: Remove both of the tonneaucaps, press the convertible top control toclose the top, and then close the latch.

To remove the tonneau caps:1. Slide B toward the center of the vehicle

to release the edges from thesurrounding trim.

2. Lift up on B, and then pull the pieceback to release A from the trim.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the oppositeside of the vehicle.

4. Make sure you stow both pieces in thetrunk.

E179941

Note: The convertible top does not operateunless the vehicle is stationary or travelingunder 4.8 km/h (3.0 mph). A chime soundsand a warning message appears in theinstrument panel. When you slow down, thetop operates.Note: You must remove the tonneau capsbefore you are able to close the top or achime sounds and a warning messageappears in the instrument panel. Removeand stow the caps, and then press theconvertible top control again.Note: When you latch or unlatch theconvertible top, the audio system mutesbriefly. This allows the vehicle to optimizethe cabin’s sound quality depending on theposition of the convertible top.

135



To close the convertible top:1. Stop the vehicle and keep the engine

running. We recommend that thevehicle remains running when you openthe top to prevent draining the battery.

2. Press and hold the convertible topcontrol. When the convertible latchhandle is within reach, make sure it isdown and that you rotate it clockwiseso the latch is in the fully openedposition. Continue pressing theconvertible top control until thewindows lower completely, and thetop unfolds and moves forward towardthe windshield header.

3. When the top lines up evenly with thewindshield header, release theconvertible top control.

E174568

The final step when closing the convertibletop is to lock the latch.To lock the latch on the convertible top:1. Pull down on the latch handle and

rotate it counter-clockwise to securethe convertible top.

2. After securing the convertible top fully,push the latch handle up into thestowed position to secure the latch.

E178453

Note: If you keep the top open for anextended period of time or if thetemperature is low, the top material mayshrink slightly. If this happens, pull on thelatch handle to secure the top.

136



BREAKING-INTires

WARNINGNew tires need to be run-in forapproximately 300 miles (500kilometers). During this time, you

may experience different drivingcharacteristics.

Brakes and ClutchWARNING

Avoid heavy use of the brakes andclutch if possible for the first 100miles (150 kilometers) in town and

for the first 1000 miles (1500 kilometers)on freeways.

EngineWARNING

Avoid driving too fast during the first1000 miles (1500 kilometers). Varyyour speed frequently and change

up through the gears early. Do not laborthe engine.

Vehicles With a Diesel EngineDuring the first 2000 miles (3000kilometers), you may notice a ticking soundwhen your vehicle slows down. This is dueto adjustments of your new diesel engineand is normal.

REDUCED ENGINEPERFORMANCE

WARNINGContinued operation will increase theengine temperature and cause theengine to shut down completely.

If the engine coolant temperature gaugeneedle moves to the upper limit position,the engine is overheating. See Gauges(page 61).You must only drive your vehicle for a shortdistance if the engine overheats. Thedistance you can travel depends onambient temperature, vehicle load andterrain. The engine will continue to operatewith limited power for a short time.If the engine temperature continues to rise,the fuel supply to the engine will reduce.The air conditioning will switch off and theengine cooling fan will operate continually.1. Reduce your speed gradually and stop

your vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

2. Switch the engine off immediately toprevent severe engine damage.

3. Wait for the engine to cool down.4. Check the coolant level. See Engine

Coolant Check (page 156).5. Have your vehicle checked by an

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

ECONOMICAL DRIVINGThe following will help to improve fuelconsumption.

Tire PressuresCheck your tire pressures regularly tooptimize fuel economy. For best resultsuse the economy pressures. SeeTechnical Specifications (page 189).

Gear ShiftingUse the highest drivable gear appropriatefor the road conditions.

137


Driving Hints

AnticipationAdjust your vehicle speed and the distanceto other vehicles without the need forheavy braking or acceleration.

Efficient SpeedHigher speeds use more fuel. Reduce yourcruising speed on open roads.

AccessoriesTry not to add unnecessary accessories tothe exterior of your vehicle. If you use a roofrack, remember to fold it down or removeit when not in use.

Electrical SystemsSwitch off all electrical systems when notin use, for example air conditioning. Makesure you unplug any accessories from theauxiliary power points when not in use.

COLD WEATHERPRECAUTIONSThe functional operation of somecomponents and systems can be affectedat temperatures below -25°C (-13°F).

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

WARNINGDo not drive through flowing or deepwater as you may lose control of yourvehicle.

Note: Driving through standing water cancause vehicle damage.Note: Engine damage can occur if waterenters the air filter.

Before driving through standing water,check the depth. Never drive through waterthat is higher than the bottom of the frontrocker area of your vehicle.

E176360

When driving through standing water, drivevery slowly and do not stop your vehicle.Your brake performance and traction maybe limited. After driving through water andas soon as it is safe to do so:• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the

brakes and to check that they work.• Check that the horn works.• Check that the exterior lights work.• Turn the steering wheel to check that

the steering power assist works.

FLOOR MATS

WARNINGSAlways use floor mats that aredesigned to fit the foot well of yourvehicle. Only use floor mats that

leave the pedal area unobstructed. Onlyuse floor mats that are firmly secured toretention posts so that they cannot slip outof position and interfere with the pedalsor impair safe operation of your vehicle inother ways.

138


Driving Hints

WARNINGSPedals that cannot move freely cancause loss of vehicle control andincrease the risk of serious personal

injury.Always make sure that the floormats are properly attached to theretention posts in the carpet that are

supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats mustbe properly secured to both retention poststo make sure mats do not shift out ofposition.

Never place floor mats or any othercovering in the vehicle foot well thatcannot be properly secured to

prevent them from moving and interferingwith the pedals or the ability to control thevehicle.

Never place floor mats or any othercovering on top of already installedfloor mats. Floor mats should always

rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface andnot another floor mat or other covering.Additional floor mats or any other coveringwill reduce the pedal clearance andpotentially interfere with pedal operation.

Check attachment of floor mats ona regular basis. Always properlyreinstall and secure floor mats that

have been removed for cleaning orreplacement.

Always make sure that objectscannot fall into the driver foot wellwhile the vehicle is moving. Objects

that are loose can become trapped underthe pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.

Failure to properly follow floor matinstallation or attachmentinstructions can potentially cause

interference with pedal operation causinga loss of vehicle control.

E142666

To install floor mats, position the floor matso that the eyelet is over the retention postand press down to lock in.To remove the floor mat, reverse theinstallation procedure.

139


Driving Hints

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSNote: The hazard warning flashers willoperate when the ignition is in any positionor if the key is not in the ignition. If usedwhen the engine is not running, the batterywill lose charge. As a result, there may beinsufficient power to restart your engine.

E142663

The hazard flasher control islocated on the instrument panelby the radio. Use it when your

vehicle is disabled and is creating a safetyhazard for other motorists.

• Press the flasher control and all frontand rear direction indicators flash.

• Press the flasher control again to turnthem off.

FIRST AID KITThe first aid kit can be stowed under thefront passenger seat or in the luggagecompartment.

WARNING TRIANGLEThe warning triangle can be stowed underthe front passenger seat.

FUEL SHUTOFF

WARNINGFailure to inspect and, if necessary,repair fuel leaks after a collision mayincrease the risk of fire and serious

injury. Ford Motor Company recommendsthat the fuel system be inspected by anauthorized dealer after any collision.

In the event of a moderate to severecollision, this vehicle includes a fuel pumpshut-off feature that stops the flow of fuelto the engine. Not every impact will causea shut-off.Should your vehicle shut off after acollision, you may restart your vehicle. Forvehicles equipped with a push button startsystem:1. Press the START/STOP button to

switch off the ignition.2. Press the brake pedal and press the

START/STOP button to switch on theignition.

3. Remove your foot from the brake orclutch pedal and press theSTART/STOP button to switch offthe ignition.

4. Press the brake or clutch pedal and theSTART/STOP button, or switch onthe ignition only by pressing theSTART/STOP button withoutpressing the brake or clutch pedal. Bothways re-enable the fuel system.

Note: When you try to restart your vehicleafter a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes surethat various systems are safe to restart.Once your vehicle determines that thesystems are safe, then the vehicle will allowyou to restart.Note: In the event that your vehicle doesnot restart after your third attempt, contactan authorized dealer.

140


Roadside Emergencies

JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE

WARNINGSBatteries normally produce explosivegases which can cause personalinjury. Therefore, do not allow

flames, sparks or lighted substances tocome near the battery. When working nearthe battery, always shield your face andprotect your eyes. Always provide correctventilation.

Keep batteries out of reach ofchildren. Batteries contain sulfuricacid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or

clothing. Shield your eyes when workingnear the battery to protect against possiblesplashing of acid solution. In case of acidcontact with skin or eyes, flushimmediately with water for a minimum of15 minutes and get prompt medicalattention. If acid is swallowed, call aphysician immediately.

Use only adequatly sized cables withinsulated clamps.

Preparing Your VehicleNote: Do not attempt to push-start yourautomatic transmission vehicle. Attemptingto push-start a vehicle with an automatictransmission may cause transmissiondamage.Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start yourvehicle.Note: Do not disconnect the battery of thedisabled vehicle as this could damage thevehicles electrical system.Park the booster vehicle close to the hoodof the disabled vehicle, making sure thetwo vehicles do not touch. Switch off allaccessories.

Connecting the Jumper CablesWARNING

Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,engine rocker covers, the intakemanifold or electrical components

as grounding points. Stay clear of movingparts. To avoid reverse polarityconnections, make sure that you correctlyidentify the positive (+) and negative (-)terminals on both the disabled and boostervehicles before connecting the cables.

Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehiclerepresents the booster vehicle.

4

2

1

3

E142664

1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cableto the positive (+) terminal of thedischarged battery.

141



2. Connect the other end of the positive(+) cable to the positive (+) terminalof the booster vehicle battery.

3. Connect the negative (-) cable to thenegative (-) terminal of the boostervehicle battery.

4. Make the final connection of thenegative (-) cable to an exposed metalpart of the stalled vehicle's engine,away from the battery and the fuelinjection system, or connect thenegative (-) cable to a groundconnection point if available.

E204033

Note: You can use the optional connectionpoint location shown above to ground yourvehicle.

WARNINGDo not connect the end of thesecond cable to the negative (-)terminal of the battery to be jumped.

A spark may cause an explosion of thegases that surround the battery.

Jump Starting1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle

and rev the engine moderately, or pressthe accelerator gently to keep yourengine speed between 2000 and 3000RPM as shown in your tachometer.

2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.

3. Once the disabled vehicle has beenstarted, run both vehicle engines for anadditional three minutes beforedisconnecting the jumper cables.

Removing the Jumper CablesRemove the jumper cables in the reverseorder that they were connected.

4

1

3

2

E142665

1. Remove the jumper cable from theground metal surface or connectingpoint, if available.

2. Remove the negative (-) jumper cablefrom the disabled vehicle.

3. Remove the jumper cable on thenegative (-) terminal of the boostervehicle battery.

4. Remove the jumper cable from thepositive (+) terminal of the boostervehicle battery.

142



5. Remove the jumper cable from thepositive (+) terminal of the disabledvehicle battery.

Allow the engine to idle for at least oneminute.

POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEMThe system flashes the direction indicatorlamps in the event of a serious impact thatdeploys an airbag (front, side, side curtainor Safety Canopy) or the seatbeltpretensioners.The lamps turn off when:• You press the hazard control button.• You press the panic button (if

equipped) on the remote entrytransmitter.

• Your vehicle runs out of power.

143



FUSE SPECIFICATION CHARTPower Distribution Box

WARNINGSAlways disconnect the battery beforeservicing high current fuses.To reduce risk of electrical shock,always replace the cover to thepower distribution box before

reconnecting the battery or refilling fluidreservoirs.

The power distribution box is located inthe engine compartment. It hashigh-current fuses that protect yourvehicle's main electrical systems fromoverloads.If you disconnect and reconnect thebattery, you will need to reset somefeatures. See Changing the 12V Battery(page 159).

E174563

Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number

Not used.—1

Not used.—2

Not used.—3

144


Fuses


Not used.—4

Automatic brake system pump.50A*5

Body control module.50A*6



Rear window defroster.40A*9

Blower motor.40A*10

Left-hand front window.30A**11

Driver seat.30A**12

Passenger seat.30A**13

Climate-controlled seat module.30A**14

Convertible top motor.20A**15

Not used.—16

Convertible top motor.20A**17

Not used.—18

Steering column lock relay.20A***19

Brake on-off switch.10A***20

Horn.20A***21

Powertrain control module relay.10A***22

Air conditioning clutch.10A***23

Voltage quality module.30A**24

Not used.—25

Windshield wiper motor.25A**26

Not used.—27

Automatic brake system valve.30A**28

Electronic fan 1.30A**29

Starter motor solenoid.30A**30

145


Fuses



Latch relay coil.10A***32

Left-hand high-intensity discharge head-lamps.

20A***33

Not used.—34

Right-hand high-intensity discharge head-lamps.

20A***35

Alt sense.10A***36

Not used.—37

Vehicle power 1.20A***38

Not used.—39


Fuel injectors.15A***41


Not used.—43


Not used.—45

Not used.—46

Not used.—47

Not used.—48

Fuel pump.30A**49

Steering column lock relay.—50

Not used.—51

Horn relay.—52

Cigar lighter.20A**53

Auxiliary power point.20A**54


Not used.—56

146


Fuses


Air conditioning clutch relay.—57

Not used.—58

Not used.—59

Powertrain control module.5A***60

Not used.—61

Anti-lock brakes run-start switch.5A***62

Not used.—63

Electronic power assist steering.5A***64

Not used.—65

Rear view camera.5A***66Air conditioning compressor relay coils.

Not used.—67

Headlamp leveling switch.10A***68

Auxiliary power point relay.—69

Heated exterior mirrors.10A***70

Not used.—71

Rain sensor module.5A***72

Not used.—73

Mass air flow sensor.5A***74

Not used.—75

Rear window defroster.—76

Electronic cooling fan 2.—77

Left-hand high-intensity discharge head-lamp relay.

—78

Right-hand high-intensity-dischargeheadlamp relay.

—79

Windshield wiper relay.—80

Starter motor solenoid.—81

147


Fuses


Powertrain control module relay.—82

Not used.—83

Not used.—84

Not used.—85

Not used.—86

Not used.—87

Not used.—88

Electronic fan 1 relay.—89

Not used.—90

Electronic fan 3 relay.—91

Blower motor relay.—92

Not used.—93

Fuel pump relay.—94

*J-case fuses.**M-case fuses.***Micro fuses.

Passenger Compartment FusePanelThe fuse panel is in the right-hand side ofthe passenger footwell behind a trim paneland plastic key code card.To remove the trim panel, lift it from therear retaining hooks, while pulling it towardyou and swinging it away from the side. Toreinstall it, line up the tabs with the grooveson the panel, drop the panel back intoplace, and then push it shut.

To reach the fuse panel, first remove thekey code card.After replacing a fuse, return the key codecard to the original position. To reinstallthe trim panel, lineup the tabs with thegrooves on the panel, drop the panel backinto place, and then push it shut to reinstallthe trim panel.

148


Fuses

E174564


Demand lamps.10A1

Power mirror memory module.7.5A2

Driver console unlock.20A3

Not used.5A4

Subwoofer amplifier.20A5

Not used (spare).10A6






149


Fuses


Climate control module.7.5A12

Gateway module.7.5A13Steering column control module.Instrument cluster.


Gateway module.10A15

Decklid release.15A16

Battery backed sounder.5A17

Intrusion sensor module.5A18

Passenger airbag deactivation indicator.7.5A19

Not used (spare).7.5A20

In-vehicle temperature and humiditysensor.

5A21

Occupant classification system module.5A22

Switches.10A23Power windows.Rear-view mirror.

Central lock unlock.20A24


Right-hand front-window motor.30A26

Amplifier.30A27

Auxiliary body module.20A28

Left-hand rear-window power.30A29

Right-hand rear-window power.30A30


Remote keyless entry.10A32Multi-function display.SYNC.Global positioning system module.Gauges.

Audio head unit.20A33

150


Fuses


Run-start bus.30A34

Restraints control module.5A35

Auxiliary body module.15A36

Power distribution box run-start bus.15A37

Not used (spare).30A—

CHANGING A FUSEFuses

WARNINGYou must replace a failed fuse withone that has the specified amperagerating. If you use a fuse with a higher

amperage rating, you may cause severewire damage and may start a fire.

E142430

A fuse may fail if electrical components inthe vehicle are not properly working. Abroken wire inside the fuse indicates afailed fuse. Check the appropriate fusesbefore replacing any electricalcomponents.

151


Fuses

GENERAL INFORMATIONHave your vehicle serviced regularly to helpmaintain its roadworthiness and resalevalue. There is a large network of Fordauthorized repairers that are there to helpyou with their professional servicingexpertise. Authorized repairers are bestqualified to service your vehicle properlyand expertly, with a wide range of highlyspecialized tools.In addition to regular servicing, werecommend that you carry out thefollowing checks.

WARNINGSSwitch the ignition off beforetouching or attempting adjustmentof any kind.Do not touch the electronic ignitionsystem parts after you have switchedthe ignition on or when the engine is

running. The system operates at highvoltage.

Keep your hands and clothing clearof the engine cooling fan. Undercertain conditions, the fan may

continue to run for several minutes afteryou have switched the engine off.

Make sure that you fit filler capssecurely after carrying outmaintenance checks.

Daily Checks• Exterior lamps.• Interior lamps.• Warning lamps and indicators.

Check When Refueling• Brake fluid level. See Brake Fluid

Check (page 158).• Washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid

Check (page 158).

• Tire pressures (when cold). SeeTechnical Specifications (page 189).

• Tire condition. See Wheels and Tires(page 171).

Monthly Checks• Engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check

(page 156).• Engine coolant level (engine cold). See

Engine Coolant Check (page 156).• Pipes, hoses and reservoirs for leaks.• Air conditioning operation.• Parking brake operation.• Horn operation.• Tightness of lug nuts. See Technical

Specifications (page 189).

OPENING AND CLOSING THEHOODOpening the Hood

E142457

1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood releasehandle located under the left-handside of the instrument panel.

2. Slightly lift the hood.

152


Maintenance

E174561

3. Release the hood latch by pushing thesecondary release lever to yourleft-hand side. E87786

4. Open the hood. Support the hood withthe strut.

Closing the Hood1. Remove the hood strut from the catch

and secure it correctly after use.2. Lower the hood and allow it to drop

under its own weight for the last20–30 cm (8–12 in).

Note: Make sure that the hood is correctlyclosed.

153


Maintenance

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.3L ECOBOOST™

E174450

Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 159).AEngine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 156).BEngine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 156).CBrake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 158).DAir cleaner assembly.EEngine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 156).FWindshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 158).GEngine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 144).H

154


Maintenance

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 5.0L

E174560

Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 159).A.Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 156).B.Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 156).C.Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 158).D.Air cleaner assembly.E.Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 156).F.Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 158).G.Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 144).H.

155


Maintenance

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK

E161560

A B

MINAMAXB

ENGINE OIL CHECK1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level

ground.2. Check the oil level before starting the

engine, or switch the engine off andwait 10 minutes for the oil to drain intothe oil pan.

3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it witha clean, lint free cloth. Replace thedipstick and remove it again to checkthe oil level.

If the oil level is at the minimum mark, addoil immediately. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 194).Note: Make sure that the oil level isbetween the minimum and the maximummarks.Note: Do not use oil additives or otherengine treatments. Under certain conditionsthey may cause engine damage.Note: The oil consumption of new enginesreaches its normal level after approximately5,000 km (3,000 mi).

Adding Engine OilWARNINGS

Only add oil when the engine is cold.If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutesfor the engine to cool down.Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is running.

1. Remove the engine oil filler cap. SeeMaintenance (page 152).

2. Add engine oil that meets Fordspecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 194).

3. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turnit until you feel a strong resistance.

Note: Do not add oil further than themaximum mark. Oil levels above themaximum mark may cause engine damage.Note: Soak up any spillage with anabsorbent cloth immediately.

ENGINE COOLANT CHECK

WARNINGSDo not dispose of engine coolant inthe household refuse or the publicsewage system. Use an authorized

waste disposal facility.Do not put engine coolant in thewindshield washer fluid container. Ifsprayed on the windshield, engine

coolant could make it difficult to seethrough the windshield.

156


Maintenance

E169064

Make sure that the coolant level isbetween the MIN and MAX marks on thecoolant reservoir. If the coolant level is ator below the minimum mark, add coolantimmediately.The coolant concentration should bemaintained within 48% to 50%, whichequates to a freeze point between -30°F(-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C).Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. Thelevel may extend beyond the MAX mark.Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, coolingsystem sealants or additives as they cancause damage to the engine cooling orheating systems.

Adding Engine CoolantWARNINGS

Never remove the coolant reservoircap while the engine is running or hot.Only add coolant when the engine iscold. If the engine is hot, wait 10minutes for the engine to cool down.Do not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinse theaffected areas immediately with

plenty of water and contact your physician.Undiluted coolant is flammable andmay ignite if spilled on a hot exhaust.

Ford Motor Company does not recommendthe use of recycled engine coolant since aFord-approved recycling process is not yetavailable.Do not mix different colors or types ofcoolant in your vehicle.Note: Add a 50/50 mixture of antifreezeand water or prediluted engine coolant thatmeets the correct specification.Note: Use fluids which meet thespecifications or requirements defined. Useof other fluids may lead to damage whichis not covered by your vehicle's Warranty.See Capacities and Specifications (page191).To top up the coolant level do thefollowing:1. Remove the coolant reservoir cap.2. Add engine coolant to the MAX mark,

do not overfill.3. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn

it clockwise until you feel a strongresistance.

Note: In case of emergency, you can addwater without engine coolant in order toreach a vehicle service location.Note: Prolonged use of an incorrect dilutionof engine coolant can cause engine damage,such as corrosion, overheating or freezing.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONFLUID CHECKIf required, have an authorized dealer checkand change the transmission fluid at thecorrect service interval.The automatic transmission does not havea transmission fluid dipstick.

157


Maintenance

Refer to your scheduled maintenanceinformation for scheduled intervals for fluidchecks and changes. Your transmissiondoes not consume fluid. However, if thetransmission slips, shifts slowly or if younotice a sign of leaking fluid, contact anauthorized dealer.Do not use supplemental transmissionfluid additives, treatments or cleaningagents. The use of these materials mayaffect transmission operation and resultin damage to internal transmissioncomponents.

BRAKE FLUID CHECK

WARNINGSDo not use any fluid other than therecommended brake fluid as this willreduce brake efficiency. Use of

incorrect fluid could result in the loss ofvehicle control, serious personal injury ordeath.

Only use brake fluid from a sealedcontainer. Contamination with dirt,water, petroleum products or other

materials may result in brake systemdamage or failure. Failure to adhere to thiswarning could result in the loss of vehiclecontrol, serious personal injury or death.

Do not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinse theaffected areas immediately with

plenty of water and contact your physician.A fluid level between the MAX andMIN lines is within the normaloperating range and there is no need

to add fluid. A fluid level not in the normaloperating range could compromise theperformance of the system. Have yourvehicle checked immediately.

E170684

To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoircap must remain in place and fully tight,unless you are adding fluid.Only use fluid that meets Fordspecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 191).

CLUTCH FLUID CHECK -MANUAL TRANSMISSIONThe clutch and brake systems share thesame fluid reservoir. See Brake FluidCheck (page 158).

WASHER FLUID CHECKWhen adding fluid, use a mixture of washerfluid and water to help prevent freezing incold weather and improve the cleaningcapability. For information on fluid dilution,refer to the product instructions.

158


Maintenance

FUEL FILTERYour vehicle is equipped with a lifetimefuel filter that is integrated with the fueltank. Regular maintenance or replacementis not needed.

CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY

WARNINGSBatteries normally produce explosivegases which can cause personalinjury. Therefore, do not allow

flames, sparks or lighted substances tocome near the battery. When working nearthe battery, always shield your face andprotect your eyes. Always provide correctventilation.

When lifting a plastic-cased battery,excessive pressure on the end wallscould cause acid to flow through the

vent caps, resulting in personal injury anddamage to the vehicle or battery. Lift thebattery with a battery carrier or with yourhands on opposite corners.

Keep batteries out of reach ofchildren. Batteries contain sulfuricacid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or

clothing. Shield your eyes when workingnear the battery to protect against possiblesplashing of acid solution. In case of acidcontact with skin or eyes, flushimmediately with water for a minimum of15 minutes and get prompt medicalattention. If acid is swallowed, call aphysician immediately.

Battery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds. Wash hands after

handling.For vehicles with Auto-Start-Stopthe battery requirement is different.You must replace the battery with

one of exactly the same specification.

The battery is located in the enginecompartment. See Under HoodOverview (page 154).Your vehicle has a maintenance-freebattery. It does not require additional waterduring service.If your vehicle battery has a cover, makesure you correctly install it after cleaningor replacing the battery.For longer, trouble-free operation, keep thetop of the battery clean and dry and thebattery cables tightly fastened to thebattery terminals. If any corrosion ispresent on the battery or terminals, removethe cables from the terminals and cleanwith a wire brush. You can neutralize theacid with a solution of baking soda andwater.We recommend that you disconnect thenegative battery cable terminal from thebattery if you plan to store your vehicle foran extended period.To maintain correct operation of thebattery management system, if you addany electrical devices to your vehicle, donot connect the ground connection directlyto the negative battery terminal. Aconnection at the negative battery terminalcan cause inaccurate measurements ofthe battery condition and potentialincorrect system operation.Note: Electrical accessories or componentsadded to your vehicle by you or anauthorized dealer, may adversely affectbattery performance, durability and theperformance of other electrical systems onyour vehicle.If a replacement battery is required, werecommend you use a Ford replacementbattery that matches the electricalrequirements of your vehicle.

159


Maintenance

If you disconnect or replace the batteryand your vehicle has an automatictransmission, transmission must relearnits adaptive strategy. Because of this, thetransmission may shift firmly when firstdriven. This is normal operation while thetransmission fully updates its operation tooptimum shift feel.

Remove and Reinstall the BatteryTo disconnect or remove the battery, dothe following:1. Apply the parking brake and switch the

ignition off.2. Switch all electrical equipment off, for

example lights and radio.3. Wait a minimum of two minutes before

disconnecting the battery.*

4. Disconnect the negative battery cableterminal first.

5. Disconnect the positive battery cableterminal last.

6. Remove the battery securing clamp.7. Remove the battery.8. Install in the reverse order.**

*The engine management system has apower hold function and remains poweredfor a period after you switch the ignitionoff. This is to allow diagnostic and adaptivetables to be stored. Disconnecting thebattery without waiting can cause damagenot covered by the vehicle Warranty.**Before reconnecting the battery, makesure the ignition remains switched off.Note: If you only disconnect the negativebattery cable terminal, make sure it isisolated or placed away from the batteryterminal to avoid un-intended connectionor arcing.Note: Make sure the battery cable terminalsare fully tightened.

Note: If you disconnect or replace thebattery, you must reset the clock and thepre-set radio stations once the battery isreconnected.

Battery Disposal

E107998

Make sure that you dispose ofold batteries in anenvironmentally friendly way.

Seek advice from your local authorityabout recycling old batteries.

CHECKING THE WIPERBLADES

E142463

Run the tip of your fingers over the edge ofthe blade to check for roughness.Clean the wiper blades with washer fluidor water applied with a soft sponge orcloth.

CHANGING THE WIPERBLADES - LHD1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away

from the glass and press the lockingbuttons together.

160


Maintenance

E129990

1

1

22. Rotate and remove the wiper blade.3. Attach the new blade to the arm and

snap it into place.Replace wiper blades at least once peryear for optimum performance.Poor wiper quality can be improved bycleaning the wiper blades and thewindshield.

CHANGING THE WIPERBLADES - RHDReplace the wiper blades at least annuallyfor optimum performance.You can improve poor wiper quality bycleaning the wiper blades and thewindshield.

Service PositionNote: Do not hold the wiper blade whenmoving the wiper arm to the service position.

E211254

Set the windshield wipers in the serviceposition to change the wiper blades. Youcan manually move the wiper arms to theservice position when you switch theignition off. The windshield wipers returnto the starting position when you switchthe ignition on.1. Switch the ignition off.2. Manually move the wiper arms to the

service position.Note: You cannot move the wiper arms tothe service position manually when youswitch the ignition on.Note: You can use the service position toprovide easier access to the wiper bladesfor freeing them from snow and ice.Note: Make sure the windshield is free fromsnow and ice before you switch the ignitionon.

Changing the Windshield WiperBladesNote: Do not hold the wiper blade whenlifting the wiper arm.Note: Make sure that the wiper arm doesnot spring back against the glass when thewiper blade is not attached.

E129990

1

1

21. Lift the wiper arm and then press the

wiper blade locking buttons together.2. Slightly rotate the wiper blade.

161


Maintenance

3. Remove the wiper blade.4. Install in the reverse order.

ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS- LHDVertical AimHeadlamp Aim Target

E142592

8 ft (2.4 m).ACenter height of lamp to ground.B25 ft (7.6 m).CHorizontal reference line.D

Vertical Aim Adjustment1. Park your vehicle on a level surface

approximately 7.6 m (25 ft) away froma vertical wall or screen.

2. Apply the parking brake.3. Measure the height from the center of

the headlamp to the ground.Note: There may be an identifying mark onthe lens to help you locate the center of theheadlamp bulb.4. Mark a horizontal reference line on the

vertical wall or screen that is aminimum of 2.4 m (8 ft) long.

5. Switch the low beam headlamps onand open the hood.

E209825

6. There is a distinct change from light todark in the left-hand portion of theheadlamp beam pattern. Position thetop edge of this cut-off 7.5 cm (3 in)below the horizontal reference line.

E187824

7. To adjust the vertical aim, use asuitable tool to rotate the adjusterclockwise or counterclockwise.

Note: To see a clearer light pattern whileadjusting one headlamp, block the lightfrom the other headlamp.8. Close the hood and switch the low

beam headlamps off.

Horizontal Aim AdjustmentHorizontal aim should not be requiredalthough it is adjustable.

162


Maintenance

E209667

1X

1. Locate the adjuster within theextension tube attached to the rear ofthe headlamp assembly.

2. To adjust the horizontal aim, use asuitable tool to rotate the adjusterclockwise or counterclockwise.

Note: X: Toward the front of the vehicle.

ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS- RHDVertical AimHeadlamp Aim Target

E142592

8 ft (2.4 m).ACenter height of headlamp tothe ground.

B

25 ft (7.6 m).CHorizontal reference line.D

Vertical Aim Adjustment1. Park your vehicle on a level surface

approximately 7.6 m (25 ft) away froma vertical wall or screen.

2. Apply the parking brake.3. Measure the height from the center of

the headlamp to the ground.Note: There may be an identifying mark onthe lens to help you locate the center of theheadlamp bulb.4. Mark a horizontal reference line on the

vertical wall or screen that is aminimum of 2.4 m (8 ft) long.

5. Switch the low beam headlamps onand open the hood.

163


Maintenance

E209826

6. There is a distinct change from light todark in the right-hand portion of theheadlamp beam pattern. Position thetop edge of this cut-off 7.5 cm (3 in)below the horizontal reference line.

E187824

7. To adjust the vertical aim, use asuitable tool to rotate the adjusterclockwise or counterclockwise.

Note: To see a clearer light pattern whileadjusting one headlamp, block the lightfrom the other headlamp.8. Close the hood and switch the low

beam headlamps off.

Horizontal Aim AdjustmentHorizontal aim should not be requiredalthough it is adjustable.

E209667

1X

1. Locate the adjuster within theextension tube attached to the rear ofthe headlamp assembly.

2. To adjust the horizontal aim, use asuitable tool to rotate the adjusterclockwise or counterclockwise.

Note: X: Toward the front of the vehicle.

CHANGING A BULB

WARNINGSSwitch the lamps and the ignition off.Failure to do so could result inserious personal injury.

164


Maintenance

WARNINGSBulbs become hot when in use. Letthem cool down before you removethem.

Use the correct specification bulb. SeeBulb Specification Chart (page 168).The following instructions describe how toremove the bulbs. Install in the reverseorder unless otherwise stated.

Headlamp

E199556

A

Headlamp high and low beam.A

Front Side Lamp

E159695

1. Remove the three wheel arch linerfasteners.

E176616

2. Remove the outermost engineundershield fastener.

3. Pull the wheel liner back toward thetire to gain access to the bulb.

4. Remove the bulb holder by pulling itstraight out.

5. Remove the bulb by pulling it straightout.

Headlamp Low and High BeamYour vehicle has high intensity dischargelamps. These lamps operate at a highvoltage. Contact an authorized dealer ifthey fail.

Front Direction Indicator

E180889

1. Reposition the wheel arch liner, seeFront Side Lamp.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.

165


Maintenance

3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwiseand remove it.


Daytime Running LampNote: Do not touch the bulb glass.1. Reposition the wheel arch liner, see

Front Side Lamp.

2

3

E199705

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise

and remove it.Note: You cannot separate the bulb fromthe bulb holder.

Front Fog LampNote: Do not touch the bulb glass.1. Reposition the wheel arch liner, see

Front Side Lamp.

E174588

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise

and remove it.Note: You cannot separate the bulb fromthe bulb holder.

LED LampsLED lamps are not serviceable items.Contact an authorized dealer if they fail.The following are LED lamps:• Rear lamp.• Brake lamp.• Central high mounted brake lamp.• Rear direction indicator lamp.• License plate lamp.

Reversing Lamp1. Locate the reverse lamp bulb under the

rear bumper of your vehicle. To accessthe bulb, reach behind the bumper.


166


Maintenance

E199707



Rear Fog Lamp1. Locate the rear fog lamp bulb under

the rear bumper of your vehicle. Toaccess the bulb, reach behind thebumper.


E199706



167


Maintenance

BULB SPECIFICATION CHARTExterior Lamps

Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp

5W5WFront side lamp.

21PY21WFront direction indicator.

30P13WDaytime running lamps.

HIDD8SHigh-intensity discharge headlamps.

60H8Front fog lamp.

LEDLEDSide direction indicator.

LEDLEDBrake and rear lamp.

LEDLEDCentral high mounted brake lamp.

LEDLEDRear direction indicator.

16W16WRear fog lamp.

16W16WReversing lamps.

LEDLEDLicense plate lamp.Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.

Interior Lamps

Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp

5W5WGlove compartment lamp.

5W5WInterior lamp.

3T10Vanity mirror lamp.

5W5WLuggage compartment lamp.

168


Maintenance

CLEANING THE EXTERIORNote: If you use a car wash with a waxingcycle, make sure that you remove the waxfrom the windshield and the wiper blades.Note: Prior to using a car wash facilitycheck the suitability of it for your vehicle.Note: Some car washes use water at highpressure. Due to this, water droplets mayenter inside your vehicle and could alsodamage certain parts of your vehicle.Note: Remove the aerial before using anautomatic car wash.Note: Switch the heater blower off toprevent contamination of the fresh air filter.We recommend that you wash your vehiclewith a sponge and lukewarm watercontaining a car shampoo.

Cleaning the HeadlampsNote: Do not scrape the headlamp lensesor use abrasives, alcoholic solvents orchemical solvents to clean them.Note: Do not wipe the headlamps whenthey are dry.

Cleaning the Rear WindowNote: Do not scrape the inside of the rearwindow or use abrasives or chemicalsolvents to clean it.Use a clean, lint free cloth or a dampchamois leather to clean the inside of therear window.

Cleaning the Chrome TrimNote: Do not use abrasives or chemicalsolvents. Use soapy water.Note: Do not apply cleaning product to hotsurfaces and do not leave cleaning producton chrome surfaces for a period of timeexceeding that which is recommended.

Note: Industrial-strength (heavy-duty)cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, may causedamage over a period of time.

Body Paintwork PreservationWARNINGS

Do not polish your vehicle in strongsunshine.Do not allow polish to touch plasticsurfaces. It could be difficult toremove.Do not apply polish to the windshieldor rear window. This could cause thewipers to become noisy and they

may not clear the window properly.

We recommend that you wax thepaintwork once or twice a year.

CLEANING THE INTERIORNote: Do not allow air fresheners and handsanitizers to spill on interior surfaces. If aspill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damagemay not be covered by your warranty.

SeatbeltsNote: Do not use abrasives, or chemicalsolvents to clean them.Note: Do not allow moisture to penetratethe seatbelt retractor mechanism.Note: Cleaning may safely be carried outusing mild soap and water. Let them drynaturally, away from artificial heat.

Instrument Cluster Screens, LCDScreens and Radio ScreensNote: Do not use abrasives, alcoholicsolvents or chemical solvents to clean theinstrument cluster screens, LCD screens orradio screens. These cleaning products candamage the screens.

169


Vehicle Care

Clean the instrument panel and clusterlens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to drythese areas.

Rear WindowsNote: Do not use any abrasive materials toclean the interior of the rear windows.Note: Do not install stickers or labels to theinterior of the rear windows.

REPAIRING MINOR PAINTDAMAGEYou should repair paintwork damagecaused by stones from the road or minorscratches as soon as possible. A choice ofproducts are available from an authorizeddealer.Remove particles such as bird droppings,tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, roadsalt and industrial fallout before repairingpaint chips.Always read and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions before using the products.

CLEANING THE ALLOYWHEELSNote: Do not apply a cleaning chemical towarm or hot wheel rims and covers.Note: Industrial-strength (heavy-duty)cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, incombination with brush agitation to removebrake dust and dirt, could wear away theclear coat finish over a period of time.Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-basedor high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steelwool, fuels or strong household detergent.

Note: If you intend parking your vehicle foran extended period after cleaning thewheels with a wheel cleaner, drive yourvehicle for a few minutes before doing so.This will reduce the risk of increasedcorrosion of the brake discs, brake pads andlinings.Note: Some automatic car washes maycause damage to the finish on your wheelrims and covers.Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coatedwith a clear coat paint finish. To maintaintheir condition we recommend that you:• Clean them weekly with the

recommended wheel and tire cleaner.• Use a sponge to remove heavy

deposits of dirt and brake dustaccumulation.

• Rinse them thoroughly with apressurized stream of water when youhave completed the cleaning process.

We recommend that you use Ford servicewheel cleaner. Make sure that you readand follow the manufacturer’s instructions.Using other non-recommended cleaningproducts can result in severe andpermanent cosmetic damage.

170


Vehicle Care

GENERAL INFORMATIONA decal with tire pressure data is locatedin the driver’s door opening.Check and set the tire pressure at theambient temperature in which you areintending to drive your vehicle and whenthe tires are cold.Note: Check your tire pressures regularly tooptimize fuel economy.Note: Use only approved wheel and tiresizes. Using other sizes could damage yourvehicle and will make the National TypeApproval invalid.Note: If you change the diameter of the tiresfrom that fitted at the factory, thespeedometer may not display the correctspeed. Take your vehicle to an authorizeddealer to have the engine managementsystem reprogrammed.

TEMPORARY MOBILITY KITNote: The temporary mobility kit containsenough sealant compound in the canisterfor one tire repair only. See an authorizedFord dealer for replacement sealantcanisters.The kit is located under the load floor inthe trunk. The kit consists of an aircompressor to re-inflate the tire and acanister of sealing compound that willeffectively seal most punctures caused bynails or similar objects. This kit provides atemporary tire repair, allowing you to driveyour vehicle up to 200 km (120 mi) at amaximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) toreach a tire service location.

E175977

Air compressor (inside).ASelector switch.BOn and off button.CAir pressure gauge.DSealant bottle and canister.EDual purpose hose: air andrepair.

F

Tire valve connector.GAccessory power plug.HCasing/housing.IBike/raft/sports ball adapters.J

171


Wheels and Tires

General InformationWARNING

Failure to follow these guidelinescould result in an increased risk ofloss of vehicle control, injury or death.

Note: Do not use the kit if you have severelydamaged a tire. Only seal punctures locatedwithin the tire tread with the kit.Do not attempt to repair punctures largerthan ¼ inch (6 millimeters) or damage tothe tire's sidewall. The tire may notcompletely seal.Loss of air pressure may adversely affecttire performance. For this reason:Note: Do not drive the vehicle above80 km/h (50 mph).Note: Do not drive further than 200 km(120 mi). Drive only to the closest authorizedFord dealer or tire repair shop to have yourtire inspected.• Drive carefully and avoid abrupt

steering maneuvers.• Periodically monitor tire inflation

pressure in the affected tire; if the tireis losing pressure, have the vehicletowed.

• Read the information in the Tips forUse of the Kit section to make sure safeoperation of the kit and your vehicle.

Tips for Use of the KitTo ensure safe operation of the kit:• Read all instructions and cautions fully.• Before operating the kit, make sure

your vehicle is safely off the road andaway from moving traffic. Switch onthe hazard lights.

• Always set the parking brake to ensurethe vehicle does not moveunexpectedly.

• Do not remove any foreign objects,such as nails or screws, from the tire.

• When using the kit, leave the enginerunning (only if the vehicle is outdoorsor in a well-ventilated area) so thecompressor does not drain thevehicle's battery.

• Do not allow the compressor tooperate continuously for more than 15minutes. This will help prevent thecompressor from overheating.

• Never leave the kit unattended duringoperation.

• Sealant compound contains latex.Those with latex sensitivities shoulduse appropriate precautions to avoidan allergic reaction.

• Keep the kit away from children.• Only use the kit when the ambient

temperature is between -30°C (-22°F)and 70°C (158°F).

• Only use the sealing compound beforethe use-by date. The use-by date is ona label on the sealant canister, whichyou can see through the rectangularviewing window on the bottom of thecompressor. Check the use-by dateregularly and replace the canister afterfour years of non-use.

• Do not store the kit unsecured insidethe passenger compartment of thevehicle as it may cause injury during asudden stop or crash. Always store thekit in its original location.

• After sealant use, an authorized Forddealer must replace the tire pressuremonitoring system sensor and valvestem on the wheel.

• Operating the kit could cause anelectrical disturbance in radio, CD andDVD player operation.

172


Wheels and Tires

E175978

* When inflation only is requiredfor a tire or other objects, theselector must be in the Air

position.

What to do When a Tire IsPuncturedYou can repair a tire puncture within thetire's tread area in two stages with the kit.• In the first stage, inflate the tire with a

sealing compound and air. After youinflate the tire, you will need to drivethe vehicle a short distance (about 4miles [6 kilometers]) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

• In the second stage, check the tirepressure and adjust, if necessary, to thevehicle's specified tire inflationpressure.

First Stage: Inflating the Tire withSealing Compound and Air

WARNINGSDo not stand directly over the kitwhile inflating the tire. If you noticeany unusual bulges or deformations

in the tire's sidewall during inflation, stopand call roadside assistance.

If the tire does not inflate to therecommended tire pressure within15 minutes, stop and call roadside

assistance.Do not run the engine during kitoperation unless the vehicle isoutdoors or in a well-ventilated area.

Preparation: Park the vehicle in a safe, leveland secure area, away from moving traffic.Switch the hazard lights on. Apply theparking brake and switch the engine off.Inspect the flat tire for visible damage.

Sealant compound contains latex. Useappropriate precautions to avoid anyallergic reactions.Do not remove any foreign object that haspierced the tire. If a puncture is located inthe tire sidewall, stop and call roadsideassistance.1. Remove the valve cap from the tire

valve.2. Unwrap the dual purpose hose (black

tube) from the back of the compressorhousing.

3. Fasten the hose to the tire valve byturning the connector clockwise.Tighten the connection securely.

E200523

4. Plug the power cable into the 12-voltpower point in the vehicle.

5. Remove the warning sticker found onthe casing/housing and place it on thetop of the instrument panel or thecenter of the dash.

6. Start the vehicle and leave the enginerunning so the compressor does notdrain the vehicle’s battery.

173


Wheels and Tires

E175981

7. Turn dial (A) clockwise to the sealantposition. Switch the kit on by pressingthe on/off button (B).

8. Inflate the tire to the pressure listed onthe tire label located on the driver'sdoor or the door jamb area. The initialair pressure gauge reading may indicatea value higher than the label pressurewhile you pump the sealing compoundinto the tire. This is normal and shouldbe no reason for concern. The pressuregauge reading will indicate the tireinflation pressure after about 30seconds of operation. You shouldcheck the final tire pressure with thecompressor turned OFF in order to getan accurate pressure reading.

E175982

9. When the tire reaches therecommended tire pressure, switch offthe kit, unplug the power cable, anddisconnect the hose from the tire valve.Re-install the valve cap on the tirevalve and return the kit to the stowagearea.

10. Immediately and cautiously, drive thevehicle 4 miles (6 kilometers) todistribute the sealant evenly insidethe tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80km/h).

11. After 4 miles (6 kilometers), stop andcheck the tire pressure. See SecondStage: Checking Tire Pressure.

174


Wheels and Tires

Note: If you experience any unusualvibration, ride disturbance or noise whiledriving, reduce your speed until you cansafely pull off to the side of the road to callfor roadside assistance. Note: Do notproceed to the second stage of thisoperation.

Second Stage: Checking TirePressure

WARNINGSIf you are proceeding from the FirstStage: Re-inflating the Tire withSealing Compound and Air section

and have injected sealant in the tire andthe pressure is below 1.4 bar (20 psi),continue to the next step.

The power plug may get hot after useand should be handled carefullywhile unplugging.

Check the air pressure of your tires asfollows:

E175983

1. Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve.

2. Firmly screw the air compressor hoseonto the valve stem by turningclockwise.

3. Push and turn the dial clockwise to theair position.

4. If required, switch on the compressorand adjust the tire to therecommended inflation pressureshown on the tire label located on thedriver's door or door jamb area. Youshould check the tire pressure with thecompressor turned OFF in order to getan accurate pressure reading.

5. Unplug the hoses, re-install the valvecap on the tire and return the kit to thestowage area.

What to Do After the Tire has BeenSealedAfter using the kit to seal your tire, you willneed to replace the sealant canister. Youcan obtain sealant canisters and spareparts at an authorized Ford dealer. You candispose of empty sealant canisters athome. However, you should dispose ofcanisters still containing liquid sealantthrough your local authorized Ford dealeror tire dealer, or in accordance with localwaste disposal regulation.Note: After you use the sealing compound,the maximum vehicle speed is 80 km/h(50 mph) and the maximum drivingdistance is 200 km (120 mi). You shouldinspect the sealed tire immediately.You can check the tire pressure any timewithin the 200 km (120 mi) by performingthe steps listed previously in the SecondStage: Checking Tire Pressure procedure.

175


Wheels and Tires

Removal of the sealant canister fromthe kit

E175984

1. Unwrap the dual purpose hose (blacktube) from the compressor housing.

E175985

2. Unwrap the power cord.

E175986

3. Remove the back cover.

E175987

4. Rotate the sealant canister up 90degrees and pull away fromcasing/housing to remove.

Installation of the sealant canister tothe kit1. With the canister held perpendicular

to the housing, insert the canisternozzle into the connector and pushuntil seated.

2. Rotate the canister 90 degrees downinto the housing/casing.

E175988

3. Snap the back cover back into place.

176


Wheels and Tires

E175989

4. Wrap the dual purpose hose (blacktube) around the channel on thebottom of the housing/casing.

E175990

5. Wrap the power cord around thehousing and stow the accessory powerplug into its storage area.

Note: If you experience any difficulties withthe removal or installation of the sealantcanister, consult an authorized Ford dealerfor assistance.Make sure you check the sealantcompound’s use-by date regularly. Theuse-by date is on a label located on thesealant canister, which you can seethrough the rectangular viewing windowon the bottom of the kit. You shouldreplace the sealant canister after fouryears of non-use.

TIRE CARENote: If your tires show uneven wear askan authorized dealer to check for and correctany wheel misalignment, tire imbalance ormechanical problem involved before tirerotation.Note: Your vehicle may be equipped witha dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly.A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assemblyis defined as a spare wheel and tireassembly that is different in brand, size orappearance from the road tires and wheels.If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tireassembly it is intended for temporary useonly and should not be used in a tirerotation.Note: After having your tires rotated,inflation pressure must be checked andadjusted to the vehicle requirements.Rotating your tires at the recommendedinterval (as indicated in the ScheduledMaintenance chapter) will help your tireswear more evenly, providing better tireperformance and longer tire life.Rear-wheel drives vehicles (front tires atleft of diagram).Non-directional tires

E142548

Directional tires

177


Wheels and Tires

E70415

Sometimes irregular tire wear can becorrected by rotating the tires.

USING SUMMER TIRESSummer tires provide superiorperformance on wet and dry roads.Summer tires do not have the Mud andSnow (M+S or M/S) tire traction rating onthe tire side wall. Since summer tires donot have the same traction performanceas All-season or Snow tires, we do notrecommend using summer tires whentemperatures drop to about 7°C (45°F) orbelow (depending on tire wear andenvironmental conditions) or in snow andice conditions. Like any tire, summer tireperformance is affected by tire wear andenvironmental conditions. If you must drivein those conditions, we recommend usingMud and Snow (M+S, M/S), All-season orSnow tires.Always store your summer tires indoors attemperatures above -7°C (19°F). Therubber compounds used in these tires loseflexibility and may develop surface cracksin the tread area at temperatures below-7°C (19°F). If the tires have beensubjected to -7°C (19°F) or less, warmthem in a heated space to at least 5°C(41°F) for at least 24 hours beforeinstalling them on a vehicle, or moving thevehicle with the tires installed, or checking

tire inflation. Do not place tires nearheaters or heating devices used to warmthe room where the tires are stored. Do notapply heat or blow heated air directly onthe tires. Always inspect the tires afterstorage periods and before use.

USING WINTER TIRESIf winter tires are used you must inflatethem to the same tire pressures as thoselisted in the tire pressure table. SeeTechnical Specifications (page 189).

USING SNOW CHAINS

WARNINGSDriving too fast for conditions createsthe possibility of loss of vehiclecontrol. Driving at very high speeds

for extended periods of time may result indamage to vehicle components.c

Snow tires must be the same size,load index, speed rating as thoseoriginally provided by Ford. Use of

any tire or wheel not recommended byFord can affect the safety andperformance of your vehicle, which couldresult in an increased risk of loss of vehiclecontrol, vehicle rollover, personal injury anddeath. Additionally, the use ofnon-recommended tires and wheels couldcause steering, suspension, axle, transfercase or power transfer unit failure.

The tires on your vehicle may haveall-weather treads to provide traction inrain and snow. However, in some climates,you may need to use snow tires and chains.Use chains on the tires only in anemergency or if the law requires them.Note: The suspension insulation andbumpers will help prevent vehicle damage.Do not remove these components from yourvehicle when using snow tires and chains.

178


Wheels and Tires

Follow these guidelines when using snowtires and chains:• If possible, avoid fully loading your

vehicle• Chains may damage aluminum wheels.• Use ultra low profile cables, 10 mm or

less in dimension as measured on thesidewall of your tire, with 255/40R19on the rear axle only.

• Do not use snow chains or cables with275/40R19 tires.

• Not all S-class snow chains or cablesmeet these restrictions. Chains of thissize restriction will include a tensioningdevice.

• Purchase chains or cables from amanufacturer that clearly labels bodyto tire dimension restrictions. The snowchains or cables must be mounted inpairs on the front or the rear tires only.

• Do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h) ifrecommended by the chainmanufacturer while using snow chains.

• Install cables securely, verifying thatthe cables do not touch any wiring,brake lines or fuel lines.

• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cablesrub or bang against the vehicle, stopand retighten them. If this does notwork, remove the cables to preventvehicle damage.

• Remove the tire chains when they areno longer needed. Do not use tirechains on dry roads.

If you have any questions regarding snowchains or cables, please contact yourauthorized dealer.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM

WARNINGThe tire pressure monitoring systemis not a substitute for manuallychecking tire pressures. You should

periodically check tire pressures using apressure gauge. Failure to correctlymaintain tire pressures could increase therisk of tire failure, loss of control, vehiclerollover and personal injury.

You must check the tirepressures (including the sparetire where applicable) every two

weeks when the tires are cold.

You must inflate the tires to the correctpressure.See Wheels and Tires (page 171). The tirepressures are also on the tire inflationpressure label (located on the edge ofdriver door or the B-Pillar).As a driver assistance feature, your vehiclehas a tire pressure monitoring system. Awarning lamp will illuminate when one ormore of the tires are significantlyunder-inflated. If the low tire pressurewarning lamp illuminates, you should stopyour vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so,check the tires and inflate them to thecorrect pressure.Driving on under-inflated tires can:• Cause them to overheat.• Lead to tire failure.• Reduce fuel efficiency.• Reduce tire life.• Affect vehicle handling or stopping

ability.The system is not a substitute for correcttire maintenance.

179


Wheels and Tires

You must maintain the correct tirepressures, even if low tire pressure has notilluminated the warning lamp.

To check the tire pressures through theinformation display, scroll to:

Action and Descrip-tion

Message

Press the OKbutton.

Driver assist

Press the OKbutton.

Tyre pressuremonitor

The tyre pressuregraphic displays.

The tire pressure monitoring system has asystem malfunction indicator to warn youwhen the system is not operating correctly.The malfunction indicator and low tirepressure warning lamp have a combinedfunction. When the system detects amalfunction, the warning lamp will flashfor approximately one minute and thenremain illuminated. This sequence willoccur every time you switch the ignition onwhile the malfunction remains. The systemhas detected a fault that requires service.When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be ableto detect or signal low tire pressures. Amalfunction may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation of areplacement tire or wheel that preventsthe system from functioning correctly.Always check the tire pressure monitoringsystem malfunction warning afterreplacing one or more tires or wheels onyour vehicle. Make sure the replacementtires or wheels allow the system tocontinue to function correctly. See Whenthe Temporary Spare Tire is Installedin this section.

How Temperature Affects the TirePressuresUnder normal driving conditions tirepressures may increase by up to 0.3 bar(4 psi) from a cold start situation.If the vehicle is stationary overnight andthe temperature significantly lower thanthe daytime temperature, tire pressuresmay decrease by up to 0.2 bar (3 psi) whenthere is a drop in the ambient temperatureof 31°F (17°C) or more. The system detectsthis pressure decrease as beingsignificantly below the correct inflationpressure and the warning lamp illuminates.

Changing Tires With a TirePressure Monitoring System

E142549

You should always have tires serviced byan authorized dealer.Note: Each road wheel and tire is fitted witha tire pressure sensor located inside thewheel and tire assembly cavity. The pressuresensor attaches to the valve stem. The tirecovers the pressure sensor and it is notvisible unless the tire is removed. Take carewhen changing the tire to avoid damagingthe sensor.

180


Wheels and Tires

Understanding the Tire PressureMonitoring SystemThe system measures the pressure in thefour road tires and sends the tire pressurereadings to your vehicle.The system detects this lower pressure asbeing significantly below the correctinflation pressure and the warning lampilluminates. You must inflate the tires tothe correct pressure.

When the Temporary Spare Tire isInstalledIf you need to replace a road wheel andtire with the temporary spare wheel, thesystem will continue to identify a defect.This is to remind you to repair the damagedroad wheel and tire and refit the repairedroad wheel and tire assembly to yourvehicle. To restore the correct operationof the system, you must have the repairedroad wheel and tire assembly refitted toyour vehicle.

When You Believe the System is NotOperating CorrectlyThe main function of the system is to warnyou when the tire pressures are low. It canalso warn you in the event the system isno longer capable of operating correctly.See the following chart for informationconcerning the system:

When Inflating the TiresWhen inflating the tires the system maynot respond immediately to the air addedto the tires.

181


Wheels and Tires

System Warning Lamps

ActionDescriptionWarning lamp

1. Make sure tires are at the correctpressure. See Wheels and Tires(page 171). The tire pressures are alsoon the tire inflation pressure label(located on the edge of driver dooror the B-Pillar).

2. After inflating the tires to the correctpressure you must carry out the tirepressure monitoring system resetprocedure. See Tire PressureMonitoring System ResetProcedure in this chapter.

Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning lamp

Repair the damaged road wheel and tireand refit the repaired road wheel and tireassembly to your vehicle to restore thecorrect operation of the system.

Spare tire in use

If the tires are correctly inflated and thespare tire is not in use but the lightremains on, the system has detected afault that requires service.

Tire pressure monitoringsystem malfunction

Repair the damaged road wheel and tireand refit the repaired road wheel and tireassembly to your vehicle to restore thecorrect operation of the system.

Spare tire in useSolid warning lampinitially followed bya flashing warninglamp

If the tires are correctly inflated and thespare tire is not in use but the lightremains on, the system has detected afault that requires service.

Tire pressure monitoringsystem malfunction

If the Warning Lamp is On:1. Check each tire to verify that none are

flat.2. If one or more tires are flat, repair as

necessary.3. Check the tire pressures and inflate all

the tires to the correct pressure.4. Carry out the tire pressure monitoring

system reset procedure.

Tire Pressure Monitoring SystemReset ProcedureOverviewTo maintain your vehicle load carryingcapability, your vehicle requires differenttire pressures in the front tires comparedto the rear tires.

182


Wheels and Tires

The system illuminates the warning lampat different pressures for the front and reartires.The tires need to be periodically rotatedto provide consistent performance andmaximum tire life, the system needs toknow when the tires have been rotated todetermine which set of tires are on thefront and rear axles. With this information,the system can detect and correctly warnof low tire pressures.

Carrying Out the System ResetProcedure1. Switch the ignition on.2. Using the information display control,

navigate to tire pressure reset. SeeInformation Displays (page 67).

3. Press and hold the OK button untilconfirmation appears.

To reset the tire pressure monitoring system, scroll to:

Description and ActionMessage


Press the OK button.Driver assist

Press and hold the OK button until confirmation appears.Alternatively, if your vehicle has a tire pressure monitoringsystem reset button, press and hold the button untilconfirmation appears.

Tyre monitor

CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL

WARNINGSThe use of tire sealant may damageyour tire pressure monitoring systemand should only be used in roadside

emergencies. If you must use a sealant, theFord Tire Mobility Kit sealant should beused. The tire pressure monitoring systemsensor and valve stem on the wheel mustbe replaced by an authorized dealer afteruse of the sealant.

See Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (page 179). If the tirepressure monitor sensor becomes

damaged, it will no longer function.

Note: The tire pressure monitoring systemindicator light will illuminate when the sparetire is in use. To restore the full function ofthe monitoring system, all road wheelsequipped with tire pressure monitoringsensors must be mounted on the vehicle.If you get a flat tire while driving, do notapply the brake heavily. Instead, graduallydecrease your speed. Hold the steeringwheel firmly and slowly move to a safeplace on the side of the road.Have a flat serviced by an authorizeddealer in order to prevent damage to thetire pressure monitoring system sensors.See Tire Pressure Monitoring System(page 179). Replace the spare tire with aroad tire as soon as possible. Duringrepairing or replacing of the flat tire, havethe authorized dealer inspect the tirepressure monitoring system sensor fordamage.

183


Wheels and Tires

Dissimilar Spare Wheel and TireAssembly Information

WARNINGFailure to follow these guidelinescould result in an increased risk ofloss of vehicle control, injury or death.

If you have a dissimilar spare wheel andtire, then it is intended for temporary useonly. This means that if you need to use it,you should replace it as soon as possiblewith a road wheel and tire assembly thatis the same size and type as the road tiresand wheels that were originally providedby Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheelis damaged, it should be replaced ratherthan repaired.A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assemblyis defined as a spare wheel and tireassembly that is different in brand, size orappearance from the road tires and wheelsand can be one of three types:1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tirebegins with the letter T for tire size andmay have Temporary Use Only molded inthe sidewall.2. Full-size dissimilar spare with labelon wheel: This spare tire has a label onthe wheel that states: THIS WHEEL ANDTIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USEONLY.When driving with one of the dissimilarspare tires listed above, do not:• Exceed 80 km/h (50 mph).• Load the vehicle beyond maximum

vehicle load rating listed on the SafetyCompliance Label.

• Use snow chains on the end of thevehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.

• Use more than one dissimilar spare tireat a time.

• Use commercial car washingequipment.

• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.Use of one of the dissimilar spare tireslisted above at any one wheel location canlead to impairment of the following:• Handling, stability and braking

performance.• Comfort and noise.• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.• Winter weather driving capability.• Wet weather driving capability.• All-wheel driving capability.3. Full-size dissimilar spare withoutlabel on wheelWhen driving with the full-size dissimilarspare wheel and tire assembly, do not:• Exceed 113 km/h (70 mph).• Use more than one dissimilar spare

wheel and tire assembly at a time.• Use commercial car washing

equipment.• Use snow chains on the end of the

vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheeland tire assembly.

The usage of a full-size dissimilar sparewheel and tire assembly can lead toimpairment of the following:• Handling, stability and braking

performance.• Comfort and noise.• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.• Winter weather driving capability.• Wet weather driving capability.• All-wheel driving capability.When driving with the full-size dissimilarspare wheel and tire assembly additionalcaution should be given to:• Driving vehicles with a load on the

cargo rack.

184


Wheels and Tires

Drive cautiously when using a full-sizedissimilar spare wheel and tire assemblyand seek service as soon as possible.

Tire Change ProcedureWARNINGS

When one of the front wheels is offthe ground, the transmission alonewill not prevent your vehicle from

moving or slipping off the jack, even if thetransmission is in park (P) or reverse (R)for manual transmissions.

To help prevent your vehicle frommoving when you change a tire, besure to place the transmission in park

(P) or reverse (R) for manualtransmissions, set the parking brake andblock (in both directions) the wheel thatis diagonally opposite (other side and endof the vehicle) to the tire being changed.

Never get underneath a vehicle thatis supported only by a jack. If yourvehicle slips off the jack, you or

someone else could be seriously injured.Do not attempt to change a tire onthe side of the vehicle close tomoving traffic. Pull far enough off the

road to avoid the danger of being hit whenoperating the jack or changing the wheel.

Always use the jack provided asoriginal equipment with your vehicle.If using a jack other than the one

provided as original equipment with yourvehicle, make sure the jack capacity isadequate for the vehicle weight, includingany vehicle cargo or modifications.

WARNINGSCheck that the vehicle jack is notdamaged or deformed and thethread is lubricated and clean.Passengers should not remain in yourvehicle when the vehicle is beingjacked.

1. Park on a surface, set the parking brakeand activate the hazard flashers.

2. Place the transmission in park (P) andturn the engine off. For vehicles with amanual transmission, place thetransmission in reverse (R) after theengine is turned off.

E175447

3. Block both the front and rear of thewheel diagonally opposite the flat tire.For example, if the left front tire is flat,block the right rear wheel.

185


Wheels and Tires

E174938

4. Remove the lug wrench, spare tire andjack.

5. Remove the center ornament from thewheel if required to access the lug nuts.

E175694

6. To remove the wrench from the jack,turn the hex nut on the jackcounterclockwise. This will lower thejack and loosen the mechanical lock.

7. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-halfturn counterclockwise but do notremove them until the wheel is raisedoff the ground.

186


Wheels and Tires

E176084

Note: Jack at the specified locations toavoid damage to the vehicle.8. The vehicle jacking points are shown

here, and can be identified by thetriangle markings on the vehicle. Detailsare depicted on the warning label onthe jack.

E174939

9. Place the jack at the jacking point nextto the tire you are changing. Turn thejack handle clockwise until the wheelis completely off the ground.

10. Remove the lug nuts with the lugwrench.

11. Replace the flat tire with the sparetire, making sure the valve stem isfacing outward. Reinstall lug nutsuntil the wheel is snug against thehub. Do not fully tighten the lug nutsuntil the wheel has been lowered. Ifyou are using the temporary tire, thelug nut washers will not appear to beflush with the rim. This is normal onlywhen using the temporary spare tire.

12. Lower the wheel by turning the jackhandle counterclockwise.

1

2

3 4

5

E75442

13. Remove the jack and fully tighten thelug nuts in the order shown. SeeTechnical Specifications (page189).

14. To store the folded wrench on thejack, engage the bracket of the jackbase on the wrench feature as shown.Swing the wrench upwards andadjust the height of the jack until thepin engages the hole. Tighten the hexnut clockwise by hand until secure.

187


Wheels and Tires

E176165

15. Put the flat tire, wheel ornament, jackand lug wrench away. Make sure thejack is fastened so it does not rattlewhen you drive.

16. Unblock the wheel.

DRIVING AT HIGH SPEEDTire pressure - Speeds greater than 100mph (160 km/h)

WARNINGTo reduce the risk of potential tirefailure that could lead to seriousinjury or death, increase the front and

rear tire placard pressures by the amountshown on the warning label, located oneither the driver side B-pillar or door, whendriving over 160 km/h (100 mph). Onlytravel at speeds over 160 km/h (100 mph)where it is legal and conditions allow. Thetire placard pressure can be found on thetire placard located on either the driver sideB-pillar or door of your vehicle.

E176077

Warning: Failure to follow theseinstructions can result in a lossof vehicle stability due to tire

failure that could lead to serious injury ordeath. If you are not sure about the propertire inflation pressures, contact anauthorized dealer or service center.

E184089

Your tires may require additional inflationpressure for operation at speeds greaterthan 160 km/h (100 mph). If this label ispresent on your vehicle, you must adjustthe tire pressure accordingly.

188


Wheels and Tires

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSWheel Nut Torque

Ib-ft (Nm)Wheel type

204 Nm (150 lb.ft)All

Tire Pressures (Cold Tires)Spare Tire

Full loadNormal load

Tire sizeVariant RearFrontRearFront

kPakPakPakPa

420 kPa(60 psi)

420 kPa(60 psi)

420 kPa(60 psi)

420 kPa(60 psi)155/60R18

Temporary sparewheel when itdiffers from theother fitted wheels

Up to 100 mph (160 km/h)



kPakPakPakPa

220 kPa(32 psi)

220 kPa(32 psi)

220 kPa(32 psi)

220 kPa(32 psi)255/40ZR19*2.3L

EcoBoost

-220 kPa(32 psi)-220 kPa

(32 psi)255/40ZR195.0L

220 kPa(32 psi)-220 kPa

(32 psi)-275/40ZR19

*Only fit snow chains to specified tires.

189


Wheels and Tires

Continuous Speed in Excess of 100 mph (160 km/h)



kPakPakPakPa

220 kPa(32 psi)

220 kPa(32 psi)

220 kPa(32 psi)

220 kPa(32 psi)255/40ZR192.3L

EcoBoost

-220 kPa(32 psi)-220 kPa

(32 psi)255/40ZR195.0L

220 kPa(32 psi)-220 kPa

(32 psi)-275/40ZR19

The tire wheel assembly has already been balanced atthe vehicle assembly plant. There are many factors duringthe vehicle usage that may lead to a tire wheel imbalance.These factors may cause vehicle vibration and increasedsteering, suspension and tire wear. In this case, the wheel

and tire assembly may need to be re-balanced. Themaximum dynamic static imbalance per wheel balanceplane needs to be less than 7g. The tire wheel assemblyalso needs to be re-balanced after changing the wheel

and the tire. Please contact an authorized dealer forservice.

Technical Specifications

190


Wheels and Tires

VEHICLE DIMENSIONS - COUPE

mm (in)Dimension Description

4,784 mm (188.3 in)Maximum length.

2,080 mm (81.9 in)Overall width including exterior mirrors.

1,381 mm (54.4 in)Overall height - EC curb weight.

2,720 mm (107.1 in)Wheelbase.

1,582 mm (62.3 in)Front track.

1,655 mm (65.2 in)Rear track.

191


Capacities and Specifications

VEHICLE DIMENSIONS - CONVERTIBLE

mm (in)Dimension Description

4,784 mm (188.3 in)Maximum length.

2,080 mm (81.9 in)Overall width including exterior mirrors.

1,394 mm (54.9 in)Overall height - EC curb weight.

2,720 mm (107.1 in)Wheelbase.

1,582 mm (62.3 in)Front track.

1,655 mm (65.2 in)Rear track.

192



VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE

E218575

Type Approval NumberAVehicle Identification NumberBMaximum Permissible Laden Weight of the Vehicle (GVWR)CMaximum Permissible Weight of Combination (GCWR)DMaximum Permissible Front Axle Weight (Front GAWR)EMaximum Permissible Rear Axle Weight (Rear GAWR)FDrive SideG1Engine CodeG2Transmission CodeG3Axle CodeG4Exterior TrimG5Exterior PaintG6EmissionG7VersionG8VariantG9Type HomologationG10

The vehicle identification plate is withinthe passenger side door opening.Note: The vehicle identification plate mayvary to that shown.

Note: Information on the vehicleidentification plate is dependent uponmarket requirements.

193



VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBERYou can find the vehicle identificationnumber at the following locations.

E213408

The vehicle identification Number isstamped into the floor panel on theright-hand side, under the front seat. It isalso shown on the right-hand side of theinstrument panel and on the vehicleidentification plate.

CAPACITIES ANDSPECIFICATIONS - 2.3LECOBOOST™

WARNINGThe air conditioning refrigerantsystem contains refrigerant underhigh pressure. Only qualified

personnel should service the airconditioning refrigerant system. Openingthe air conditioning refrigerant system cancause personal injury.

Capacities

CapacityItem

5.4 L (1.2 gal)Engine oil fill capacity including the oil filter.

5.2 L (1.1 gal)Engine oil fill capacity excluding the oil filter.

9 L (2.0 gal)Engine coolant fill capacity.

11 L (2.4 gal)Automatic transmission fluid fill capacity.

2.6 L (0.6 gal)Manual transmission fluid fill capacity.

1.5 L (1.6 qt)Rear axle fluid

97 ml (3.28 fl oz)Rear axle friction modifier

58.8 L (12.9 gal)Fuel tank fill capacity.

2.5 L (0.5 gal)Windshield and headlamp washer system fill capacity.

194



Adding Engine Oil

Quantity

0.8 L (0.2 gal)

The quantity of engine oil required to raisethe indicated level on the dipstick fromminimum to maximum.

Specifications

MaterialsSpecificationNameWSS-M2C913-DEngine Oil - 5W-30WSS-M97B44-D2Antifreeze Super Plus Premium Ready Mix

2U2J-19544-xxxxWSS-M6C65-A2Brake Fluid DOT 4 LV High Performance

BU7J-M6C65-xxxxMERCON® LVAutomatic Transmission Oil C-ML5WSS-M2C938-A7U7J-M2C938-ABWSS-M2C200-D2Transmission Oil - 75W FE

7U7J-M2C200-BA/CAWSS-M2C942-ARear Axle Oil SAE 75W-85

EU7J-M2C942-AAEST-M2C118-AFriction ModifierWSS-M14P19-AScreen Wash

2U7J-M8B16-AA/CA/DA, 3U7J-19523-GA,FU7J-19C544-AA/BA/DA/EA/GA/HAOnly use fluid that meets Fordspecifications.If you are unable to find an engine oil thatmeets the specification defined byWSS-M2C913-D, it is acceptable to use aSAE 5W-30 engine oil that is defined byACEA A5/B5.For complete refill of limited slip Fordaxles, add 97 ml (3.28 fl oz) of AdditiveFriction Modifier XL-3 or equivalentmeeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118-A.Ford rear axles contain a syntheticlubricant that does not require changingunless you submerge the axle in water.Note: Do not use more than 1 L (0.2 gal)between scheduled service intervals.

Using oil and fluids that do not meet thedefined specification and viscosity grademay lead to:• Component damage which may not be

covered by the vehicle Warranty.• Longer engine cranking periods.• Increased emission levels.• Reduced engine performance.• Reduced fuel economy.• Degraded brake performance.

E115472

We recommend Castrol and Ford engineoils and lubricants.

195



CAPACITIES ANDSPECIFICATIONS - 5.0L

WARNINGThe air conditioning refrigerantsystem contains refrigerant underhigh pressure. Only qualified

personnel should service the airconditioning refrigerant system. Openingthe air conditioning refrigerant system cancause personal injury.

Capacities

CapacityItem

7.6 L (1.7 gal)Engine oil fill capacity including the oil filter.

7.1 L (1.6 gal)Engine oil fill capacity excluding the oil filter.

12.9 L (2.8 gal)Engine coolant fill capacity.

11.2 L (2.5 gal)Automatic transmission fluid fill capacity.

2.6 L (0.6 gal)Manual transmission fluid fill capacity.

1.5 L (1.6 qt)Rear axle fluid

97 ml (3.28 fl oz)Rear axle friction modifier

61 L (13.4 gal)Fuel tank fill capacity.

2.5 L (0.5 gal)Windshield and headlamp washer system fill capacity.

Adding Engine Oil

Quantity

1 L (0.2 gal)

The quantity of engine oil required to raisethe indicated level on the dipstick fromminimum to maximum.

Specifications

MaterialsSpecificationNameWSS-M2C948-BEngine Oil - 5W-20WSS-M97B44-D2Antifreeze Super Plus Premium Ready Mix

2U2J-19544-xxxx

196



SpecificationNameWSS-M6C65-A2Brake Fluid DOT 4 LV High Performance

BU7J-M6C65-xxxxMERCON® LVAutomatic Transmission Oil C-ML5WSS-M2C938-A7U7J-M2C938-ABWSS-M2C200-D2Transmission Oil - 75W FE

7U7J-M2C200-BA/CAWSS-M2C942-ARear Axle Oil SAE 75W-85

EU7J-M2C942-AAEST-M2C118-AFriction ModifierWSS-M14P19-AScreen Wash

2U7J-M8B16-AA/CA/DA, 3U7J-19523-GA,FU7J-19C544-AA/BA/DA/EA/GA/HAOnly use fluid that meets Fordspecifications.If you are unable to find an engine oil thatmeets the specification defined byWSS-M2C948-B, it is acceptable to use aSAE 5W-20 engine oil that is defined byACEA A5/B5.For complete refill of limited slip Fordaxles, add 97 ml (3.28 fl oz) of AdditiveFriction Modifier XL-3 or equivalentmeeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118-A.Ford rear axles contain a syntheticlubricant that does not require changingunless you submerge the axle in water.Note: Do not use more than 1 L (0.2 gal)between scheduled service intervals.

Using oil and fluids that do not meet thedefined specification and viscosity grademay lead to:• Component damage which may not be

covered by the vehicle Warranty.• Longer engine cranking periods.• Increased emission levels.• Reduced engine performance.• Reduced fuel economy.• Degraded brake performance.

E115472

We recommend Castrol and Ford engineoils and lubricants.

197



FUEL CONSUMPTION FIGURES

CO2 Emis-sionsCombinedExtra-

UrbanUrbanVariant

g/km L/100 km(mpg)

L/100 km(mpg)

L/100 km(mpg)

2259.8 (24.0)7.2 (32.7)14.3 (16.4)2.3L EcoBoost Coupe - vehicleswith automatic transmission.

1798 (29.4)6.8 (34.6)10.1 (23.3)2.3L EcoBoost Coupe - vehicleswith manual transmission.*

2259.8 (24.0)7.5 (31.4)13.8 (17.0)2.3L EcoBoost Convertible -vehicles with automatic transmis-sion.

1848.2 (28.7)6.9 (34.1)10.4 (22.6)2.3L EcoBoost Convertible -vehicles with manual transmis-sion.*

28112.02 (19.6)8.19 (28.7)18.61 (12.6)5.0L Coupe - vehicles with auto-matic transmission.

29913.46 (17.5)9.62 (24.5)20.06 (11.7)5.0L Coupe - vehicles with manualtransmission.

28912.83 (18.3)8.74 (26.9)19.9 (11.8)5.0L Convertible - vehicles withautomatic transmission.

30613.61 (17.3)9.81 (24.0)20.13 (11.7)5.0L Convertible - vehicles withmanual transmission.

*The above figures were achieved using second gear to pull away from a stationary positionwhile on level ground. On vehicles with manual transmission, we recommend you usesecond gear to pull away from a stationary position while on level ground.

198



GENERAL INFORMATIONRadio Frequencies and Reception Factors

Radio reception factors

The further you travel away from an FM station, the weakerthe signal and the weaker the reception.

Distance and Strength

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freewayoverpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage andthunderstorms can interfere with the reception.

Terrain

When you pass near a radio transmission tower, a strongersignal can override a weaker signal and can cause interfer-ence in the audio system.

Station overload

CD and CD Player InformationNote: CD units play commercially pressed4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compactdiscs only. Due to technical incompatibility,certain recordable and re-recordablecompact discs may not function correctlywhen used in Ford CD players.Note: Do not insert CDs with homemadepaper (adhesive) labels into the CD playeras the label may peel and cause the CD tobecome jammed. You should use apermanent felt tip marker rather thanadhesive labels on your homemade CDs.Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Pleasecontact an authorized dealer for furtherinformation.Note: Do not use any irregularly shapeddiscs or discs with a scratch protection filmattached.Always handle discs by their edges only.Clean the disc with an approved CDcleaner only. Wipe it from the center of thedisc toward the edge. Do not clean in acircular motion.Do not expose discs to direct sunlight orheat sources for extended periods.

MP3 and WMA Track and FolderStructureAudio systems capable of recognizing andplaying MP3 and WMA individual tracksand folder structures work as follows:• There are two different modes for MP3

and WMA disc playback: MP3 andWMA track mode (system default) andMP3 and WMA folder mode.

• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores anyfolder structure on the MP3 and WMAdisc. The player numbers each MP3and WMA track on the disc (noted bythe MP3 or WMA file extension) fromT001 to a maximum of T255. Themaximum number of playable MP3 andWMA files may be less depending onthe structure of the CD and exactmodel of radio present.

199


Audio System

• MP3 and WMA folder mode representsa folder structure consisting of onelevel of folders. The CD player numbersall MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc(noted by the MP3 or WMA fileextension) and all folders containingMP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)T001 (track) to F253 T255.

• Creating discs with only one level offolders helps with navigation throughthe disc files.

If you are burning your own MP3 and WMAdiscs, it is important to understand howthe system reads the structures you create.While various files may be present, (fileswith extensions other than MP3 andWMA), only files with the MP3 and WMAextension are played; other files areignored by the system. This enables you touse the same MP3 and WMA disc for avariety of tasks on your work computer,home computer and your in-vehiclesystem.In track mode, the system displays andplays the structure as if it were only onelevel deep (all MP3 and WMA files play,regardless of being in a specific folder). Infolder mode, the system only plays theMP3 and WMA files in the current folder.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:PREMIUM AM/FM/CD



Note: The touchscreen system controlsmost of the audio features. See your SYNCinformation.

200


Audio System

E174101

A B DC E

FG

VOL: Turn the dial to adjust the system volume.ASeek and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press thisbutton. The system stops at the first station down the band. Press and holdthe button to move quickly to the previous strong radio station or memorypreset. In CD mode, press this button to select the previous track. Press andhold the button to move quickly backward through the current track.

B

Power: Press this button to turn the system off and on.CSeek and Fast Forward: In radio mode, select a frequency band and pressthis button. The system stops at the first station up the band. Press and holdthe button to move quickly to the next strong radio station or memory preset.In CD mode, press this button to select the next track. Press and hold the buttonto move quickly forward through the current track.

D

TUNE: Once you select a frequency band, turn the dial to find the desiredstation.

E

Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.FSound: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fadeand Balance.

G

DIGITAL RADIOThe system allows you to listen to DAB(Digital Audio Broadcast) radio stations.

Note: Coverage differs from region to regionand will influence the quality of reception.It is broadcast nationwide, regionally andlocally.

201


Audio System

The following formats are supported:• DAB• DAB+• DMB-Audio (Digital Multimedia

Broadcasting).

EnsemblesEnsembles contain a group of radiostations. Each ensemble can consist ofseveral different radio stations.The radio station name displays below theensemble name.Note: When you tune from one ensembleto another, it can take a while until thesystem synchronizes to the next ensemble.The system mutes during synchronization.

Selecting Radio BandDAB 1, DAB 2 and DAB 3 operate in thesame way. You can store up to 10 differentpresets on each band.1. Press the RADIO button.2. Press the left arrow button to display

the available wavebands.3. Select DAB 1, DAB 2 or DAB 3.Note: When you reach the first or last radiostation within an ensemble, further tuningwill skip to the next ensemble. There maybe a delay during this change and the audiowill briefly mute.

Radio Station Tuning Controls

Seek Tuning (Alternative 1)Press a seek button. The system will stopat the first radio station it finds in thedirection chosen

Radio Station List (Alternative 2)This feature displays all the available radiostations in a list.1. Press the browse button.

2. Press the previous or next arrowbuttons to change ensembles.

3. Navigate through the list and select therequired station by pressing the touchscreen button for the station.

4. Press OK to confirm your selection.Note: The display will only show radiostations in the current ensemble.

Manual Tuning (Alternative 3)Press the tune plus or tune minus buttons.

Radio Station Preset ButtonsThis feature allows you to store up to 6favorite radio stations from any ensemblein each preset bank.1. Select a radio station.2. Press and hold one of the preset

buttons. A progress bar and messagewill appear. When the progress barcompletes the radio station has beenstored. The system will mutemomentarily as confirmation.

Once stored press a preset button at anytime to select a favorite radio station.Note: Radio stations stored on the presetbuttons may not always be available if youhave left the coverage area. The system willmute when this happens.

Radio TextYou can display extra information. Forexample; artist name. To switch this optionon, select the radio text on feature in theoptions menu.Note: Extra information may not always beavailable.

Service LinkingIf you leave the coverage area of a DABradio station the system will automaticallyswitch to the corresponding FM radiostation.

202


Audio System

You can switch this feature on and off.Note: If a DAB radio station has nocorresponding FM radio station, the audiowill mute when attempting to switch.Note: The system will display the FMsymbol when DAB and FM radio stationslink.

USB PORT (If Equipped)

E176344

The USB port allows you to plug in mediaplaying devices, memory sticks and chargedevices (if supported). See your SYNCinformation.

MEDIA HUB (If Equipped)

The media hub is located in the centerconsole and has the following features:

E201595

See your SYNC information.

203


Audio System

GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGDriving while distracted can result inloss of vehicle control, crash andinjury. We strongly recommend that


A B

G CDF E

E161891

MessageItem

PhoneA

NavigationB

ClimateC

SettingsD

MessageItem

HomeE

InformationF

EntertainmentG

204


SYNC™ 2

This system uses a four-corner strategy toprovide quick access to several vehiclefeatures and settings. The touchscreenprovides easy interaction with your cellularphone, multimedia, climate control andnavigation system. The corners display anyactive modes within those menus, such asphone status or the climate temperature.Note: Some features are not available whileyour vehicle is moving.Note: Your system is equipped with afeature that allows you to access andcontrol audio features for 10 minutes afteryou switch the ignition off (and no doorsopen).

PHONE

Press to select any of the following:

Message

Phone

Speed dial

Phonebook

Call history

Messaging

Settings

NAVIGATION


Message

My home

Favourites

Previous destinations

Place of interest

Emergency

Address

Message

Junction

Town centre

Latitude/Longitude

Edit route

Cancel Route

CLIMATEPress the corresponding icons to controlthe following options:• Driver Settings• Recirculated Air• Auto• Dual• Passenger Settings• A/C• Defrost

SETTINGS

E142607


Message

Clock

Display

Sound

Vehicle

Settings

Help

205


SYNC™ 2

HOME

E142613

Press to access the homescreen.

Note: Depending on your vehicle’s optionpackage and software, the screens may varyin appearance from the descriptions in thissection. The features may also be limiteddepending on the market. Check with anauthorized dealer for availability.

INFORMATION

E142608


Message

Traffic

Notific.

Calendar

Apps

Where am I?

ENTERTAINMENT


Message

AM

FM*DAB

CD

USB

BT audio

SD card* If equipped.

Using the Audio ControlsDepending on your vehicle, it may also have the following controls:

Action and DescriptionControls

Switch the media features on or off.Power

Adjust the volume of playing media.Volume

Use as you normally would in media modes.Seek

Use as you normally would in media modes.Tune

Eject a CD from the entertainment system.Eject

Press this button to switch the display screen off. Press again,or touch the screen to switch the display screen on.

Display

Touch the control repeatedly to switch between mediamodes.

Source

206


SYNC™ 2

Action and DescriptionControls

Adjust the settings for:Sound

Bass

Treble

Midrange

Set balance and fade

DSP

EQ mode

Adaptive volume

Using the Steering Wheel ControlsDepending on your vehicle and optionpackage, you can use your steering wheelcontrols to interact with the touchscreensystem.• VOL: Control the volume of audio

output.• Mute: Mute the audio output.• Voice: Press to start a voice session.

Press again and hold to end a voicesession.

• SEEK and PHONE ACCEPT:• While in radio mode, press to seek

between memory presets or pressand hold to seek between stations.

• While in USB or CD mode, press toseek between stations or press andhold to fast seek.

• While in phone mode, press toanswer a call, or to switch betweencalls.

• SEEK and PHONE REJECT:• While in radio mode, press to seek

between memory presets or pressand hold to seek between stations.

• While in USB or CD mode, press toseek between stations or press andhold to fast seek.

• While in phone mode, press to enda call, or to reject an incoming call.

• Source: Touch the control repeatedlyto switch between media modes.

• Sound: Touch the control to adjust thesound settings. See Settings (page211).

See Steering Wheel (page 49).

Cleaning the Touchscreen DisplayUse a dry, clean, soft cloth. If dirt orfingerprints are still visible, apply a smallamount of alcohol to the cloth. Do not pouror spray alcohol onto the display. Do notuse detergent or any type of solvent toclean the display.

SupportFor further support, contact an authorizeddealer. For more information, visit theregional Ford website.

207


SYNC™ 2

Safety InformationWARNING

Driving while distracted can result inloss of vehicle control, crash andinjury. We strongly recommend that


• Do not attempt to service or repair thesystem. Have an authorized dealercheck your vehicle.

• Do not operate playing devices if thepower cords or cables are broken, splitor damaged. Place cords and cablesout of the way, so they do not interferewith the operation of pedals, seats,compartments or safe driving abilities.

• Do not leave playing devices in yourvehicle during extreme conditions as itcould cause them damage. See yourdevice's user guide for furtherinformation.

• For your safety, some SYNC functionsare speed-dependent. Their use islimited to when your vehicle is travelingat speeds under 8 km/h (5 mph).

Make sure that you review your device'smanual before using it with SYNC.

Speed-restricted FeaturesSome features of this system may be toodifficult to use while your vehicle is movingso they are restricted from use unless yourvehicle is stationary.See the following chart for more specificexamples.

Restricted features

Editing settings while the rear view camera or active parkassist are active.

System Functionality

Playing video.Videos, Photos and Graphics

Composing text messages.Text Messages

Editing preset text messages.

Demo navigation route.Navigation

208


SYNC™ 2

Privacy InformationWhen a cell phone connects to SYNC, thesystem creates a profile that links to thatcell phone. The system creates the profileto offer you more mobile features and tooperate more efficiently. Among otherthings, this profile may contain data aboutyour phonebook, text messages (read andunread) and call history. This includes thehistory of calls when your cell phone wasnot connected to the system. If youconnect a media player, the systemcreates and retains an index of supportedmedia content. The system also records ashort development log of approximately10 minutes of all recent system activity.Use the log profile and other system datato improve the system and help diagnoseany problems that may occur.The cell phone profile, media player indexand development log remain in the systemunless deleted. They are generallyaccessible in your vehicle only when youconnect your cell phone or media player.If you no longer plan to use the system oryour vehicle, we recommend you completea master reset to erase all storedinformation. See Information Displays(page 67).Special equipment is required to accesssystem data. Access to your vehicle'sSYNC module is also required. We will notaccess the system data for any purposeother than as described without consent.Examples where we can access systemdata are for a court order, where requiredby law enforcement, other governmentauthorities or other third parties acting withlawful authority. Other parties may seekto access the information independentlyof us. Further privacy information isavailable.

Using Voice RecognitionThis system helps you control manyfeatures using voice commands. Thisallows you to keep your hands on thewheel and focus on what is in front of you.The system provides feedback throughaudible tones, prompts, questions andspoken confirmations depending on thesituation and the chosen level ofinteraction (voice settings).The system also asks short questions(confirmation prompts) when it is not sureof your request or when there are multiplepossible responses to your request.When using voice commands, words andicons may appear in the lower left statusbar indicating the status of the voicecommand session.

How to Use Voice Commands

E142599

The following are some of thevoice commands that you cansay at any time during a voice

command session.

Press the voice button and whenprompted say:

Voice command

Main menu

Available commands

Previous page

Back

Help

209


SYNC™ 2

Helpful Hints• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is

as quiet as possible. Wind noise fromopen windows and road vibrations mayprevent the system from correctlyrecognizing spoken voice commands.

• After pressing the voice command icon,wait until after the tone sounds and amessage appears before saying a voicecommand. Any voice command spokenprior to this does not register with thesystem.

• Speak naturally, without long pausesbetween words.

• At any time, you can interrupt thesystem while it is speaking by pressingthe voice command icon.

Accessing a List of Available VoiceCommandsTo access a list of available voicecommands you can do either of thefollowing.

Using the touchscreen, press:

Menu Item

Settings

Help

Voice command list

Using the steering wheel control, pressthe voice button and when promptedsay one of the following:

Voice Commands

List of commands

Radio list of commands

Phone list of commands

Voice instructions list of commands

Voice Command SettingsThese allow you to customize the level ofsystem interaction, help and feedback. Thesystem defaults to standard interactionthat uses candidate lists and confirmationprompts as these provide the highest levelof guidance and feedback.

Action and DescriptionMenu Item

In this mode the system providesdetailed interaction and guidance.

NoviceInteraction mode

This mode has less audible interac-tion and more tone prompts.

Advanced

The system uses these short questions to confirm your voicecommand. If turned off, the system simply makes a best guessas to what you requested. The system may still occasionally

ask you to confirm a voice command.

Confirmation prompts

Candidate lists are lists of possible results from your voicecommands. The system creates these lists when it has the

same confidence level of several options based on your voicecommand.

Phone candidate lists

Media candidate lists

210


SYNC™ 2

Using the touchscreen, press thesettings icon, then press:

Menu Item

Voice settings

Voice control

Select from the following:

Interaction mode




Voice control volume

Using Voice Commands with theTouchscreen OptionsThe voice command system has a dualmode feature which allows you to switchbetween using voice commands andmaking on-screen selections. This isavailable only when the system displays alist of candidates generated during a voicecommand session. For example, this canbe used when entering a street address ortrying to call a contact from a cell phonepaired to the system.

SETTINGS

ABCDE

F

E161968

211


SYNC™ 2

Menu ItemItem

ClockA

DisplayB

SoundC

VehicleD

SettingsE

HelpF

Clock

E142607

Under this menu, you can set theclock, access and adjust thedisplay, sound and vehicle

settings as well as access settings forspecific modes or the help feature.

To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:


Press the settings icon.Settings

Press the + or - to adjust the time.ClockFrom this screen, you can also make other adjustments suchas 12-hour or 24-hour mode, activate GPS time synchroniza-tion and have the system automatically update new timezones.You can also switch the outside air temperature display offand on. It appears at the top center of the touchscreen, nextto the time and date.

Note: You cannot manually set the date. Your vehicle’s GPS does this for you.Note: If the battery has been disconnected, your vehicle needs to acquire a GPS signal toupdate the clock. Once your vehicle acquires the signal, it may take a few minutes for theupdate to display the correct time.

Display

E142607

You can adjust the display usingthe touchscreen or the voicebutton on the steering wheel

controls.

212


SYNC™ 2




Display

Then select from the following:

Allows you to switch the display off. It also allows you to set the screento a certain brightness or have the system automatically change basedon the outside light level.

Mode

If you also select:

These features will allow you to adjust the dimming ofyour screen.

Auto

Night

Allows you to display the default photo or upload your own.Edit wallpaper

When set to On, lets you use the automatic dimming feature.Auto dimWhen set to Off you are able to adjust the brightness of the screen.

Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.Brightness

Allows you to adjust screen dimming as the outside lighting conditionschange from day to night.

Auto dimmanual offset

E142599

To make adjustments using the voicebutton, press the button and whenprompted, say:

Voice command

Display settings

Uploading Photos for Your HomeScreen WallpaperNote: You cannot load photos directly fromyour camera. You must access the photoseither from your USB mass storage deviceor from an SD card.

Note: Photographs with extremely largedimensions (such as 2048 x 1536) may notbe compatible and appear as a blank(black) image on the display.The system allows you to upload and viewup to 32 photos.

E142607

To access, press:

213


SYNC™ 2

To upload your photos, select:



Display

Follow the system prompts to upload your photographs.Edit wallpaper

Only the photograph(s), which meets thefollowing conditions display:• Compatible file formats are as follows:

JPG, GIF, PNG, BMP.• Each file must be 1.5 MB or less.• Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384.

Sound

E142607


Menu Item

Settings

Sound


Bass

Midrange

Treble


DSP occupancy

EQ mode

Adaptive volumeNote: Your vehicle may not have all of these sound settings.

Vehicle

E142607

214


SYNC™ 2


Menu Item

Settings

Vehicle


Ambient light

Camera settings

Enable Valet mode

Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)When you switch this feature on, ambientlighting illuminates footwells andcupholders with a choice of colors.




Vehicle

Ambient light

• You can then touch the desired color.• Use the scroll bar to increase or decrease the intensity.• To switch the feature on or off, press the power button.

Camera Settings

E142607

This menu allows you to accesssettings for your rear viewcamera.

215


SYNC™ 2




Vehicle

Camera settings


Enhanced Park Pilot

Rear camera delay

You can find more information on the rear view camera system in another chapter. SeeParking Aids (page 122).

Enable Valet Mode

E142607

Valet mode allows you to lockthe system. No information isaccessible until the system is

unlocked with the correct PIN.

Note: If the system locks, and you need toreset the PIN, contact an authorized dealer.




Vehicle

Then enter a four digit PIN twice, as prompted.Enable Valet mode

After you press Continue the system locks until you enter thePIN again.

Continue

SettingsAccess and adjust system settings, voicefeatures, as well as phone, navigation andwireless settings.

System

E142607

216


SYNC™ 2




System


Select to have the touchscreen display in any of the select-able language options*.

Language

Select to display units in kilometers or miles.Distance

Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.Temperature

Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the system.System prompt volume

Select to have the system beep to confirm choices madethrough the touchscreen.

Touchscreen buttonbeep

Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY or ABCformat.

Keyboard layout

Install any downloaded applications or view the currentsoftware licenses.

Install applications

Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personalsettings and personal data.

Master reset

* The options include: English, Spanish, French, Portuguese, German, Italian, Dutch,Swedish, Polish, Turkish and Russian. Only four of these languages are available for voiceinput and output, depending on your location.

Voice Control

E142607



Settings

Voice control


217


SYNC™ 2


Standard interaction mode provides more detailed interactionand guidance. Advanced mode has less audible interactionand more tone prompts.

Interaction mode

Have the system ask you short questions if it has not clearlyheard or understood your request.


Note: Even with confirmation prompts turned off, the systemmay occasionally ask you to confirm settings.

Candidate lists are possible results from your voicecommands. The system simply makes a best guess at yourrequest with these turned off.


Candidate lists are possible results from your voicecommands. The system simply makes a best guess at yourrequest with these turned off.


This allows you to adjust the system’s voice volume level.Voice control volume

Media Player

E142607




Media Player


When this feature is on, the system automatically switchesto the media source upon initial connection. This allows youto listen to music during the indexing process. When thisfeature is off, the system does not automatically switch tothe inserted media source.

Autoplay

Select to connect, disconnect, add or delete a device. Youcan also set a device as your favorite so that the systemautomatically attempts to connect to that device at everyignition cycle.

Bluetooth devices

218


SYNC™ 2


This allows you to view the version level of the GracenoteDatabase.

Gracenote® databaseinfo

With this feature on, the Gracenote Database suppliesmetadata information for your music files. This overridesinformation from your device. This feature defaults to off.

Gracenote® Manage-ment

With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplies coverart for your music files. This overrides any art from your device.This feature defaults to Media Player.

Cover Art priority

Navigation

E142607




Navigation


Switch breadcrumbs on and off.Map preferences

Have the system display your turn list top to bottom orbottom to top.

Switch the Parking POI notification on and off.

Select shortest route, fastest route or ecological route asyour preferred route. This route displays first.

Route preferences

Always use preferred route. If set to yes, the system onlycalculates a single route. This speeds up your destinationentry process.

Select a low, medium or high cost for the calculated ecolo-gical route. This may incur a time penalty.

Have the system avoid freeways.

Have the system avoid toll roads.

Have the system avoid ferries or car trains.

219


SYNC™ 2


Have the system avoid tunnels.

Have the system use guidance prompts.Navigation preferences

Have the system automatically fill in Country information.

Hazard spot warning

Have the system activate hazard spot warning in countrieswhere legally allowed.

Have the system avoid traffic problems automatically.Traffic preferences

Switch traffic alert notifications on or off.

Have the system display accident icons.

Have the system display traffic jam icons.

Have the system display closed roads.

Have the system display road work icons.

Have the system display incident icons.

Have the system display icons for areas where difficult drivingconditions may occur.

Have the system display icons for areas where snow and iceon the road may occur.

Have the system display any smog icons.

Have the system display weather warning icons.

Have the system display where there may be reduced visib-ility.

Have the system display icons to recommend switching onyour radio for traffic announcements.

Enter specific areas that you would like to avoid on plannednavigation routes.

Avoid areas

Phone

E142607

220


SYNC™ 2




Phone


Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as saveit as a favorite.

Bluetooth devices

Switch Bluetooth on and off.Bluetooth

Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring insideyour vehicle. With this feature turned on, text message noti-fications are also suppressed and do not ring inside yourvehicle.

Do not disturb

Switch on or turn off the Emergency Assistance feature. SeeInformation (page 241).

Emergency Assistance

Select the type of notification for phone calls - ring tone,beep, text to speech or silent.

Phone ringer

Select the type of notification for text messages - alert tone,beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.

Text message notifica-tion

If compatible with your phone, you can adjust your internetdata connection. Select to make your connection profile withthe personal area network or to switch off your connection.You can also choose to adjust your settings or have thesystem always connect, never connect when roaming, orquery on connect. Press ? for more information.

Internet data connection

Access features, such as automatic phonebook download,re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your phoneas well as delete or upload your phonebook.

Manage phonebook

Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode.Roaming warning

Wireless and Internet

E142607

Your system has a Wi-Fi featurethat creates a wireless networkwithin your vehicle, thereby

allowing other devices (such as personalcomputers or phones) in your vehicle tospeak to each other, share files or play

games. Using this Wi-Fi feature, everyonein your vehicle can also access the internetif you have a USB mobile broadbandconnection inside your vehicle, your phonesupports personal area networking or ifyou park outside a wireless hotspot.

221


SYNC™ 2




Wireless & Internet


Wi-Fi network (client) modeWi-Fi settings

Turns the Wi-Fi feature on and off in your vehicle. Make sureyou switch it on for connectivity purposes.

Choose a wireless network

Allows you to use a previously stored wireless network. Youcan categorize by alphabetical listing, priority and signalstrength. You can also choose to search for a network,connect to a network, disconnect from a network, receivemore information, prioritize a network or delete a network.

Gateway (access point) mode

Makes SYNC an access point for a phone or a computer whenturned on. This forms the local area network within yourvehicle for things, such as game playing, file transfer andinternet browsing. Press ? for more information.

Gateway (access point) settings

Allows you to view and change settings for using SYNC asthe internet gateway.

Gateway (access point) devices list

Allows you to view recent connections to your Wi-Fi system.

Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also use a USB mobilebroadband connection to access the internet. (You mustswitch on your mobile broadband device on your personalcomputer before connecting it to the system.) This screenallows you to set up what is your typical area for your USBmobile broadband connection. (USB mobile broadbandsettings may not display if the device is already on.) You canselect the following:

USB mobile broadband

Country

Carrier

222


SYNC™ 2


Phone number

Username

Password

Shows you the currently paired devices as well as giving youyour typical Bluetooth options to connect, disconnect, set asfavorite, delete and add device. Bluetooth is a registeredtrademark of the Bluetooth SIG.

Bluetooth settings

Choose your connection methods and change them asneeded. You can select to change order and have the systemeither always attempt to connect using a USB mobilebroadband or using Wi-Fi.

Prioritise connectionmethods

E142626

The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certificationmark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

Help

E142607




Help


Touchscreen system serial numberSystem inform-ation

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Touchscreen system software version

Navigation system version

Map database version

Gracenote® Database Information and Library version

223


SYNC™ 2


View the licenses for any software and applications installed on yoursystem.

View softwarelicences

Certain features are not accessible when your vehicle is moving.Driving restric-tions

Switch on and off the Emergency Assistance feature. See Information(page 241).

EmergencyAssistance

Allows you to save up to twonumbers as ICE contacts forquick access if there is anemergency.

In Case of Emergency (ICE) speed dial

The ICE contacts you selectappear at the end of theEmergency Assistance callprocess.

Select to access your phone-book and then select thedesired contacts. Thenumbers then appear asoptions on this screen for theICE 1 and ICE 2 buttons.

Edit

View categorized lists of voice commands.Voicecommand list

E142599

You can also access Help usingthe voice commands. Thesystem provides allowable voice

commands for the current mode.

Press the voice button and whenprompted say:

Voice command

Help

You can say help at any time to getassistance with commands, menus orother information.

224


SYNC™ 2

ENTERTAINMENT

ABCDEF

G

H

E161892

Message and DescriptionMessage

AMA

FMB

DABC

CDD

USBE

Touch this button to scrolldown for more options, suchas SD Card and BT Stereo.

F

Message and DescriptionMessage

These buttons change withthe media mode you are in.

G

Radio memory presets andCD controls.

H

Note: Some features may not be availablein your area. Contact an authorized dealerfor more information.

You can access these options using thetouchscreen or voice commands.

AM/FM/DAB Radio

E142611

The following controls areavailable for AM/FM/DAB radio

225


SYNC™ 2

Controls

Action and DescriptionItem

Touch either tab to listen to the radio. To change between AM, FMand DAB presets, just touch the AM, FM or DAB tab.

AM

FM

DAB

Save a station by pressing and holding one of the memory presetareas. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Soundreturns when finished.

Presets

Touch this button to go to the next strong AM, FM or DAB radiostation. The light on the button illuminates when the feature is on.

Scan

When the info button is pressed, the system shows thecorresponding block number for the active DAB radiostation. If you press the info button a second time theradio station name is displayed again.

(DABonly)

Information

For AM and FM only, touch this button to manually enter the desiredstation number. Touch Enter when you are done.

Tune

Turn on to receive traffic announcements.TA

See a list of all currently available radio stations.Browse

Options


Touch this button to adjust settings for:Sound settings

Bass

Midrange

Treble


DSP occupancy

EQ mode

Adaptive volume

This allows you to view the informationbroadcast by FM stations.

Radio text

226


SYNC™ 2


AST (Autostore) allows you to have thesystem automatically store the sixstrongest stations in your current location.

AST

With news announcement option active,the system interrupts active audio sourceto provide incoming news announcements,if currently tuned station (or last tunedstation in case of other media active)supports news.

News announcement

With Regional option active, the systemstays on the regional subprogram insteadof switching to a different frequency withbetter reception.

Regional

With alternative frequency option active,the system re-tunes to a differentfrequency with better reception for thesame station.

Alternate frequency

With Service Linking active, the systemautomatically switches from DAB to FM, incase DAB becomes unavailable.

Service linking

Note: Your vehicle may not have all thesesound settings. Radio Voice Commands

E142599

Press the voice button and when prompted say:

Voice command

Radio

Then you can say a command similar to the following:

Say a frequency or preset.FM

Say a preset.DAB

Radio off

help

227


SYNC™ 2

CD

E142611

To access, press the lower left corneron the touchscreen, then select:

Menu Item

CD

Insert your CD then select:


Touch this button to repeat the currentlyplaying track, all tracks on the disc or switchthe feature off if already on.

Repeat

Touch this button to play the tracks orentire albums in random order, or switchthe feature off if already on.

Shuffle

Touch this button to hear a brief samplingof all available tracks.

Scan

Touch this button to see disc information.More info

Touch this button to look through all avail-able CD tracks.

Browse

To adjust the Sound Settings, select:

Menu Item

Options

Sound settings

Then any of the following:

Bass

Midrange

Treble


DSP occupancy

EQ mode

Adaptive volume

Note: Your vehicle may not have all thesesound settings.

CD Voice Commands

E142599

If you are listening to a CD, pressthe voice button on the steeringwheel controls. When prompted,

say any of the following commands.

228


SYNC™ 2

If you are not listening to a CD, pressthe voice button and, after the tone,say:

Voice command

CD Player

When listening to a CD you can saymany commands. Following are a fewexamples of what you can say.

Voice command

Play

Pause

Next track

Previous track

help*This applies to WMA or MP3 files only.

SD Card Slot and USB PortThe SD card slot and USB port are locatedin the Media Hub. See Media Hub (page203).

SD CardNote: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded.To remove the SD card, press the card inand the system ejects it. Do not attempt topull the card to remove it as this could causedamage.Note: The navigation system also uses thiscard slot. See Navigation (page 248).

E196637

To access and play music from your device,press the lower left corner of thetouchscreen.

E142620

SD logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

USB Port

E196638

To access and play music from your device,press the lower left corner of thetouchscreen.

229


SYNC™ 2

This feature allows you to plug in mediaplaying devices, memory sticks, flash drivesor thumb drives, and charge devices if theysupport this feature.

Playing Music from Your DeviceNote: The system is capable of indexing upto 30,000 songs.

E142611

Insert your device and select:


Once the system recognizes your USB or SD card you canthen select from the following options:

USB

SD card

This feature replays the currently playing song or album.Repeat

Touch this button to play music on the selected album orfolder in random order.

Shuffle

This feature allows you to choose music similar to what iscurrently playing.

Similar music

Touch this button to see disc information, for example currenttrack, artist name, album and genre.

More info

Touch this button to view and adjust various media settings.Options

Sound

Sound settings allows you to adjust settings for:


Bass

Midrange

Treble


DSP occupancy

EQ mode

Adaptive volume

Allows you to select more settings, which is under MediaPlayer. See Settings (page 211).

Media player settings

230


SYNC™ 2


Displays software and firmware information about thecurrently connected media device.

Device information

Indexes your device when you connect it for the first time andeach time the content changes (for example adding orremoving tracks) to make sure you have the latest voicecommands available for all media on the device.

Update media index

Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.

BrowseThis feature allows you to view thecontents of the device. It also allows youto search by categories, for example genre,artist or album.

If you want to view song information, forexample Title, Artist, File, Folder, Album,and Genre, touch the on-screen album art.

You can also select:


To hear how the system pronounces the current band andsong. This can be helpful when using voice commands tomake sure the system correctly plays your request.

What’s playing?

USB and SD Card Voice Commands

E142599

The voice system allows you to controlyour media with voice commands. Forexample, if you are listening to music onyour USB device, and wish to changesongs, you can press the voice button andthe system provides you with audioprompts.

Press the voice button and when prompted say:

Voice command

SD card

USB

Then commands such as the following:

231


SYNC™ 2

Voice command

Browse

Next track

Pause

Say the name of what you would like to listen to such as a band, song,album or playlist.

Play

*Play Artist ___

*Play Song ___

Play similar music

Help* ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of anything, such as a group,artist or song. For example you could say "Play artist The Beatles" or "Play song PennyLane".

Supported Media Players, Formatsand Metadata InformationSYNC is capable of hosting nearly anydigital media player, including iPod,Zune™, plays from device players, andmost USB drives. Supported audio formatsinclude MP3, WMA, WAV and AAC.It is also able to organize your indexedmedia from your playing device bymetadata tags. Metadata tags, which aredescriptive software identifiers embeddedin the media files, provide informationabout the file.If your indexed media files contain noinformation embedded in these metadatatags, SYNC may classify the emptymetadata tags as unknown.

Bluetooth AudioThe system allows you to stream audioover your vehicle's speakers from yourconnected, Bluetooth-enabled cell phone.

E142611

To access, press the lower left corneron the touchscreen, then select:

Message

BT audio

Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands

E142599

The voice system allows you to controlyour media with a simple voice command.For example to change songs, press thevoice button and follow the systemprompts.

232


SYNC™ 2

PHONE

ABCDE

F

E161968

Menu ItemItem

PhoneA

Speed dialB

PhonebookC

HistoryD

MessagingE

SettingsF

Hands-free calling is one of the mainfeatures of SYNC. Once you pair your cellphone, you can access many options usingthe touchscreen or voice commands. Whilethe system supports a variety of features,many are dependent on your cell phone’sfunctionality.

At a minimum, most cell phones withBluetooth wireless technology support thefollowing functions:• Answering an incoming call.• Ending a call.• Dialing a number.• Call waiting notification.• Caller ID.

233


SYNC™ 2

Other features, such as text messagingusing Bluetooth and automatic phonebookdownload, are phone-dependent features.To check your phone’s compatibility, seeyour phone’s user manual or the local Fordwebsite.

Pairing Your Cell Phone for theFirst Time


you use extreme caution when using anydevice that may take your focus off theroad. Your primary responsibility is the safeoperation of your vehicle. We recommendagainst the use of any handheld devicewhile driving and encourage the use ofvoice-operated systems when possible.Make sure you are aware of all applicablelocal laws that may affect the use ofelectronic devices while driving.

The first thing you must do to use thephone features of SYNC is to pair yourBluetooth-enabled cell phone with SYNC.This allows you to use your cell phone in ahands-free manner.

Touch the upper left corner of the touchscreen:


Pair phone

Follow the on-screen instructions.Find SYNCMake sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cell phoneis in the correct mode. See your cell phone’s manual ifnecessary.Select SYNC and a six-digit PIN appears on your device.If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does notsupport Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PINdisplayed on the touchscreen. Skip the next step.When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm thatthe PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on yourcell phone.The display indicates when the pairing is successful.SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. Formore information on your cell phone's capability, see yourcell phone's manual and visit the local Ford website.

234


SYNC™ 2

Pairing Subsequent Cell PhonesMake sure that Bluetooth is set to On and

that your cell phone is in the correct mode.See your device's manual if necessary.

To pair a subsequent cell phone, select:


Phone

Settings

Bluetooth devices

Add Device

Follow the on-screen instructions.Find SYNCMake sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cell phoneis in the correct mode. See your cell phone’s manual ifnecessary.Select SYNC and a six-digit PIN appears on your device.If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does notsupport Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PINdisplayed on the touchscreen. Skip the next step.When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm thatthe PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on yourcell phone.The display indicates when the pairing is successful.SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. Formore information on your cell phone's capability, see yourcell phone's manual and visit the website.

235


SYNC™ 2

Making Calls

E142599

Press the voice button and say acommand similar to the following:

Voice command

Call name

Dial number

You can say the name of a person fromyour phone book to call or a say a numberto dial. For example "Call Jenny" or "Dial867-5309".

To end the call or exit phonemode, press and hold the phonebutton.

Receiving CallsDuring an incoming call, an audible tonesounds. Call information appears in thedisplay if it is available.

To accept the call, select:

Menu Item

AcceptNote: You can also accept the call bypressing the phone button on the steeringwheel.

To reject the call, select:

Menu Item

RejectNote: You can also reject the call bypressing the phone button on the steeringwheel.

Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC logsit as a missed call.

Phone Menu OptionsPress the top left corner on thetouchscreen to select from the followingoptions:


Touch this button to access the on-screen numerical pad toenter a number and place a call. During an active call, you canalso choose any of these options:

Phone

Mute call

Hold call

Hands-free off

Join calls

End

236


SYNC™ 2


Select to call stored contacts.Speed dial

Touch this button to access and call any contacts in yourpreviously downloaded phonebook. The system places theentries in alphabetical categories summarized at the top ofthe screen

Phonebook

To turn on contact picture settings, if your device supports thisfeature, select:

Phone

Settings

Manage phonebook

Display photos from phonebook

Certain smartphones may support transferring street addresseswhen listed with phonebook contact information. If your cellphone supports this feature, you can select and use theseaddresses as destinations and save them as favorites.

Note: This is a cell phone-dependent feature. If your cell phonedoes not support downloading call history using Bluetooth,SYNC keeps track of calls made with the SYNC system.

Call history

After you connect your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to SYNC,you can access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.You can also choose to save these to:

Quick DialFavourites

Send text messages using the touchscreen. See TextMessaging later in this section.

Messaging

Touch this button to access various phone settings, forexample turning Bluetooth on and off, managing your phone-book and more. See Phone Settings later in this section

Settings

Text MessagingNote: Downloading and sending textmessages using Bluetooth are cellphone-dependent features.Note: Certain features in text messagingare speed-dependent and not availablewhen your vehicle is traveling at speeds over8 km/h (5.0 mph).

Note: SYNC does not download read textmessages from your cell phone.You can send and receive text messagesusing Bluetooth, read them aloud andtranslate text messaging acronyms, forexample LOL.

237


SYNC™ 2

Touch the top left corner of the display,then select:

Menu Item

Phone

Messaging


Listen (speaker icon)

Dial

Send text

Menu Item

View

Delete

Delete All

Composing a Text MessageNote: This is a speed-dependent feature.It is unavailable when your vehicle istraveling at speeds over 8 km/h (5 mph).Note: Downloading and sending textmessages using Bluetooth are cellphone-dependent features.

To compose and send a text message, select:


Phone

Messaging

Enter a cell phone number or choose from your phonebook.Send text

Allows you to customize the pre-defined message or createa message on your own.

Edit text

Sends the message as it is.Send

You can then preview the message, verifythe recipient as well as update themessage list, and send it to a connecteddevice, for example a USB drive.

Text Message Options

Messages

I'll call you back in a few minutes.

I just left, I'll be there soon.

Can you give me a call?

I'm on my way.

I'm running a few minutes late.

Messages

I'm ahead of schedule, so I'll be thereearly.

I'm outside.

I'll call you when I get there.

OK

Yes

No

Thanks

238


SYNC™ 2

Messages

Stuck in traffic.

Call me later.

Messages

LOL

Receiving a Text Message

When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays apop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your cell phone. You can select:


To view the text message.View

For SYNC to read the message to you.Listen

To call the contact.Dial

To exit the screen.Ignore

Phone SettingsTo enter the phone settings menu select:


Phone

Settings


Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as saveit as a favorite.

Bluetooth devices

To turn Bluetooth off or on.Bluetooth

If you want all calls to go directly to your voicemail and notring in the vehicle. When this feature is on, text messagenotifications do not ring inside the cabin either.

Do not disturb

Switch the Emergency Assistance feature on or off. SeeInformation (page 241).


Select the ring tone you want to hear when you receive a call.Choose from possible system ring tones, your currently pairedcell phone’s ring tone, a beep, text-to-speech or a silentnotification.

Phone ringer

239


SYNC™ 2


Select a text message notification, if supported by your cellphone. Choose from possible system alert tones, text-to-speech or silent.

Text message notifica-tion

If your cell phone is compatible, use this screen to adjust yourinternet data connection. Select to make your connectionprofile with the personal area network or to turn off yourconnection. You can also choose to adjust your settings orhave the system always connect, never connect whenroaming or query on connect. Press ? for more information.

Internet data connection

To access features such as automatic phonebook download,re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your cellphone as well as delete or upload your phonebook.

Manage phonebook

To have the system alert you when your cell phone is inroaming mode.

Roaming warning

Phone Voice Commands

E142599

Press the voice button and whenprompted say any of the following or asimilar command:

Voice command

Call voicemail

Listen to text message

Reply to text message

Pair Bluetooth

help

240


SYNC™ 2

INFORMATION

ABCDE

E161889

Menu ItemItem

TrafficA

NotificationsB

CalendarC

SYNC-AppsD

Where Am I?E

E142608

If your vehicle is equipped withNavigation, press theInformation button to access

these features. If your vehicle is notequipped with Navigation, press the cornerof the touchscreen with the green tab.

Notifications

E142608

If your vehicle is equipped withNavigation, touch the I(Information) button to access

these features. If your vehicle is notequipped with Navigation, touch the cornerof the touchscreen with the green tab.

241


SYNC™ 2

Press Notifications, and then choose from any of the following services:


The complete messageView

The messageDelete

MessagesDelete All

This screen displays any system messages(such as an SD card fault).Note: The system alerts you to anymessages by turning the information iconyellow. After you read or delete themessages, the icon returns to white.

Calendar

E142608

If your vehicle is equipped withNavigation, touch the I(Information) button to access

these features. If your vehicle is notequipped with Navigation, touch the cornerof the touchscreen with the green tab.

Press Calendar. You can view the currentcalendar by day, week or month.

Emergency Assistance (If Equipped)

WARNINGSFor this feature to work, your mobilephone must be Bluetooth capableand compatible with the system.Always place your mobile phone ina secure location inside your vehicle.Failure to do so may cause serious

injury to someone or damage the phonewhich could prevent Emergency Assistancefrom working correctly.

Unless the Emergency Assistancesetting is set to on prior to a collision,the system will not attempt to place

an emergency call which could delay theresponse time, potentially increasing therisk of serious injury or death. Do not wait

WARNINGSfor Emergency Assistance to make anemergency call if you can do it yourself.Dial emergency services immediately toavoid a delayed response time. If you donot hear Emergency Assistance within fiveseconds of the crash, the system or cellphone may be damaged or non-functional.

Note: Before setting the feature on, pleaseread the important notice about theEmergency Assistance feature and theEmergency Assistance privacy notice laterin this section for important information.Note: When you switch EmergencyAssistance on or off, the setting apply to allpaired mobile phones. If you switchEmergency Assistance off and a previouslypaired phone connects when you switch theignition on, either a voice message plays, adisplay message or icon is shown, or both.Note: Every mobile phone operatesdifferently. While Emergency Assistanceworks with most mobile phones, somemobile phones may experience difficultiesusing this feature.If a crash deploys an airbag or triggers thefuel pump shut off, the system maycontact emergency services by dialing 112(the wireless emergency number thatworks in most European countries) througha paired and connected cell phone. Formore information about the system andEmergency Assistance, visit the regionalFord website.

242


SYNC™ 2

Note: In case of an emergency, EmergencyAssistance, as a means of communicationaid, can help you contact specific rescuedepartments of public security. EmergencyAssistance does not implement the rescueoperations. The local public securitydepartment deploys specific rescueoperations according to the actual situation.See Supplementary Restraints System(page 23). Important informationregarding airbag deployment is in thischapter.See Roadside Emergencies (page 140).Important information regarding the fuelpump shut-off is in this chapter.

Setting Emergency Assistance On

E142608

If your vehicle is equipped withNavigation, touch the I (Information)button to access these features. If yourvehicle is not equipped withNavigation, touch the corner of thetouchscreen with the green tab. Thenselect:

Menu Item

Apps


On

E142607

Display OptionsIf you switch on this feature, a confirmationmessage appears in the display when yourcell phone connects and your vehiclestarts.If you switch off this feature, the dialogallows you to set a reminder.

Off with reminder provides a display andvoice reminder when your cell phoneconnects and your vehicle starts.Off without reminder provides a displayreminder only without a voice reminderwhen your cell phone connects.To make sure that Emergency Assistanceworks correctly:• The system must have power and be

working correctly at the time of thecrash and during feature activation anduse.

• You must switch on the feature beforea crash.

• You must have a cell phone connectedto the system.

• In certain countries, it may benecessary to have a valid andregistered SIM card with credit in orderto place and maintain an emergencycall.

• A connected cell phone must have theability to make and maintain anoutgoing call at the time of the crash.

• A connected cell phone must haveadequate network coverage, batterypower and signal strength.

• Your vehicle must have battery power.Note: This feature only works in a Europeancountry or region where SYNC EmergencyAssistance can call the local emergencyservices. Visit the regional Ford website fordetails.

243


SYNC™ 2

In the Event of a CrashNote: Not every crash deploys an airbag ortriggers the fuel pump shut off (which mayturn on Emergency Assistance). However,if Emergency Assistance is triggered thesystem tries to contact the emergencyservices. If a connected cell phone sustainsdamage or loses connection to the system,it searches for and tries to connect to anyavailable previously paired cell phone. Thesystem attempts to dial 112.Before making a call:• If you do not cancel the call and SYNC

makes a successful call, anintroductory message plays for theemergency operator. After thismessage, there is hands-freecommunication between your vehicle'soccupants and the operator.

• The system provides a short windowof time (approximately 10 seconds) tocancel the call. If you do not cancel thecall, the system attempts to dial 112.

• The system plays a message lettingyou know when it attempts to make anemergency call. You can cancel the callby selecting the relevant button or bypressing the end call button on thesteering wheel.

During a call:• Emergency Assistance uses your

vehicle GPS or cellular networkinformation when available todetermine the most appropriatelanguage to use. It alerts theemergency operator of the crash anddelivers the introductory message. Thismay include your vehicle GPScoordinates.

• The language the system uses tointeract with the occupants of yourvehicle may differ from the languageused to deliver information to theemergency operator.

• After the delivery of the introductorymessage the voice line opens so thatyou can speak hands-free with theemergency operator.

• When the line is connected, you mustbe prepared to provide your name,phone number and locationinformation immediately.

Note: While the system providesinformation to the emergency operator, thesystem plays a message letting you knowit is sending important information. It thenlets you know when the line is open to starthands-free communication.Note: During an Emergency Assistance call,an emergency priority screen appears whichcontains vehicle GPS coordinates whenavailable.Note: It is possible that GPS locationinformation is not available at the time ofthe crash; in this case, EmergencyAssistance will still attempt to place anemergency call.Note: It is possible that the emergencyservices will not receive the GPScoordinates; in this case, hands-freecommunication with an emergency operatoris available.Note: The emergency operator may alsoreceive information from the cellularnetwork such as cell phone number, cellphone location and cell phone carrier nameindependent from SYNC EmergencyAssistance.

Emergency Assistance may not workif:• Your cell phone or Emergency

Assistance hardware sustains damagein the crash.

• The vehicle battery or the system hasno power.

• A crash ejects your cell phone fromyour vehicle.

244


SYNC™ 2

• You do not have a valid and registeredSIM card with credit in your cell phone.

• You are in a European country or regionwhere the SYNC Emergency Assistancecannot place the call. Visit the regionalFord website for details.

Important Information about theEmergency Assistance FeatureEmergency Assistance does not currentlycall emergency services in the followingmarkets: Albania, Belarus, Bosnia andHerzegovina, Macedonia, Netherlands,Ukraine, Moldova and Russia.

Visit the regional Ford website for latestdetails.

Emergency Assistance Privacy NoticeWhen you switch on EmergencyAssistance, it may disclose to emergencyservices that your vehicle has been in acrash involving the deployment of anairbag or activation of the fuel pump shutoff. This feature has the capability todisclose your location information to theemergency operator or other details aboutyour vehicle or crash to provide the mostappropriate emergency services.If you do not want to disclose thisinformation, do not switch on the feature.

Where Am I?

For vehicle location and information select:


Information

Help

Then select:

View your vehicle's current location, if yourvehicle is equipped with navigation. If yourvehicle is not equipped with navigation, youdo not see this button.

Where am I?

CLIMATEPress the lower right corner on thetouchscreen to access your climate controlfeatures. Depending on your vehicle lineand option package, your climate screenmay look different from this screen.

Note: You can switch temperature unitsbetween Fahrenheit and Celsius. SeeSettings (page 211).

245


SYNC™ 2

E191835

Power: Touch to switch the system off and on. Outside air cannot enter yourvehicle when you switch off the system.

A

Passenger settings: Touch + or – to adjust the temperature.BTouch the heated seat icon to turn the heated seat off and on (if equipped).Touch the climate-controlled seat icon to turn the climate-controlled seat offand on (if equipped).DUAL:Touch to switch on the passenger temperature control.Fan speed: Touch + or - to adjust fan speed.CRecirculated air: Touch to switch the recirculated air on or off which mayreduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior and help reduceodors from reaching the interior. Recirculated air also engages automaticallywhen MAX A/C or MAX defrost is selected and may be engaged manually inany airflow mode except defrost. It may also turn off in all airflow modes exceptMAX A/C and MAX defrost to reduce fog potential.

D

MAX A/C: Touch to cool your vehicle with recirculated air. Touch again fornormal A/C operation. MAX A/C distributes air through instrument panel ventsand may help reduce odors from entering your vehicle. MAX A/C is moreeconomical and efficient than normal A/C mode.

E

A/C: Touch to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use A/C with recirculatedair to improve cooling performance and efficiency. A/C engages automaticallyin MAX A/C, defrost and footwell/defrost.

F

246


SYNC™ 2

AUTO: Touch to engage automatic operation, then set the temperature usingthe temperature control. The system automatically controls fan speed, airflowdistribution, A/C on or off and the use of fresh or recirculated air.

G

Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See HeatedWindows and Mirrors (page 90).

H

MAX Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield air vents andautomatically turns the air conditioning on. The fan is set to the highest speedand the temperature to HI. When the air distribution is set in this position, youare unable to select recirculated air or manually adjust the fan speed andtemperature control.

I

Heated windscreen: Press the button to clear the heated windscreen of thinice and fog.

J

Manual airflow distribution controls:KFootwell and Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents,demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents, and provides outside airto reduce window fogging.Panel: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.Panel and Floor: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, demistervents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents.Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floorvents.Defrost: Touch to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice. Touch again to returnto the previous airflow selection. When on, defrost provides outside air to reducewindow fogging and distributes air through the windshield defroster vents anddemister vents.Driver settings: Touch + or – to adjust the temperature.LTouch the heated seat icon to turn the heated seat off and on (if equipped).Touch the climate-controlled seat icon to turn the climate-controlled seat offand on (if equipped).Touch MyTemp to select your preset temperature setpoint. Touch and holdMyTemp to save a new preset temperature setpoint.Touch the heated steering wheel icon to turn the heated steering wheel on andoff (if equipped).

Climate Control Voice Commands

E142599

Press the voice button on thesteering wheel controls. Whenprompted, say any of the

following or a similar command:

247


SYNC™ 2

Voice commands

Climate on

Climate off

Adjust the temperature to between 15°C (59.0°F) -30°C (86.0°F)

Set temperature

NAVIGATIONNote: The navigation SD card must be inthe SD card slot to operate the navigationsystem. If you need a replacement SD card,contact an authorized dealer.

Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. Toremove the SD card, just push the card inand release it. Do not attempt to pull thecard out to remove it; this could causedamage.Your navigation system is comprised oftwo main features, destination mode andmap mode.

Destination ModeTo set a destination press the green corner of your touchscreen, then press:

Menu Item

Dest.

Choose any of the following:

My home

Favourites


Place of interest

Emergency

Address

Junction

Town centre

Latitude/Longitude

Edit route

Cancel Route

248


SYNC™ 2

To set your destination, enter thenecessary information into the highlighted

text fields (in any order).

For an address destination entry, press:


Pressing this button makes the addresslocation appear on the map.

Go

To choose a previous destination, press:


The last 20 destinations you have selectedappear.


Once you have chosen you destination press:


To make this your destination. You can also choose to set thisas a waypoint (have the system route to this point on the way

to your current destination) or save it as a favorite. You canthen choose your route from three different options.

Set as destination

Uses the fastest moving roadspossible.

Fastest

Uses the shortest distance possible.Shortest

Uses the most fuel-efficient route.Eco route

Your pre-set selections are considered when your route iscalculated. For more information on these selections, see

Setting Your Navigation Preferences later in this chapter.

Avoid areas

To begin navigation press:


You can cancel the route or have the system demo the routefor you.

Start route

249


SYNC™ 2


During route guidance, you can press the talking bubble iconthat appears in the upper right navigation corner (green bar)if you want the system to repeat route guidance information.

When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, itupdates the distance to the next guidance instruction, since

it detects when the vehicle is moving.

To set route preferences press:


In route preferences you can set preferences like avoidingmotorways, tollroads, ferries and car trains or tunnels.

Route prefs

Note: If your vehicle is on a recognized roadand you do not press the Start Routebutton, the system defaults to the FastestRoute option and begins guidance.

Michelin Travel Guide (If Equipped)

The Michelin travel guide is a service whichprovides additional information aboutcertain places of interests (POI) such asrestaurants, hotels and touristic sites (ifavailable).If you have paired your phone with thesystem, you can press the phone buttonto directly establish a call with the selectedPOI.Note: Not all features are available in alllanguages and countries.

Places of Interest (POI)Categories

Main categories

Filling station

Parking

Food, Drink and Dining

Automotive

Main categories

Travel and Transportation

Shopping

Financial

Entertainment & Arts

Emergency

Recreation & Sports

Community

Government

Health & Medicine

Domestic Services

To expand these listings, press the + infront of the listing.The system also allows you to sortalphabetically or by distance.

Setting Your NavigationPreferences

E142607

Select settings for the system totake into account when planningyour route.

250


SYNC™ 2

To access the settings options, press:

Menu Item

Settings

Navigation

Then select any of the following:

Map Preferences

Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item

Map preferences


Display your vehicle’s previously traveled route with white dots.You can switch this feature:

Breadcrumbs

OffOn

Have the system display your turn list:Turn list format

Bottom to topTop to bottom

When parking point of interest notification is on, the iconsdisplay on the map when you get close to your destination.This may not be very useful in dense areas, and may clutterthe map when other points of interest display. Set the auto-matic parking point of interest notification. You can switch thisfeature:

Parking POI notification

OffOn

Route Preferences


Route prefer-ences


Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.Preferred route

EcologicalFastestShortest

251


SYNC™ 2


Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system onlycalculates one route based on preferred route setting.

Always usepreferred route

When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculateonly one route to the desired destination.

Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher thesetting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.

Eco timepenalty

When activated, you can to choose to have the system avoid motor-ways, toll roads, ferries, car trains and tunnels when planning yourroute.

Avoid

Navigation Preferences


Navigation preferences


Have the system activate hazard spot warning in countrieswhere legally allowed.

Hazard spot warning

Select the type of prompts the system uses.Guidance prompts

Have the system automatically fill in the country based onthe information already entered into the system. You canswitch this feature:

Auto-fill country

OffOn

Traffic Preferences


Traffic preferences


You can choose how you want the system to handle trafficproblems along your route.

Avoid traffic problems

Have the system reroute you to avoidtraffic incidents that develop andimpact the current route. The systemdoes not provide a traffic alert notific-ation

Automatic

252


SYNC™ 2


Have the system always provide atraffic alert notification for trafficincidents along the planned route.You have a choice to accept or ignorethe notification before making theroute deviation.

Manual

Activate traffic alert notifications on or off.Traffic alert notification

You can choose to activate any of the following Traffic IconSettings.

Traffic Icon Settings

Have the system avoid traffic problems automatically.

Switch traffic alert notifications on or off.

Have the system display accident icons.

Have the system display traffic jam icons.

Have the system display closed roads.

Have the system display road work icons.

Have the system display incident icons.

Have the system display icons for areas where difficult drivingconditions may occur.

Have the system display icons for areas where snow and iceon the road may occur.

Have the system display any smog icons.

Have the system display weather warning icons.

Have the system display where there may be reduced visibility.

Have the system display icons to recommend switching onyour radio for traffic announcements.

253


SYNC™ 2

Avoid Area


Choose areas which you want the system to avoid whencalculating a route for you.

Avoid areas


Once you make a selection, the system tries to avoid thearea(s) if possible for all routes. To program an entry, press:

Add

To delete a section choose the listing on the screen. The screenwill change, then press:

Delete

Map ModePress the green bar in the upper right areaof the touchscreen to view map mode. Mapmode shows advanced viewing comprisedof both 2D city maps as well as 3Dlandmarks (when available).2D city maps show detailed outlines ofbuildings, visible land use and landelements and detailed railwayinfrastructure for the most essential citiesaround the globe. These maps also containfeatures, such as town blocks, buildingfootprints and railways.3D landmarks appear as clear, visibleobjects that are typically recognizable andhave a certain tourist value. The 3Dlandmarks appear in 3D map mode only.Coverage varies and improves withupdated map releases.

E174016

Change the appearance of the map displayby repeatedly pressing the arrow button inthe upper left corner of the screen. Ittoggles between three different mapmodes:

E142642

Heading up (2D map) Thisalways shows the direction offorward travel to be upward onthe screen. This view is availablefor map scales up to 5 km/h

(3 mph).

E142643

North up (2D map) alwaysshows the northern direction tobe upward on the screen.

254


SYNC™ 2

E142644

3D map mode provides anelevated perspective of the map.This viewing angle can beadjusted and the map can berotated 180 degrees by touching

the map twice, and then dragging yourfinger along the shaded bar with arrows atthe bottom of the map.

You can also select the followingoptions:

Menu Items

Switches betweenfull map, street list

and exit view inroute guidance.

View

Displays a pop-upbox that allowsdirect access to

navigation settings.

Menu

E174017

Press the speaker button on themap to mute route guidance.When the light on the button

illuminates, the feature is on. The speakerbutton appears on the map only whenroute guidance is active.

E146188

Re-center the map by pressingthis icon whenever you scroll themap away from your vehicle’s

current location.

Auto ZoomPress the green bar to access map mode,then select the + or - zoom button to bringup the zoom level and Auto buttons on thetouchscreen. When you press Auto, AutoZoom turns on and Auto displays in thebottom left corner of the screen in the mapscale. The map zoom level then

synchronizes with vehicle speed. Theslower your vehicle is traveling, the fartherin the map zooms in; the faster your vehicleis traveling, the farther the map zooms out.To switch the feature off, just press the +or - button again.In 3D mode, rotate the map view byswiping your finger across the shaded barwith the arrows.The ETA box under the zoom buttonsappears when a route is active anddisplays the distance and time to yourdestination. If the button is pressed, a popup appears with the destination listed (andwaypoint if applicable) along with mileageand time to destination. You may alsoselect to have either the estimated timeto reach your destination or your estimatedarrival time.

Map Icons

E142646

Vehicle mark shows the currentlocation of your vehicle. It staysin the center of the map display,except when in scroll mode.

E142647

Scroll cursor allows you toscroll the map; the fixed icon isin the center of the screen. Themap position closest to thecursor is in a window on the top

center part of the screen.

E142648

Address book entry defaulticon(s) indicates the locationon the map of an address bookentry. This is the default symbolshown after the entry has been

stored to the Address Book by any methodother than the map. You can select fromany of the 22 icons available. You can useeach icon more than once.

255


SYNC™ 2

E142649

Home indicates the location onthe map currently stored as thehome position. You can onlysave one address from theAddress Book as your Home

entry. You cannot change this icon.

E142650

POI (Point Of Interest) iconsindicate locations of any pointof interest categories you chooseto display on the map. You canchoose to display three point of

interest categories on the map at one time.

E142651

Starting point indicates thestarting point of a planned route.

E142652

Waypoint indicates the locationof a waypoint on the map. Thenumber inside the circle isdifferent for each waypoint andrepresents the position of the

waypoint in the route list.

E142653

Destination symbol indicatesthe ending point of a plannedroute.

E142654

Next maneuver point indicatesthe location of the next turn onthe planned route.

E142655

No GPS symbol indicates thatinsufficient GPS satellite signalsare available for accurate mappositioning. This icon maydisplay under normal operation

in an area with poor GPS access.

Quick-touch ButtonsWhen in map mode, touch anywhere onthe map display to access the followingoptions:


Touch this button to select a scrolled location on the map asyour destination. You may scroll the map by pressing your indexfinger on the map display. When you reach the desired location,simply let go and then touch this button.

Set as destination

Touch this button to set the current location as a waypoint.Set as waypoint

Touch this button to save the current location to your favorites.Save to favourites

Touch this button to select icons to display on the map. Youcan select up to three icons to display on the map at the sametime. You can switch these features:

POI icons

OffOn

Touch this button to cancel the active route.Cancel Route

256


SYNC™ 2

View/Edit Route

Access these features when a route isactive:

Menu Item

View route

Edit destination/waypoint

Edit turn list

Re-route

Edit route preferences

Edit traffic preferences

Cancel Route

HERE is the digital map provider for thenavigation application. If you find map dataerrors, you may report them directly toHERE by going to www.here.com. HEREevaluates all reported map errors andresponds with the result of theirinvestigation by e-mail.

Navigation Map UpdatesAnnual navigation map updates areavailable for purchase through yourdealership.

Navigation Voice Commands

E142599

When in navigation mode, pressthe voice button on the steeringwheel controls.

After the tone, say any of the following or a similar command:

Voice command

Destination

Zoom out

Zoom In

Where am I?

help

The following commands can only be used when a navigation route is active:

Voice command

Reroute

Cancel route

Show whole route

Repeat last instruction

Show route summary

257


SYNC™ 2

One-shot Destination Street Address

To set a destination with voicecommands, you can say:

Action and Descrip-tion

Voice Command

The system asksyou to say the full

address. Thesystem displays anexample on-screen.

Destinationaddress

You can then speak the address naturally,such as "One two three four Main Street,Anytown".

SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTINGYour SYNC system is easy to use. However,should questions arise, please refer to thetables below.To check your cell phone's compatibility,visit the regional Ford website.

Cell phone issues

Possible solutionPossible causeIssue

Refer to your device's manual aboutaudio adjustments.

The audio controlsettings on your cellphone may be affectingSYNC performance.

A lot of backgroundnoise during a phonecall.

Try switching off your cell phone,resetting it or removing the battery,then trying again.Possible cell phone

malfunction.During a call, I can hearthe other person butthey cannot hear me. Make sure that the microphone for

SYNC is not set to off.

Check your cell phone's compatib-ility.

This is a cell phone-dependent feature.

SYNC is not able todownload my phone-book.

Try switching off your cell phone,resetting it or removing the battery,then trying again.

Possible cell phonemalfunction.

Try pushing your phonebookcontacts to SYNC by selecting theoption to add.

You must switch on your cell phoneand the automatic phonebookdownload feature on SYNC.

Try pushing your phonebookcontacts to SYNC by selecting theoption to add.Limitations on your cell

phone's capability.

The system says"Phonebook down-loaded" but my SYNCphonebook is empty oris missing contacts.

258


SYNC™ 2

Cell phone issues


If the missing contacts are storedon your SIM card, try moving themto your cell phone's memory.

Remove any pictures or special ringtones associated with the missingcontact.

You must switch on your cell phoneand the automatic phonebookdownload feature on SYNC.



I am having troubleconnecting my cellphone to SYNC.



Try deleting your device from SYNCand deleting SYNC from yourdevice, then trying again.

Always check the security and autoaccept prompt settings relative tothe SYNC Bluetooth connection onyour cell phone.

Update your cell phone's firmware.

Switch off the auto downloadsetting.



Text messaging is notworking on SYNC.



iPhone • Go to your cell phone's Settings.• Go to the Bluetooth Menu.• Make sure the connection status

shows Not Connected.• Press the blue circle to enter the

next menu.

259


SYNC™ 2

Cell phone issues


• Turn on Show Notifications.• Turn on Sync Contacts.

Your iPhone is now set up toforward incoming text messages toSYNC.Repeat these steps for every otherSync vehicle you are connected to.Your iPhone will only forwardincoming text messages to SYNC ifit is unlocked.Replying to text messages usingSYNC is not supported by iPhone.Text messages from WhatsApp andFacebook Messenger are notsupported.

Your cell phone must supportdownloading text messagesthrough Bluetooth to receiveincoming text messages.


Audible text messagesdo not work on my cellphone.

Access the text messaging menu ofSYNC to see if your cell phonesupports the feature. Press thePHONE button and then scroll andselect the option for textmessaging, then press OK.

Because each cell phone isdifferent, refer to your device'smanual for the specific cell phoneyou are pairing. In fact, there can bedifferences between cell phonesdue to brand, model, serviceprovider and software version.

This is a cell phone limit-ation.

260


SYNC™ 2

USB and media issues


Try switching off the device, resettingit or removing the battery, then tryingagain.

Possible devicemalfunction.

I am having troubleconnecting my device.

Make sure you are using the manufac-turer's cable.

Make sure correctly insert the USBcable to the device and your vehicle'sUSB port.

Make sure that the device does nothave an auto-install program oractive security settings.

Make sure you are not leaving thedevice in your vehicle during very hotor cold temperatures.

This is a device limita-tion.

SYNC does not recog-nize my device when Istart my vehicle.

Make sure you connect the device toSYNC and press play on your device.

This is a device-dependent feature.Bluetooth audio does

not stream. The device is notconnected.

Make sure that all song details arepopulated.

Your music files may notcontain the correctartist, song title, albumor genre information.

SYNC does not recog-nize music that is on mydevice.

Try replacing the corrupt file with anew version.

The file may becorrupted.

Some devices require you to changethe USB settings from mass storageto media transfer protocol class.

The song may havecopyright protectionthat does not allow it toplay.

261


SYNC™ 2

USB and media issues


From the iPhone or iPod Touch musicnow playing screen, select the audiodevice airplay icon at the verybottom of your iPhone or iPod Touchscreen.

This is a device limita-tion.

When I connect myiPhone or iPod Touchthrough the USB andBluetooth Audio at thesame time, I sometimesdo not hear any sound.

To listen to the iPhone or iPod Touchthrough Bluetooth Audio, selectSYNC.

To listen to the iPhone or iPod Touchthrough USB, select Dock Connector.

Voice command issues


Review the cell phone voice commandsand the media voice commands at thebeginning of their respective sections.You may be using the

wrong voicecommands.

SYNC does notunderstand whatI am saying.

Refer to the audio display during an activevoice session to find a list of voicecommands there.

The microphone for the system is either inyour rear view mirror or in the headliner justabove the windshield.

You may be speakingtoo soon or at thewrong time.

Review the media voice commands at thebeginning of the media section.

You may be using thewrong voicecommands.

SYNC does notunderstand thename of a song orartist.

Say the song or artist exactly as the systemsaved it. If you say, "Play Artist Prince", thesystem does not play music by Prince andthe Revolution or Prince and the NewPower Generation.

You may not be sayingthe name exactly as thesystem saved it.

Make sure you are saying the complete titlesuch as "California remix featuring JenniferNettles".

262


SYNC™ 2



If the song titles are in capital letters, youhave to spell them. LOLA requires you tosay "L-O-L-A".

Do not use special characters in the title,as the system does not recognize them.

The system may not bereading the name thesame way you aresaying it.

Review the cell phone voice commands atthe beginning of the cell phone section.

You may be using thewrong voicecommands.

SYNC does notunderstand or iscalling the wrongcontact when Iwant to make acall.

You can also use the cell phone and mediasuggestion lists to get a list of possiblesuggestions when the system cannot fullyunderstand you. See (page 204).

Make sure you are saying the name exactlyas the system saved it. For example, if thecontact name is Joe Wilson, say "Call JoeWilson".You may not be saying

the name exactly as thesystem saved it. The system works better if you list full

names such as "Joe Wilson" rather than"Joe".

Do not use special characters such as 123or ICE as the system does not recognizethem.

Contacts in yourphonebook may be veryshort and similar or theymay contain specialcharacters.

If the contacts are in capital letters, youhave to spell them. JAKE requires you tosay "Call J-A-K-E".

Your phonebookcontacts may be incapital letters.

SYNC applies the phonetic pronunciationrules of the selected language to thecontact names stored on your cell phone.You may be saying the

foreign names using thecurrently selectedlanguage for SYNC.

The SYNC voicecontrol system ishaving troublerecognizingforeign namesstored on my cellphone.

263


SYNC™ 2



Helpful Hint: You can select your contactmanually. Press PHONE. Select the optionfor phonebook and then contact name.Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNCwill read the contact name to you, givingyou some idea of the pronunciation it isexpecting.

SYNC applies the phonetic pronunciationrules of the selected language to the namesstored on your media player or USB flashdrive. It is able to make some exceptionsfor very popular artist names (for example,U2) such that you can always use theEnglish pronunciation for these artists.

You may be saying theforeign names using thecurrently selectedlanguage for SYNC.

The SYNC voicecontrol system ishaving troublerecognizingforeign tracks,artists, albums,genres andplaylist namesfrom my mediaplayer or USBflash drive.

SYNC uses a synthetically generated voicerather than pre-recorded human voice.

SYNC uses text-to-speech voice prompttechnology.

The systemgenerates voiceprompts and thepronunciation ofsome words maynot be accuratefor my language.

SYNC offers several new voice controlfeatures for a wide range of languages.Dialing a contact name directly from thephonebook without pre-recording (forexample, “call John Smith”) or selecting atrack, artist, album, genre or playlist directlyfrom your media player (for example," playartist Madonna).

264


SYNC™ 2

General


SYNC only supports four languages in asingle module for text display, voicecontrol and voice prompts. The countrywhere you bought your vehicle dictatesthe four languages based on the mostpopular languages spoken. If the selectedlanguage is not available, SYNC remainsin the current active language.

SYNC does not supportthe currently selectedlanguage for the instru-ment cluster andinformation and enter-tainment display.

The languageselected for theinstrument clusterand informationand entertainmentdisplay does notmatch the SYNClanguage (phone,USB, Bluetoothaudio, voicecontrol and voiceprompts).

SYNC offers several new voice controlfeatures for a wide range of languages.Dialing a contact name directly from thephonebook without pre-recording (forexample, “call John Smith”) or selectinga track, artist, album, genre or playlistdirectly from your media player (forexample, play artist Madonna).

SYNC with Touchscreen System Reset

The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNCfeature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase anyinformation previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, callhistory, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and holdthe Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. Afterapproximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the systemreset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC system.

265


SYNC™ 2

ELECTROMAGNETICCOMPATIBILITY

WARNINGSYour vehicle has been tested andcertified to legislations relating toelectromagnetic compatibility

(72/245/EEC, UN ECE Regulation 10 orother applicable local requirements). It isyour responsibility to make sure that anyequipment you have fitted complies withapplicable local legislations. Have anyequipment fitted by an authorized dealer.

WARNINGSThe radio frequency transmitterequipment, for example cellulartelephones and amateur radio

transmitters, may only be fitted to yourvehicle if they keep to the parametersshown in the table below. There are nospecial provisions or conditions forinstallations or use.

Do not mount any transceiver,microphones, speakers, or any otheritem in the deployment path of the

airbag system.Do not fasten antenna cables tooriginal vehicle wiring, fuel pipes andbrake pipes.Keep antenna and power cables atleast 10 cm (3.9 in) from anyelectronic modules and airbags.

E170906

1 2 3

266


Appendices

Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (PeakRMS)

Frequency BandMHz

350 W1-30

1, 250 W30-54

1, 250 W68-87.5

1, 250 W142-176

1, 250 W380-512

1, 210 W806-940

1, 210 W1200-1400

1, 210 W1710-1885

1, 210 W1885-2025

Note: After the installation of radiofrequency transmitters, check fordisturbances from and to all electricalequipment in your vehicle, both in thestandby and transmit modes.Check all electrical equipment:• With the ignition on.• With the engine running.• During a road test at various speeds.Check that electromagnetic fieldsgenerated inside your vehicle cabin by thetransmitter installed do not exceedapplicable human exposure requirements.

END USER LICENSEAGREEMENTSYNC End User License Agreement(EULA)• You have acquired a device ("DEVICE")

that includes software licensed by FordMotor Company and its affiliates("FORD MOTOR COMPANY") from anaffiliate of Microsoft Corporation("MS") . Those installed softwareproducts of MS origin, as well asassociated media, printed materials,

267


Appendices

and "online" or electronicdocumentation ("MS SOFTWARE")are protected by internationalintellectual property laws and treaties.The MS SOFTWARE is licensed, notsold. All rights reserved.

• The MS SOFTWARE may interface withand/or communicate with, or may belater upgraded to interface with and/orcommunicate with additional softwareand/or systems provided by FORDMOTOR COMPANY. The additionalsoftware and systems of FORDMOTOR COMPANY origin, as well asassociated media, printed materials,and "online" or electronicdocumentation ("FORD SOFTWARE")are protected by internationalintellectual property laws and treaties.The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, notsold. All rights reserved.

• The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORDSOFTWARE may interface with and/orcommunicate with, or may be laterupgraded to interface with and/orcommunicate with additional softwareand/or systems provided by third partysoftware and service suppliers. Theadditional software and services ofthird party origin, as well as associatedmedia, printed materials, and "online"or electronic documentation ("THIRDPARTY SOFTWARE") are protected byinternational intellectual property lawsand treaties. The THIRD PARTYSOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. Allrights reserved.

• The MS SOFTWARE, FORDSOFTWARE and THIRD PARTYSOFTWARE hereinafter collectivelyand individually will be referred to as"SOFTWARE".

IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS ENDUSER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPYTHE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THESOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILLCONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TOTHIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANYPREVIOUS CONSENT).GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: ThisEULA grants you the following license:• You may use the SOFTWARE as

installed on the DEVICE and asotherwise interfacing with systemsand/or services provide by or throughFORD MOTOR COMPANY or its thirdparty software and service providers.

Description of Other Rights andLimitations• Speech Recognition: If the

SOFTWARE includes speechrecognition component(s), you shouldunderstand that speech recognition isan inherently statistical process andthat recognition errors are inherent inthe process. Neither FORD MOTORCOMPANY nor its suppliers shall beliable for any damages arising out oferrors in the speech recognitionprocess.

• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,Decompilation and Disassembly:You may not reverse engineer,decompile, or disassemble nor permitothers to reverse engineer, decompileor disassemble the SOFTWARE, exceptand only to the extent that such activityis expressly permitted by applicablelaw notwithstanding this limitation.

268


Appendices

• Limitations on Distributing,Copying, Modifying and CreatingDerivative Works: You may notdistribute, copy, make modificationsto or create derivative works based onthe SOFTWARE, except and only to theextent that such activity is expresslypermitted by applicable lawnotwithstanding this limitation.

• Single EULA: The end userdocumentation for the DEVICE andrelated systems and services maycontain multiple EULAs, such asmultiple translations and/or multiplemedia versions (e.g., in the userdocumentation and in the software).Even if you receive multiple EULAs, youare licensed to use only one (1) copy ofthe SOFTWARE.

• SOFTWARE Transfer: You maypermanently transfer your rights underthis EULA only as part of a sale ortransfer of the DEVICE, provided youretain no copies, you transfer all of theSOFTWARE (including all componentparts, the media and printed materials,any upgrades, and, if applicable, theCertificate(s) of Authenticity), and therecipient agrees to the terms of thisEULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,any transfer must include all priorversions of the SOFTWARE.

• Termination: Without prejudice to anyother rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANYor MS may terminate this EULA if youfail to comply with the terms andconditions of this EULA.

• Security Updates/Digital RightsManagement: Content owners usethe WMDRM technology included inyour DEVICE to protect theirintellectual property, includedcopyrighted content. Portions of theSOFTWARE on your DEVICE useWMDRM software to accessWMDRM-protected content. If theWMDRM software fails to protect the

content, content owners may askMicrosoft to revoke the SOFTWARE'sability to use WMDRM to play or copyprotected content. This action doesnot affect unprotected content. Whenyour DEVICE downloads licenses forprotected content, you agree thatMicrosoft may include a revocation listwith the licenses. Content owners mayrequire you to upgrade the SOFTWAREon your DEVICE to access their content.If you decline an upgrade, you will notbe able to access content that requiresthe upgrade.

• Consent to Use of Data: You agreethat MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORDMOTOR COMPANY, third partysoftware and systems suppliers, theiraffiliates and/or their designated agentmay collect and use technicalinformation gathered in any manner aspart of product support services relatedto the SOFTWARE or related services.MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORDMOTOR COMPANY, third partysoftware and services suppliers, theiraffiliates and/or their designated agentmay use this information solely toimprove their products or to providecustomized services or technologies toyou. MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORDMOTOR COMPANY, third partysoftware and systems suppliers, theiraffiliates and/or their designated agentmay disclose this information to others,but not in a form that personallyidentifies you.

269


Appendices

• Internet-Based ServicesComponents: The SOFTWARE maycontain components that enable andfacilitate the use of certainInternet-based services. Youacknowledge and agree that MS,Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTORCOMPANY, third party software andservice suppliers, their affiliates and/ortheir designated agent mayautomatically check the version of theSOFTWARE and/or its componentsthat you are utilizing and may provideupgrades or supplements to theSOFTWARE that may be automaticallydownloaded to your DEVICE.

• Additional Software/Services: TheSOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTORCOMPANY, third party software andservice suppliers, MS, MicrosoftCorporation, their affiliates and/or theirdesignated agent to provide or makeavailable to you SOFTWARE updates,supplements, add-on components, orInternet-based services componentsof the SOFTWARE after the date youobtain your initial copy of theSOFTWARE ("SupplementalComponents").

If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third partysoftware and services suppliers provide ormake available to you SupplementalComponents and no other EULA terms areprovided along with the SupplementalComponents, then the terms of this EULAshall apply.If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliatesand/or their designated agent makeavailable Supplemental Components, andno other EULA terms are provided, thenthe terms of this EULA shall apply, exceptthat the MS, Microsoft Corporation oraffiliate entity providing the SupplementalComponent(s) shall be the licensor of theSupplemental Component(s).

FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, MicrosoftCorporation, their affiliates and/or theirdesignated agent reserve the right todiscontinue without liability anyInternet-based services provided to you ormade available to you through the use ofthe SOFTWARE.• Links to Third Party Sites: The MS

SOFTWARE may provide you with theability to link to third party sites throughthe use of the SOFTWARE. The thirdparty sites are not under the control ofMS, Microsoft Corporation, theiraffiliates and/or their designatedagent. Neither MS nor MicrosoftCorporation nor their affiliates nor theirdesignated agent are responsible for(i) the contents of any third party sites,any links contained in third party sites,or any changes or updates to thirdparty sites, or (ii) webcasting or anyother form of transmission receivedfrom any third party sites. If theSOFTWARE provides links to thirdparty sites, those links are provided toyou only as a convenience, and theinclusion of any link does not imply anendorsement of the third party site byMS, Microsoft Corporation, theiraffiliates and/or their designatedagent.

• Obligation to Drive Responsibly:You recognize your obligation to driveresponsibly and keep attention on theroad. You will read and abide with theDEVICE operating instructionsparticularly as they pertain to safetyand assumes any risk associated withthe use of the DEVICE.

UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORDMOTOR COMPANY separate from theDEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CDROM disk(s) or via web download or othermeans, and is labeled "For UpgradePurposes Only" or "For Recovery PurposesOnly" you may install one (1) copy of such

270


Appendices

SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as areplacement copy for the existingSOFTWARE, and use it in accordance withthis EULA, including any additional EULAterms accompanying the upgradeSOFTWARE.INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:All title and intellectual property rights inand to the SOFTWARE (including but notlimited to any images, photographs,animations, video, audio, music, text and"applets" incorporated into theSOFTWARE), the accompanying printedmaterials, and any copies of theSOFTWARE, are owned by MS, MicrosoftCorporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ortheir affiliates or suppliers. TheSOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You maynot copy the printed materialsaccompanying the SOFTWARE. All titleand intellectual property rights in and tothe content which may be accessedthrough use of the SOFTWARE is theproperty of the respective content ownerand may be protected by applicablecopyright or other intellectual propertylaws and treaties. This EULA grants you norights to use such content. All rights notspecifically granted under this EULA arereserved by MS, Microsoft Corporation,FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third partysoftware and service providers, theiraffiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-lineservices which may be accessed throughthe SOFTWARE may be governed by therespective terms of use relating to suchservices. If this SOFTWARE containsdocumentation that is provided only inelectronic form, you may print one copy ofsuch electronic documentation.

EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: Youacknowledge that the SOFTWARE issubject to U.S. and European Union exportjurisdiction. You agree to comply with allapplicable international and national lawsthat apply to the SOFTWARE, includingthe U.S. Export Administration Regulations,as well as end-user, end-use anddestination restrictions issued by U.S. andother governments. For additionalinformation, see:

Website

http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/

TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grantyou any rights in connection with anytrademarks or service marks of FORDMOTOR COMPANY, MS, MicrosoftCorporation, third party software or serviceproviders, their affiliates or suppliers.PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product supportfor the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS,its parent corporation MicrosoftCorporation, or their affiliates orsubsidiaries. For product support, pleaserefer to FORD MOTOR COMPANYinstructions provided in the documentationfor the DEVICE. Should you have anyquestions concerning this EULA, or if youdesire to contact FORD MOTORCOMPANY for any other reason, pleaserefer to the address provided in thedocumentation for the DEVICE.No Liability for Certain Damages:EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORDMOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTYSOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION ANDTHEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NOLIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTALDAMAGES ARISING FROM OR INCONNECTION WITH THE USE ORPERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THISLIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY

271


Appendices

REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIALPURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS,MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/ORTHEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANYAMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWOHUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).• THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER

THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLYBE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEWVEHICLE.

AdobeContains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or[AIR®] technology by Adobe SystemsIncorporated. This [Licensee Product]contains [Adobe® Flash® Player][Adobe® AIR®] software under licensefrom Adobe Systems Incorporated,Copyright ©1995-2009 AdobeMacromedia Software LLC. All rightsreserved. Adobe, Flash and AIR aretrademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated.

End User Notice

Microsoft® Windows® Mobile forAutomotive Important SafetyInformationThis system Ford SYNC contains softwarethat is licensed to Manufacturer FORDMOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate ofMicrosoft Corporation pursuant to a licenseagreement. Any removal, reproduction,reverse engineering or other unauthorizeduse of the software from this system inviolation of the license agreement is strictlyprohibited and may subject you to legalaction.

Read and follow instructions: Beforeusing your Windows Automotive- basedsystem, read and follow all instructionsand safety information provided in this enduser manual ("User's Guide"). Notfollowing precautions found in this User'sGuide can lead to an accident or otherserious consequences.Keep User's Guide in vehicle: When keptin the vehicle, the User's Guide will be aready reference for you and other usersunfamiliar with the WindowsAutomotive-based system. Please makecertain that before using the system forthe first time, all persons have access tothe User's Guide and read its instructionsand safety information carefully.

WARNINGOperating certain parts of thissystem while driving can distractyour attention away from the road,

and possibly cause an accident or otherserious consequences. Do not changesystem settings or enter data non-verbally(using your hands) while driving. Stop thevehicle in a safe and legal manner beforeattempting these operations. This isimportant since while setting up orchanging some functions you might berequired to distract your attention awayfrom the road and remove your hands fromthe wheel.

General OperationVoice Command Control: Functionswithin the Windows Automotive-basedsystem may be accomplished using onlyvoice commands. Using voice commandswhile driving allows you to operate thesystem without removing your hands fromthe wheel.

272


Appendices

Prolonged Views of Screen: Do notaccess any function requiring a prolongedview of the screen while you are driving.Pull over in a safe and legal manner beforeattempting to access a function of thesystem requiring prolonged attention. Evenoccasional short scans to the screen maybe hazardous if your attention has beendiverted away from your driving task at acritical time.Volume Setting: Do not raise the volumeexcessively. Keep the volume at a levelwhere you can still hear outside traffic andemergency signals while driving. Drivingwhile unable to hear these sounds couldcause an accident.Use of Speech Recognition Functions:Speech recognition software is inherentlya statistical process which is subject toerrors. It is your responsibility to monitorany speech recognition functions includedin the system and address any errors.Navigation Features: Any navigationfeatures included in the system areintended to provide turn by turninstructions to get you to a desireddestination. Please make certain allpersons using this system carefully readand follow instructions and safetyinformation fully.Distraction Hazard: Any navigationfeatures may require manual (non-verbal)setup. Attempting to perform such set-upor insert data while driving can seriouslydistract your attention and could cause anaccident or other serious consequences.Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal mannerbefore attempting these operations.

Let Your Judgment Prevail: Anynavigation features are provided only asan aid. Make your driving decisions basedon your observations of local conditionsand existing traffic regulations. Any suchfeature is not a substitute for your personaljudgment. Any route suggestions made bythis system should never replace any localtraffic regulations or your personaljudgment or knowledge of safe drivingpractices.Route Safety: Do not follow the routesuggestions if doing so would result in anunsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would beplaced in an unsafe situation, or if youwould be directed into an area that youconsider unsafe. The driver is ultimatelyresponsible for the safe operation of thevehicle and therefore, must evaluatewhether it is safe to follow the suggesteddirections.Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps usedby this system may be inaccurate becauseof changes in roads, traffic controls ordriving conditions. Always use goodjudgment and common sense whenfollowing the suggested routes.Emergency Services: Do not rely on anynavigation features included in the systemto route you to emergency services. Asklocal authorities or an emergency servicesoperator for these locations. Not allemergency services such as police, firestations, hospitals and clinics are likely tobe contained in the map database for suchnavigation features.

273


Appendices

Telenav Software End User LicenseAgreementPlease read these terms and conditionscarefully before you use the TelenavSoftware. Your use of the TelenavSoftware indicates that you accept theseterms and conditions. If you do not acceptthese terms and conditions, do not breakthe seal of the package, launch, orotherwise use the Telenav Software.These terms and conditions represent theagreement (“Agreement”) between youand Telenav, Inc. (“Telenav”) with respectto the Telenav Software (includingupgrades, modifications, or additionsthereto) (collectively “Telenav Software”).All references herein to “you” and “your”means you, your employees, agents, andcontractors, and any other entity on whosebehalf you accept these terms andconditions, all of whom shall also be boundby this Agreement. Additionally, all of youraccount information, as well as otherpayment and personal informationprovided by you to Telenav (directly orthrough the use of the Telenav Software,is subject to Telenav’s privacy policylocated at http://www.telenav.com.Telenav may revise this Agreement andthe privacy policy at any time, with orwithout notice to you. You agree to visithttp://www.telenav.com from time to timeto review the then current version of thisAgreement and of the privacy policy.

1. Safe and Lawful UseYou acknowledge that devoting attentionto the Telenav Software may pose a riskof injury or death to you and others insituations that otherwise require yourundivided attention, and you thereforeagree to comply with the following whenusing the Telenav Software: (a) observeall traffic laws and otherwise drive safely;(b) use your own personal judgment whiledriving. If you feel that a route suggested

by the Telenav Software instructs you toperform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,places you in an unsafe situation, or directsyou into an area that you consider to beunsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c)do not input destinations, or otherwisemanipulate the Telenav Software, unlessyour vehicle is stationary and parked; (d)do not use the Telenav Software for anyillegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in anymanner inconsistent with this Agreement;(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devicesand cables necessary for use of theTelenav Software in a secure manner inyour vehicle so that they will not interferewith your driving and will not prevent theoperation of any safety device (such as anairbag).You agree to indemnify and hold Telenavharmless against all claims resulting fromany dangerous or otherwise inappropriateuse of the Telenav Software in any movingvehicle, including as a result of your failureto comply with the directions above.

2. Account InformationYou agree: (a) when registering theTelenav Software, to provide Telenav withtrue, accurate, current, and completeinformation about yourself, and (b) toinform Telenav promptly of any changesto such information, and to keep it true,accurate, current and complete.

3. Software LicenseSubject to your compliance with the termsof this Agreement, Telenav hereby grantsto you a personal, non-exclusive,non-transferable license (except asexpressly permitted below in connectionwith your permanent transfer of theTelenav Software license), without theright to sublicense, to use the TelenavSoftware (in object code form only) inorder to access and use the TelenavSoftware. This license shall terminate upon

274


Appendices

any termination or expiration of thisAgreement. You agree that you will use theTelenav Software only for your personalbusiness or leisure purposes, and not toprovide commercial navigation services toother parties.

3.1 License LimitationsYou agree not to do any of the following:(a) reverse engineer, decompile,disassemble, translate, modify, alter orotherwise change the Telenav Softwareor any part thereof; (b) attempt to derivethe source code, audio library or structureof the Telenav Software without the priorexpress written consent of Telenav; (c)remove from the Telenav Software, oralter, any of Telenav’s or its suppliers’trademarks, trade names, logos, patent orcopyright notices, or other notices ormarkings; (d) distribute, sublicense orotherwise transfer the Telenav Softwareto others, except as part of your permanenttransfer of the Telenav Software; or (e)use the Telenav Software in any mannerthat (i) infringes the intellectual propertyor proprietary rights, rights of publicity orprivacy or other rights of any party, (ii)violates any law, statute, ordinance orregulation, including but not limited to lawsand regulations related to spamming,privacy, consumer and child protection,obscenity or defamation, or (iii) is harmful,threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous,defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, orotherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rentout, or otherwise permit unauthorizedaccess by third parties to the TelenavSoftware without advanced writtenpermission of Telenav.

4. DisclaimersTo the fullest extent permissible pursuantto applicable law, in no event will Telenav,its licensors and suppliers, or agents oremployees of any of the foregoing, beliable for any decision made or actiontaken by you or anyone else in reliance onthe information provided by the TelenavSoftware. Telenav also does not warrantthe accuracy of the map or other data usedfor the Telenav Software. Such data maynot always reflect reality due to, amongother things, road closures, construction,weather, new roads and other changingconditions. You are responsible for theentire risk arising out of your use of theTelenav Software. For example butwithout limitation, you agree not to rely onthe Telenav Software for critical navigationin areas where the well-being or survivalof you or others is dependent on theaccuracy of navigation, as the maps orfunctionality of the Telenav Software arenot intended to support such high riskapplications, especially in more remotegeographical areas.TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANDEXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES INCONNECTION WITH THE TELENAVSOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALLWARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROMCOURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM ORTRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE ANDNON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTYRIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAVSOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do notpermit the disclaimer of certain warranties,so this limitation may not apply to you.

275


Appendices

5. Limitation of LiabilityTO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDERAPPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NOCIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV ORITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BELIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTYFOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OREXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING INEACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USETHE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA,LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS,LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESSINTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISINGOUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TOUSE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IFTELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGESTHAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANYREASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGESREFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECTOR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OROTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OFTELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV’SSUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THEAMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FORTHE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOMESTATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOTALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATIONOF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONSOR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TOYOU.

6. Arbitration and Governing LawYou agree that any dispute, claim orcontroversy arising out of or relating to thisAgreement or the Telenav Software shallbe settled by independent arbitrationinvolving a neutral arbitrator andadministered by the American ArbitrationAssociation in the County of Santa Clara,California. The arbitrator shall apply the

Commercial Arbitration Rules of theAmerican Arbitration Association, and thejudgment upon the award rendered by thearbitrator may be entered by any courthaving jurisdiction. Note that there is nojudge or jury in an arbitration proceedingand the decision of the arbitrator shall bebinding upon both parties. You expresslyagree to waive your right to a jury trial.This Agreement and performancehereunder will be governed by andconstrued in accordance with the laws ofthe State of California, without givingeffect to its conflict of laws provisions. Tothe extent judicial action is necessary inconnection with the binding arbitration,both Telenav and you agree to submit tothe exclusive jurisdiction of the courts ofthe County of Santa Clara, California. TheUnited Nations Convention on Contractsfor the International Sale of Goods shallnot apply.

7. AssignmentYou may not resell, assign, or transfer thisAgreement or any of your rights orobligations, except in totality, in connectionwith your permanent transfer of theTelenav Software, and expresslyconditioned upon the new user of theTelenav Software agreeing to be bound bythe terms and conditions of thisAgreement. Any such sale, assignment ortransfer that is not expressly permittedunder this paragraph will result inimmediate termination of this Agreement,without liability to Telenav, in which caseyou and all other parties shall immediatelycease all use of the Telenav Software.Notwithstanding the foregoing, Telenavmay assign this Agreement to any otherparty at any time without notice, providedthe assignee remains bound by thisAgreement.

276


Appendices

8. Miscellaneous

8.1This Agreement constitutes the entireagreement between Telenav and you withrespect to the subject matter hereof.

8.2Except for the limited licenses expresslygranted in this Agreement, Telenav retainsall right, title and interest in and to theTelenav Software, including withoutlimitation all related intellectual propertyrights. No licenses or other rights which arenot expressly granted in this Agreementare intended to, or shall be, granted orconferred by implication, statute,inducement, estoppel or otherwise, andTelenav and its suppliers and licensorshereby reserve all of their respective rightsother than the licenses explicitly grantedin this Agreement.

8.3By using the Telenav Software, youconsent to receive from Telenav allcommunications, including notices,agreements, legally required disclosuresor other information in connection with theTelenav Software (collectively, “Notices”)electronically. Telenav may provide suchNotices by posting them on Telenav’sWebsite or by downloading such Noticesto your wireless device. If you desire towithdraw your consent to receive Noticeselectronically, you must discontinue youruse of the Telenav Software.

8.4Telenav’s or your failure to requireperformance of any provision shall notaffect that party’s right to requireperformance at any time thereafter, norshall a waiver of any breach or default ofthis Agreement constitute a waiver of anysubsequent breach or default or a waiverof the provision itself.

8.5If any provision herein is heldunenforceable, then such provision will bemodified to reflect the intention of theparties, and the remaining provisions ofthis Agreement will remain in full force andeffect.

8.6The headings in this Agreement are forconvenience of reference only, will not bedeemed to be a part of this Agreement,and will not be referred to in connectionwith the construction or interpretation ofthis Agreement. As used in this Agreement,the words “include” and “including,” andvariations thereof, will not be deemed tobe terms of limitation, but rather will bedeemed to be followed by the words“without limitation.”

9. Other Vendors Terms and ConditionsThe Telenav Software utilizes map andother data licensed to Telenav by thirdparty vendors for the benefit of you andother end users. This Agreement includesend-user terms applicable to thesecompanies (included at the end of thisAgreement), and thus your use of theTelenav Software is also subject to suchterms. You agree to comply with thefollowing additional terms and conditions,which are applicable to Telenav’s thirdparty vendor licensors:

9.1 End User Terms Required by HERENorth America, LLCThe data (“Data”) is provided for yourpersonal, internal use only and not forresale. It is protected by copyright, and issubject to the following terms andconditions which are agreed to by you, onthe one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) andits licensors (including their licensors andsuppliers) on the other hand.© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.

277


Appendices

The Data for areas of Canada includesinformation taken with permission fromCanadian authorities, including: © HerMajesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada PostCorporation, GeoBase®, © Department ofNatural Resources Canada.HERE holds a non-exclusive license fromthe United States Postal Service® topublish and sell ZIP+4® information.©United States Postal Service® 2014.Prices are not established, controlled orapproved by the United States PostalService®. The following trademarks andregistrations are owned by the USPS:United States Postal Service, USPS, andZIP+4.The Data for Mexico includes certain datafrom Instituto Nacional de Estadística yGeografía.TERMS AND CONDITIONS

9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2(Shanghai) Co., LtdThe data (“Data”) is provided for yourpersonal, internal use only and not forresale. It is protected by copyright, and issubject to the following terms andconditions which are agreed to by you, onthe one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (includingtheir licensors and suppliers) on the otherhand.© 20xx. All rights reserved.

Permitted Use.You agree to use this Data together withthe Telenav Software solely for the internalbusiness and personal purposes for whichyou were licensed, and not for servicebureau, time-sharing or other similarpurposes. Accordingly, but subject to therestrictions set forth in the followingparagraphs, you agree not to otherwise

reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,disassemble, create any derivative worksof, or reverse engineer any portion of thisData, and may not transfer or distribute itin any form, for any purpose, except to theextent permitted by mandatory laws.

Restrictions.Except where you have been specificallylicensed to do so by Telenav, and withoutlimiting the preceding paragraph, you maynot use this Data (a) with any products,systems, or applications installed orotherwise connected to or incommunication with vehicles, capable ofvehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,real time route guidance, fleetmanagement or similar applications; or (b)with or in communication with anypositioning devices or any mobile orwireless-connected electronic or computerdevices, including without limitationcellular phones, palmtop and handheldcomputers, pagers, and personal digitalassistants or PDAs.

Warning.The Data may contain inaccurate orincomplete information due to the passageof time, changing circumstances, sourcesused and the nature of collectingcomprehensive geographic data, any ofwhich may lead to incorrect results.

No Warranty.This Data is provided to you “as is,” andyou agree to use it at your own risk. Telenavand its licensors (and their licensors andsuppliers) make no guarantees,representations or warranties of any kind,express or implied, arising by law orotherwise, including but not limited to,

278


Appendices

content, quality, accuracy, completeness,effectiveness, reliability, fitness for aparticular purpose, usefulness, use orresults to be obtained from this Data, orthat the Data or server will beuninterrupted or error-free.

Disclaimer of Warranty:TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS(INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS ANDSUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANYWARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OFQUALITY, PERFORMANCE,MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE ORNON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,Territories and Countries do not allowcertain warranty exclusions, so to thatextent the above exclusion may not applyto you.

Disclaimer of Liability:TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS(INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS ANDSUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TOYOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM,DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OFTHE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THECLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGINGANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECTOR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROMTHE USE OR POSSESSION OF THEINFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OFPROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS ORSAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISINGOUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TOUSE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT INTHE INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OFTHESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS,WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACTOR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY,EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS

HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SomeStates, Territories and Countries do notallow certain liability exclusions ordamages limitations, so to that extent theabove may not apply to you.

Export Control.You shall not export from anywhere anypart of the Data or any direct productthereof except in compliance with, andwith all licenses and approvals requiredunder, applicable export laws, rules andregulations, including but not limited to thelaws, rules and regulations administeredby the Office of Foreign Assets Control ofthe U.S. Department of Commerce and theBureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.Department of Commerce. To the extentthat any such export laws, rules orregulations prohibit HERE from complyingwith any of its obligations hereunder todeliver or distribute Data, such failure shallbe excused and shall not constitute abreach of this Agreement.

Entire Agreement.These terms and conditions constitute theentire agreement between Telenav (andits licensors, including their licensors andsuppliers) and you pertaining to the subjectmatter hereof, and supersedes in theirentirety any and all written or oralagreements previously existing betweenus with respect to such subject matter.

Governing Law.The above terms and conditions shall begoverned by the laws of the State of Illinois[insert “Netherlands” where EuropeanHERE Data is used], without giving effectto (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii)the United Nations Convention forContracts for the International Sale ofGoods, which is explicitly excluded. You

279


Appendices

agree to submit to the jurisdiction of theState of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands”where European HERE Data is used] forany and all disputes, claims and actionsarising from or in connection with the Dataprovided to you hereunder.

Government End Users.If the Data is being acquired by or on behalfof the United States government or anyother entity seeking or applying rightssimilar to those customarily claimed by theUnited States government, this Data is a“commercial item” as that term is definedat 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed inaccordance with these End-User Terms,and each copy of Data delivered orotherwise furnished shall be marked andembedded as appropriate with thefollowing “Notice of Use,” and shall betreated in accordance with such Notice:

NOTICE OF USE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425

West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois60606

This Data is a commercial item asdefined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to

these End-User Terms under which thisData was provided.

© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.

If the Contracting Officer, federalgovernment agency, or any federal officialrefuses to use the legend provided herein,the Contracting Officer, federalgovernment agency, or any federal officialmust notify HERE prior to seekingadditional or alternative rights in the Data.

I. US/Canada Territory

A. United States Data. The End-UserTerms for any Application containingData for the United States shall containthe following notices:

“HERE holds a non-exclusive licensefrom the United States PostalService® to publish and sell ZIP+4®information.”

“©United States Postal Service®20XX. Prices are not established,controlled or approved by the UnitedStates Postal Service®. The followingtrademarks and registrations areowned by the USPS: United StatesPostal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”

B. Canada Data. The following provi-sions apply to the Data for Canada,which may include or reflect data fromthird party licensors (“Third PartyData”), including Her Majesty the Queenin Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),Canada Post Corporation (“CanadaPost”) and the Department of NaturalResources of Canada (“NRCan”):

1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Clientagrees that its use of the Third PartyData is subject to the following provi-sions:

a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Datais licensed on an “as is” basis. Thelicensors of such data, including HerMajesty, Canada Post and NRCan,make no guarantees, representa-tions or warranties respecting suchdata, either express or implied,arising by law or otherwise, includingbut not limited to, effectiveness,completeness, accuracy or fitnessfor a particular purpose.

280


Appendices

b. Limitation on Liability: The ThirdParty Data licensors, including HerMajesty, Canada Post and NRCan,shall not be liable: (i) in respect ofany claim, demand or action, irre-spective of the nature of the causeof the claim, demand or actionalleging any loss, injury or damages,direct or indirect, which may resultfrom the use or possession of suchData; or (ii) in any way for loss ofrevenues or contracts, or any otherconsequential loss of any kindresulting from any defect in theData.

2. Copyright Notice: In connection witheach copy of all or any portion of theData for the Territory of Canada, Clientshall affix in a conspicuous manner thefollowing copyright notice on at leastone of: (i) the label for the storagemedia of the copy; (ii) the packagingfor the copy; or (iii) other materialspackaged with the copy, such as usermanuals or end user license agree-ments: “This data includes informationtaken with permission from Canadianauthorities, including © Her Majestythe Queen in Right of Canada, ©Queen's Printer for Ontario, © CanadaPost Corporation, GeoBase�®, © TheDepartment of Natural ResourcesCanada. All rights reserved.”

3. End-User Terms: Except as other-wise agreed by the parties, in connec-tion with the provision of any portionof the Data for the Territory of Canadato End-Users as may be authorizedunder the Agreement, Client shallprovide such End-Users, in a reason-ably conspicuous manner, with terms(set forth with other end user termsrequired to be provided under the

Agreement, or as otherwise may beprovided, by Client) which shall includethe following provisions on behalf ofthe Third Party Data licensors,including Her Majesty, Canada Postand NRCan:

The Data may include or reflectdata of licensors, including HerMajesty the Queen in the Right ofCanada (“Her Majesty”), CanadaPost Corporation (“Canada Post”)and the Department of NaturalResources Canada (“NRCan”). Suchdata is licensed on an “as is” basis.The licensors, including Her Majesty,Canada Post and NRCan, make noguarantees, representations orwarranties respecting such data,either express or implied, arising bylaw or otherwise, including but notlimited to, effectiveness, complete-ness, accuracy or fitness for aparticular purpose. The licensors,including Her Majesty, Canada Postand NRCan, shall not be liable inrespect of any claim, demand oraction, irrespective of the nature ofthe cause of the claim, demand oraction alleging any loss, injury ordamages, direct or indirect, whichmay result from the use or posses-sion of the data or the Data. Thelicensors, including Her Majesty,Canada Post and NRCan, shall notbe liable in any way for loss ofrevenues or contracts, or any otherconsequential loss of any kindresulting from any defect in the dataor the Data.End User shall indemnify and saveharmless the licensors, including HerMajesty, Canada Post and NRCan,and their officers, employees andagents from and against any claim,demand or action, irrespective of

281


Appendices

the nature of the cause of the claim,demand or action, alleging loss,costs, expenses, damages or injuries(including injuries resulting in death)arising out of the use or possessionof the data or the Data.

4. Additional Provisions: The termscontained in this Section are in addi-tion to all of the rights and obligationsof the parties under the Agreement.To the extent that any of the provi-sions of this Section are inconsistentwith, or conflict with, any other provi-sions of the Agreement, the provisionsof this Section shall prevail.

II. Mexico. The following provision appliesto the Data for Mexico, which includescertain data from the Instituto Nacionalde Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):

A. Any and all copies of the Data and/orpackaging containing Data for Mexicoshall contain the following notice:“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional deEstadística y Geografía)”

III. Latin America Territory

A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copiesof the Data and/or packaging relatingthereto shall include the respective ThirdParty Notices set forth below and usedas described below corresponding tothe Territory (or portion thereof)included in such copy:

NoticeTerritory

“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICOMILITAR DEL ECUADORAUTORIZACION N° IGM-2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DEENERO DE 2011”

Ecuador

“source: © IGN 2009 - BDTOPO ®”

“Fuente: INEGI (InstitutoNacional de Estadística yGeografía)”

Guade-loupe,FrenchGuianaandMarti-niqueMexico

IV. Middle East Territory


NoticeCountry

“© Royal JordanianGeographic Centre”. Theforegoing notice require-ment for Jordan Data is amaterial term of the Agree-ment. If Client or any of its

Jordan

permitted sublicensees (ifany) fail to meet suchrequirement, HERE shallhave the right to terminateClient’s license with respectto the Jordan Data.

B. Jordan Data. Client and its permittedsublicensees (if any) are restricted fromlicensing and/or otherwise distributingHERE’s database for the country ofJordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter-prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanianentities for use of the Jordan Data solelyin Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.In addition, Client, its permitted subli-censees (if any) and End-Users arerestricted from using the Jordan Data inEnterprise Applications if such party is(i) a non-Jordanian entity using theJordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) aJordan-based customer. For purposes

282


Appendices

of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica-tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic-ations, GIS applications, mobile businessasset management applications, callcenter applications, telematics applica-tions, public organization Internetapplications or for providing geocodingservices.

V. Europe Territory

A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe

1. General Restrictions Applicable toTraffic Codes. Client acknowledgesand agrees that in certain countries ofthe Europe Territory, Client will needto obtain rights directly from thirdparty RDS-TMC code providers toreceive and use the Traffic Codes inthe Data and to deliver to End-UsersTransactions in any way derived fromor based on such Traffic Codes. Forsuch countries, HERE shall deliver theData incorporating Traffic Codes toClient only after receiving certificationfrom Client of its having obtained suchrights.

2. Display of Third Party RightsLegends for Belgium. Client shall, foreach Transaction that uses TrafficCodes for Belgium, provide thefollowing notice to the End-User:“Traffic Codes for Belgium areprovided by the Ministerie van deVlaamse Gemeenschap and theMinistèrie de l’Equipement et desTransports.”

B. Paper Maps. With respect to anylicense granted to Client relating tomaking, selling or distributing papermaps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper orpaper-like medium): (a) such licensewith respect to Data for the Territory ofGreat Britain is conditioned on Client’sentering into and complying with a

separate written agreement with theOrdnance Survey (“OS”) to create andsell paper maps, Client’s paying to theOS any and all applicable paper maproyalties, and Client’s complying withthe OS copyright notice requirements;(b) such license for selling or otherwisedistributing for charge with respect toData for the Territory of Czech Republicis conditioned on Client’s obtaining priorwritten consent from Kartografie a.s.;(c) such license for selling or distributingwith respect to Data for the Territory ofSwitzerland is conditioned on Client’sobtaining a permit from Bundesamt fürLandestopografie of Switzerland; (d)Client is restricted from using Data forthe Territory of France to create papermaps with a scale between 1:5,000 and1:250,000; and (e) Client is restrictedfrom using any Data to create, sell ordistribute paper maps that are the sameor substantially similar, in terms of datacontent and specific use of color,symbols and scale, to paper mapspublished by the European nationalmapping agencies, including withoutlimitation, Landervermessungämter ofGermany, Topografische Dienst of theNetherlands, Nationaal GeografischInstituut of Belgium, Bundesamt fürLandestopografie of Switzerland,Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-swesen of Austria, and the NationalLand Survey of Sweden.

C. OS Enforcement. Without limitingSection IV(B) above, with respect toData for the Territory of Great Britain,Client acknowledges and agrees thatthe Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bringa direct action against Client to enforcecompliance with the OS copyright notice(see Section IV(D) below) and papermap requirements (see Section IV(B)above) contained in this Agreement.

283


Appendices

D. Third Party Notices. Any and allcopies of the Data and/or packagingrelating thereto shall include therespective Third Party Notices set forthbelow and used as described belowcorresponding to the Territory (orportion thereof) included in such copy:

NoticeCountry(ies)

“© Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessungswesen”

Austria

“© EuroGeographics”

CroatiaCyprus,Estonia,Latvia,Lithuania,Moldova,Poland,Sloveniaand/orUkraine

“source: © IGN 2009 – BDTOPO ®”

France

“Die Grundlagendatenwurden mit Genehmigungder zuständigen Behördenentnommen”

Germany

“Contains OrdnanceSurvey data © Crowncopyright and databaseright 2010 Contains RoyalMail data © Royal Mailcopyright and databaseright 2010”

GreatBritain

“Copyright GeomaticsLtd.”

Greece

“Copyright © 2003; Top-Map Ltd.”

Hungary

“La Banca Dati Italiana èstata prodotta usandoquale riferimento anchecartografia numerica ed altratto prodotta e fornitadalla Regione Toscana.”

Italy

“Copyright © 2000;Norwegian MappingAuthority”

Norway

“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal

“Información geográficapropiedad del CNIG”

Spain

“Based upon electronicdata © National LandSurvey Sweden.”

Sweden

“TopografischeGrundlage: © Bundesamtfür Landestopographie.

Switzerland

E. Respective Country Distribution. Clientacknowledges that HERE has notreceived approvals to distribute mapdata for the following countries in suchrespective countries: Albania, Belarus,Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.HERE may update such list from time totime. The license rights granted to Clientunder this TL with respect to the Datafor such countries are contingent uponClient’s compliance with all applicablelaws and regulations, including, withoutlimitation, any required licenses orapprovals to distribute the Applicationincorporating such Data in suchrespective countries.

284


Appendices

VI. Australia Territory


Copyright. Based on data providedunder license from PSMA AustraliaLimited (www.psma.com.au).Product incorporates data which is ©20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GMHolden Limited, Intelematics AustraliaPty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.

B. Third Party Notices for Australia. Inaddition to the foregoing, the End-UserTerms for any Application containingRDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australiashall contain the following notice:“Product incorporates traffic locationcodes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-tion Limited and its licensors.”

VII. China Territory

Personal Use OnlyYou agree to use this Data together with[insert name of Client Application] for thesolely personal, non-commercial purposesfor which you were licensed, and not forservice bureau, time-sharing or othersimilar purposes. Accordingly, but subjectto the restrictions set forth in the followingparagraphs, you may copy this Data onlyas necessary for your personal use to (i)view it, and (ii) save it, provided that youdo not remove any copyright notices thatappear and do not modify the Data in any

way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,copy, modify, decompile, disassemble orreverse engineer any portion of this Data,and may not transfer or distribute it in anyform, for any purpose, except to the extentpermitted by mandatory laws.

RestrictionsExcept where you have been specificallylicensed to do so by NAV2 , and withoutlimiting the preceding paragraph, you maynot (a) use this Data with any products,systems, or applications installed orotherwise connected to or incommunication with vehicles, capable ofvehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,real time route guidance, fleetmanagement or similar applications; or (b)with or in communication with anypositioning devices or any mobile orwireless-connected electronic or computerdevices, including without limitationcellular phones, palmtop and handheldcomputers, pagers, and personal digitalassistants or PDAs. You agree to ceaseusing this Data if you fail to comply withthese terms and conditions.

Limited WarrantyNAV2 warrants that (a) the Data willperform substantially in accordance withthe accompanying written materials for aperiod of ninety (90) days from the dateof receipt, and (b) any support servicesprovided by NAV2 shall be substantially asdescribed in applicable written materialsprovided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’ssupport engineers will make commerciallyreasonable efforts to solve any problemissues.

285


Appendices

rigCustomer RemediesNAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability andyour exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’ssole discretion, either (a) return of the pricepaid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement ofthe Data that do not meet NAV2’s LimitedWarranty and that are returned to NAV2with a copy of your receipt. This LimitedWarranty is void if failure of the Data hasresulted from accident, abuse, ormisapplication. Any replacement Data willbe warranted for the remainder of theoriginal warranty period or thirty (30) days,whichever is longer. Neither these remediesnor any product support services offeredby NAV2 are available without proof ofpurchase from an authorized internationalsource.

No Other Warranty:EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTYSET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENTPERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIRLICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIMANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP ORNON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warrantyexclusions may not be permitted underapplicable law, so to that extent the aboveexclusion may not apply to you.

Limited Liability:TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BYAPPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITSLICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIRLICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOTBE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANYCLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THECAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND ORACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY ORDAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICHMAY RESULT FROM THE USE ORPOSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR

FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANYOTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGESARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF ORINABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, ORTHE BREACH OF THESE TERMS ORCONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTIONIN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON AWARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITSLICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDERNO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s ORITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDEREXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liabilityexclusions may not be permitted underapplicable law, so to that extent the aboveexclusion may not apply to you.

Export ControlYou agree not to export to anywhere anypart of the Data provided to you or anydirect product thereof except incompliance with, and with all licenses andapprovals required under, applicableexport laws, rules and regulations.

IP ProtectionThe Data are owned by NAV2 or itssuppliers and are protected by applicablecopyright and other intellectual propertylaw and treaties. The Data are providedsolely on the basis of a license to use, notsale.

Entire AgreementThese terms and conditions constitute theentire agreement between NAV2(and itslicensors, including their licensors andsuppliers) and you pertaining to the subjectmatter hereof, and supersedes in theirentirety any and all written or oralagreements previously existing betweenus with respect to such subject matter.

286


Appendices

Governing Law.The above terms and conditions shall begoverned by the laws of the People’sRepublic of China, without giving effect to(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) theUnited Nations Convention for Contractsfor the International Sale of Goods, whichis explicitly excluded. Any dispute arisingfrom or in connection with the Dataprovided to you hereunder shall besubmitted to the Shanghai InternationalEconomic and Trade ArbitrationCommission for arbitration.

Gracenote® CopyrightCD and music-related data fromGracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright© 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product andservice may practice one or more of thefollowing U.S. Patents #5,987,525,#6,061,680, #6,154,773, #6,161,132,#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6.240,459,#6,330,593 and other patents issued orpending. Some services supplied underlicense from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.Patent: #6,304,523.Gracenote and CDDB are registeredtrademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenotelogo and logotype, and the "Powered byGracenote™" logo are trademarks ofGracenote.

Gracenote® End User License Agreement(EULA)This device contains software fromGracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell StreetEmeryville, California 94608("Gracenote").

The software from Gracenote (the"Gracenote Software") enables this deviceto do disc and music file identification andobtain music-related information, includingname, artist, track, and title information("Gracenote Data") from online servers("Gracenote Servers"), and to performother functions. You may use GracenoteData only by means of the intended EndUser functions of this device.This device may contain content belongingto Gracenote's providers. If so, all of therestrictions set forth herein with respect toGracenote Data shall also apply to suchcontent and such content providers shallbe entitled to all of the benefits andprotections set forth herein that areavailable to Gracenote.You agree that you will use the contentfrom Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") ,Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,and Gracenote Servers for your ownpersonal, non-commercial use only. Youagree not to assign, copy, transfer ortransmit the Gracenote Content,Gracenote Software or any GracenoteData (except in a Tag associated with amusic file) to any third party. YOU AGREENOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTECONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE, ORGRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT ASEXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.You agree that your non-exclusive licensesto use the Gracenote Content, GracenoteData, the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers will terminate if youviolate these restrictions. If your licensesterminate, you agree to cease any and alluse of the Gracenote Content, GracenoteData, the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers. Gracenote,respectively, reserve all rights in GracenoteData, the Gracenote Software, and theGracenote Servers and Gracenote Content,including all ownership rights. Under nocircumstances will either Gracenote

287


Appendices

become liable for any payment to you forany information that you provide, includingany copyrighted material or music fileinformation. You agree that Gracenotemay enforce its respective rights,collectively or separately, under thisagreement against you, directly in eachcompany's own name.Gracenote uses a unique identifier to trackqueries for statistical purposes. Thepurpose of a randomly assigned numericidentifier is to allow Gracenote to countqueries without knowing anything aboutwho you are. For more information, see theweb page at www.gracenote.com for theGracenote Privacy Policy.THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEMOF GRACENOTE DATA AND THEGRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSEDTO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTEMAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS ORWARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANYGRACENOTE DATA FROM THEGRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTECONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELYAND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHTTO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENTFROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVESERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OFGRACENOTE, CHANGE DATACATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THATGRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NOWARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHERGRACENOTE CONTENT OR THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE ORGRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREEOR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE ORGRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BEUNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOTOBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANYENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPESTHAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TOPROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREETO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICESAT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL

WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,IMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, ANDNON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHERGRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTSTHAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USEOF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANYGRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILLGRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANYCONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTALDAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITSOR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASONWHATSOEVER.© Gracenote 2007.Vehicle with SYNC onlyUnited States and MexicoFCC ID: KMHSG1G1IC: 1422A-SG1G1MexicoModel: KMHSG1P1NOM-121-SCT1-2009The operation of this equipment is subjectto the following two conditions: (1) Thisequipment or device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) thisequipment or device must accept anyinterference, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.Vehicle with SYNC withTouchscreen/My TouchFCC ID: KMHSYNCG2IC: 1422A-SYNCG2

288


Appendices

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

WARNINGChanges or modifications notexpressively approved by the partyresponsible for compliance could

void the user's authority to operate theequipment. The term "IC" before the radiocertification number only signifies thatIndustry Canada technical specificationswere met.

The antenna used for this transmitter mustnot be co-located or operating inconjunction with any other antenna ortransmitter.

TYPE APPROVALSRF Certification Logos for TirePressure Monitoring Sensor(s)

E207816

Argentina

E207817

Abu Dhabi, Dubai

E197509

E202555

Brazil

E207818

European Union EU

289


Appendices

E207819

Jordan

E207820

Malaysia

E197811

Moldova

E207821

Morocco

E198001

Philippines

E197844

Serbia

E207822

Singapore

E198002

South Africa

290


Appendices

E203899

E203679

Taiwan

E198009

Ukraine

291


Appendices

292


AA/C

See: Climate Control...........................................83About This Manual...........................................5ABS

See: Brakes.............................................................114ABS driving hints

See: Hints on Driving With Anti-LockBrakes..................................................................114

AccessoriesSee: Replacement Parts

Recommendation..............................................8Adjusting the Headlamps - LHD.............162

Horizontal Aim Adjustment............................162Vertical Aim..........................................................162

Adjusting the Headlamps - RHD............163Horizontal Aim Adjustment............................164Vertical Aim..........................................................163

Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................49Air Conditioning

See: Climate Control...........................................83Air Vents............................................................83

Center Air Vents....................................................83Side Air Vents........................................................83

AlarmSee: Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With: Integral

Battery.................................................................47See: Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With: Interior

Sensor.................................................................45See: Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With:

Perimeter Alarm..............................................45Ambient Lighting............................................57Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With:

Integral Battery.............................................47Alarm System........................................................47Arming the Alarm................................................48Disarming the Alarm...........................................48Full and Reduced Guard...................................48Triggering the Alarm............................................47

Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With: InteriorSensor.............................................................45Alarm System........................................................45Arming the Alarm.................................................47Disarming the Alarm...........................................47Full and Reduced Guard...................................46Triggering the Alarm...........................................46

Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With:Perimeter Alarm..........................................45Arming the Alarm.................................................45Disarming the Alarm...........................................45

Appendices....................................................266At a Glance..........................................................9Audible Warnings and Indicators.............65

Headlamps On Warning Chime......................65Keyless Warning Alert.........................................65Parking Brake On Warning Chime.................66

Audio Control..................................................49MEDIA.......................................................................49Seek, Next or Previous.......................................49

Audio System................................................199General Information..........................................199

Audio Unit - Vehicles With: PremiumAM/FM/CD.................................................200

Autolamps........................................................54Windshield Wiper Activated

Headlamps........................................................54Automatic Climate Control........................86Automatic Transmission...........................109

Automatic Transmission AdaptiveLearning...............................................................111

Brake-Shift Interlock..........................................110If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or

Snow.....................................................................111SelectShift Automatic™

Transmission....................................................110Understanding the Positions of Your

Automatic Transmission............................109Automatic Transmission Fluid

Check..............................................................157Autowipers.........................................................51Auxiliary Power Points.................................96

12 Volt DC Power Point......................................96Locations................................................................96

BBattery

See: Changing the 12V Battery......................159Bonnet Lock

See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........152Brake Fluid Check.........................................158Brakes................................................................114

General Information...........................................114

293


Index

Breaking-In......................................................137Brakes and Clutch...............................................137Engine......................................................................137Tires..........................................................................137

Bulb Specification Chart...........................168

CCabin Air Filter.................................................90Capacities and Specifications - 2.3L

EcoBoost™..................................................194Capacities.............................................................194Specifications......................................................195

Capacities and Specifications -5.0L.................................................................196Capacities.............................................................196Specifications......................................................196

Capacities and Specifications..................191Car Wash

See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................169Catalytic Converter......................................105

Driving with a Catalytic Converter...............105Center Console................................................97

Locking Storage Bin.............................................97Changing a Bulb...........................................164

Daytime Running Lamp...................................166Front Direction Indicator..................................165Front Fog Lamp..................................................166Front Side Lamp.................................................165Headlamp..............................................................165Headlamp Low and High Beam....................165LED Lamps...........................................................166Rear Fog Lamp.....................................................167Reversing Lamp..................................................166

Changing a Fuse.............................................151Fuses........................................................................151

Changing a Road Wheel............................183Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly

Information......................................................184Tire Change Procedure.....................................185

Changing the 12V Battery..........................159Remove and Reinstall the Battery...............160

Changing the Wiper Blades - LHD.........160Changing the Wiper Blades - RHD..........161

Changing the Windshield WiperBlades.................................................................161

Service Position....................................................161Checking MyKey System Status...............38

Checking the Wiper Blades......................160Child Restraint Positioning..........................18

ISOFIX Child Seats..............................................20Child Safety.......................................................15Cigar Lighter.....................................................96Cleaning the Alloy Wheels........................170Cleaning the Exterior...................................169

Body Paintwork Preservation........................169Cleaning the Chrome Trim..............................169Cleaning the Headlamps.................................169Cleaning the Rear Window.............................169

Cleaning the Interior....................................169Instrument Cluster Screens, LCD Screens

and Radio Screens........................................169Rear Windows......................................................170Seatbelts...............................................................169

Clearing All MyKeys........................................37Climate............................................................245

Climate Control Voice Commands..............247Climate Control..............................................83

Principle of Operation........................................83Climate Controlled Seats...........................94

Cooled Seats.........................................................95Heated Seats.........................................................94

Closing the Convertible Top......................135Clutch Fluid Check - Manual

Transmission...............................................158Cold Weather Precautions........................138Convertible Top.............................................134Coolant Check

See: Engine Coolant Check............................156Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator........28Creating a MyKey...........................................36

Programming/Changing ConfigurableSettings...............................................................36

Cruise Control.................................................50Principle of Operation........................................127

Cruise controlSee: Using Cruise Control.................................127

Cup Holders......................................................97

DData Recording..................................................7Daytime Running Lamps.............................55Digital Radio...................................................201Direction Indicators........................................57

294


Index

Drive Control...................................................129Selectable Drive Modes...................................129Selectable Steering...........................................130

Driver Airbag.....................................................23Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags.........27Driving Aids.....................................................129Driving at High Speed.................................188Driving Hints....................................................137Driving Through Water................................138DRL

See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................55

EEconomical Driving.......................................137

Accessories...........................................................138Anticipation..........................................................138Efficient Speed....................................................138Electrical Systems..............................................138Gear Shifting.........................................................137Tire Pressures.......................................................137

Electromagnetic Compatibility..............266End User License Agreement..................267

SYNC End User License Agreement(EULA)..............................................................267

Engine Block Heater.....................................101Using the Engine Block Heater......................102

Engine Coolant Check................................156Adding Engine Coolant.....................................157

Engine ImmobilizerSee: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................45

Engine Oil Check...........................................156Adding Engine Oil...............................................156

Engine Oil Dipstick.......................................156Entertainment...............................................225

AM/FM/DAB Radio...........................................225Bluetooth Audio.................................................232CD............................................................................228SD Card Slot and USB Port............................229Supported Media Players, Formats and

Metadata Information.................................232Event Data Recording

See: Data Recording...............................................7

Exterior Mirrors................................................59Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................59Heated Exterior Mirrors......................................60Power Exterior Mirrors........................................59Power-Folding Mirrors........................................59Signal Indicator Mirrors.....................................60

FFastening the Seatbelts................................21

Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy...........22First Aid Kit.....................................................140Flat Tire Inflation

See: Temporary Mobility Kit.............................171Floor Mats.......................................................138Fog Lamps - Front

See: Front Fog Lamps........................................55Fog Lamps - Rear

See: Rear Fog Lamps..........................................56Front Exterior Overview..................................9Front Fog Lamps............................................55Front Passenger Sensing System............24Fuel and Refueling.......................................103Fuel Consumption Figures........................198Fuel Consumption........................................107

Calculating Fuel Economy..............................108Filling the Fuel Tank..........................................108

Fuel Filler Funnel Location.......................104Fuel Filter.........................................................159Fuel Quality....................................................104

Long-Term Storage...........................................104Fuel Shutoff...................................................140Fuses.................................................................144Fuse Specification Chart...........................144

Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel........148Power Distribution Box.....................................144

GGauges................................................................61

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............62Fuel Gauge..............................................................62Information Display..............................................61

General Information on RadioFrequencies...................................................32

Glasses Holder................................................97Global Opening...............................................58

Opening the Windows.......................................59

295


Index

HHandbrake

See: Parking Brake...............................................114Hazard Warning Flashers..........................140Headlamp Adjusting

See: Adjusting the Headlamps - LHD.........162See: Adjusting the Headlamps - RHD........163

Headlamp Exit Delay....................................55Headlamp Leveling.......................................56

Recommended Headlamp Leveling SwitchPositions.............................................................56

Head Restraints...............................................91Adjusting the Head Restraint...........................92Tilting Head Restraints ......................................92

Heated Windows and Mirrors...................90Heated Exterior Mirror........................................90Heated Rear Window.........................................90

HeatingSee: Climate Control...........................................83

Hill Start Assist...............................................115Switching the System On and Off................116Using Hill Start Assist.........................................115

Hints on Controlling the InteriorClimate............................................................87Cooling the Interior Quickly..............................89General Hints.........................................................87Heating the Interior Quickly.............................88Recommended Settings for Cooling............89Recommended Settings for Heating...........89Side Window Defogging in Cold

Weather..............................................................90Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock

Brakes.............................................................114Hood Lock

See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........152

IInformation Display Control......................50Information Displays.....................................67

General Information............................................67Information.....................................................241

Calendar................................................................242Emergency Assistance.....................................242Notifications.........................................................241

Information Messages..................................75Airbag........................................................................75Alarm.........................................................................75Battery and Charging System..........................76Doors and Locks...................................................76Electronic Stability Control...............................77Engine........................................................................77Fuel.............................................................................77Hill Start Assist......................................................77Keys and Intelligent Access...............................77Maintenance..........................................................78MyKey........................................................................79Park Brake..............................................................80Park Pilot.................................................................80Seats.........................................................................80Starting System ..................................................80Steering System....................................................81Traction Control.....................................................81Transmission...........................................................81Tyre Pressure Monitoring System..................82

Installing Child Restraints............................15Attaching a Child Seat With a Support

Leg.........................................................................18Attaching a Child Seat With Top

Tethers..................................................................17Booster Seats.........................................................16Child Restraints for Different Mass

Groups..................................................................15ISOFIX Anchor Points...........................................17Top Tether Anchor Points...................................17

Instrument Cluster..........................................61Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................55Instrument Panel Overview - LHD............12Instrument Panel Overview - RHD...........13Interior Lamps..................................................57

Map Lamps.............................................................57Interior Mirror...................................................60

Auto-Dimming Mirror.........................................60Introduction........................................................5

JJump Starting the Vehicle..........................141

Connecting the Jumper Cables......................141Jump Starting.......................................................142Preparing Your Vehicle.......................................141Removing the Jumper Cables........................142

296


Index

KKeyless Entry....................................................42

Disabled Passive Keys........................................44General Information............................................42Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the

Key Blade...........................................................44Locking Your Vehicle...........................................43Passive Key.............................................................43Unlocking Your Vehicle.......................................43

Keyless Starting..............................................98Ignition Modes......................................................98

Keys and Remote Controls.........................32

LLighting Control..............................................53

Headlamp Flasher...............................................54High Beams............................................................53

Lighting..............................................................53General Information............................................53

Limited Slip Differential..............................113Load Carrying..................................................131

General Information...........................................131Locking and Unlocking................................40

Auto Relock.............................................................41Locking and Unlocking the Doors From

Inside.....................................................................41Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the

Key Blade.............................................................41Opening the Luggage Compartment...........42Power Door Locks................................................40Remote Control....................................................40

Locks..................................................................40Lug Nuts

See: Changing a Road Wheel........................183

MMaintenance...................................................152

General Information..........................................152Manual Climate Control..............................84Manual Seats...................................................92Manual Transmission.................................109

Selecting Reverse Gear....................................109Media Hub......................................................203Message Center

See: Information Displays.................................67

MirrorsSee: Heated Windows and Mirrors...............90See: Windows and Mirrors................................58

Mobile Communications Equipment........8MyKey Troubleshooting...............................39MyKey™.............................................................35

Principle of Operation.........................................35

NNavigation......................................................248

Destination Mode..............................................248Map Mode............................................................254Michelin Travel Guide.......................................250Navigation Map Updates................................257Navigation Voice Commands........................257Places of Interest (POI) Categories...........250Quick-touch Buttons........................................256Setting Your Navigation Preferences.........250

OOil Check

See: Engine Oil Check.......................................156Opening and Closing the Hood...............152

Closing the Hood................................................153Opening the Hood..............................................152

Opening the Convertible Top...................134Using the Tonneau Caps..................................135

PParking Aids....................................................122

Principle of Operation.......................................122Parking Brake..................................................114Passenger Airbag...........................................24

.....................................................................................24Passive Anti-Theft System.........................45

Arming the Engine Immobilizer......................45Coded Keys.............................................................45Disarming the Engine Immobilizer................45Principle of Operation........................................45

PATSSee: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................45

Pedestrian Protection..................................30Principle of Operation........................................30

297


Index

Phone...............................................................233Making Calls........................................................236Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones.................235Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First

Time...................................................................234Phone Menu Options.......................................236Phone Settings...................................................239Phone Voice Commands................................240Receiving Calls....................................................236Text Messaging...................................................237

Post-Crash Alert System...........................143Power Door Locks

See: Locking and Unlocking.............................40Power Seats.....................................................93

Power Lumbar.......................................................93Power Windows.............................................58

Accessory Delay...................................................58Bounce-Back (Coupe Only)............................58One-Touch Down.................................................58One-Touch Up (Coupe Only)..........................58

RRear Axle...........................................................113Rear Exterior Overview.................................10Rear Fog Lamps.............................................56Rear Parking Aid............................................122

Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................123Rear Seats........................................................94

Second Row Split-Folding Rear Seat ..........94Rear View Camera........................................123

Using the Rear View Camera System.........124Rear View Camera

See: Rear View Camera....................................123Reduced Engine Performance.................137Refueling.........................................................105

Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System................106Remote Control...............................................32

Changing the Remote Control Battery.........33Intelligent Access Key.........................................32Using the Key Blade.............................................33

Repairing Minor Paint Damage................170Replacement Parts

Recommendation.........................................8Collision Repairs......................................................8Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical

Repairs...................................................................8Warranty on Replacement Parts......................8

Replacing a Lost Key or RemoteControl.............................................................34

Roadside Emergencies..............................140Running-In

See: Breaking-In...................................................137Running Out of Fuel....................................104

Adding Fuel From a Portable FuelContainer..........................................................104

Filling a Portable Fuel Container..................104

SSafety Precautions......................................103Seatbelt Reminder.........................................22

Turning the Seatbelt Reminder Off...............22Seatbelts............................................................21Seats....................................................................91Security..............................................................45Settings..............................................................211

Clock........................................................................212Display.....................................................................212Settings..................................................................216Sound......................................................................214Vehicle.....................................................................214

Side Airbags.....................................................26Side Curtain Airbags - Coupe.....................27Sitting in the Correct Position....................91Snow Chains

See: Using Snow Chains..................................178Speed Control

See: Cruise Control.............................................127Stability Control.............................................118

Principle of Operation........................................118Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................99

Automatic Engine Shutdown........................100Failure to Start....................................................100Fast Restart..........................................................100Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes................101Important Ventilating Information...............101Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is

Moving................................................................101Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is

Stationary........................................................100Starting and Stopping the Engine...........98

General Information...........................................98Steering Wheel Lock....................................99

Unlocking the Steering Wheel........................99Steering Wheel...............................................49

298


Index

Storage Compartments...............................97Sun Visors.........................................................60

Illuminated Vanity Mirror..................................60Supplementary Restraints System.........23

Principle of Operation.........................................23Symbols Glossary.............................................5SYNC™ 2........................................................204

General Information.........................................204SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................258

TTechnical Specifications

See: Capacities and Specifications..............191Temporary Mobility Kit.................................171

First Stage: Inflating the Tire with SealingCompound and Air........................................173

General Information...........................................172Second Stage: Checking Tire

Pressure.............................................................175Tips for Use of the Kit........................................172What to Do After the Tire has Been

Sealed.................................................................175What to do When a Tire Is Punctured.........173

Tire Care............................................................177Tire Inflation When Punctured

See: Temporary Mobility Kit.............................171Tire Pressure Monitoring System............179

Changing Tires With a Tire PressureMonitoring System.......................................180

How Temperature Affects the TirePressures..........................................................180

Tire Pressure Monitoring System ResetProcedure.........................................................182

Understanding the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem................................................................181

Tire Repair KitSee: Temporary Mobility Kit.............................171

TiresSee: Wheels and Tires........................................171

Towing a Trailer..............................................132Towing Points.................................................132Towing the Vehicle on Four

Wheels...........................................................133Emergency Towing.............................................133Recreational Towing..........................................133

Towing...............................................................132

Traction Control..............................................117Principle of Operation........................................117

Transmission..................................................109Transmission

See: Transmission..............................................109Transporting the Vehicle............................132Type Approvals............................................289

RF Certification Logos for Tire PressureMonitoring Sensor(s)..................................289

UUnder Hood Overview - 2.3L

EcoBoost™..................................................154Under Hood Overview - 5.0L...................155USB Port.........................................................203Using Cruise Control....................................127

Switching Cruise Control Off..........................128Switching Cruise Control On...........................127

Using MyKey With Remote StartSystems..........................................................39

Using Snow Chains......................................178Using Stability Control................................119

Electronic Stability Control .............................119Line Lock................................................................120

Using Summer Tires....................................178Using Traction Control.................................117

Switching the System Off ................................117System Indicator Lights and

Messages............................................................117Using Winter Tires........................................178

VVehicle Care....................................................169Vehicle Dimensions - Convertible..........192Vehicle Dimensions - Coupe.....................191Vehicle Identification Number.................194Vehicle Identification Plate.......................193Vehicle Interior Overview...............................11Ventilation

See: Climate Control...........................................83Vents

See: Air Vents.........................................................83VIN

See: Vehicle Identification Number.............194Voice Control...................................................50

299


Index

WWarning Lamps and Indicators.................63

Anti-Lock Braking System................................63Battery......................................................................63Bonnet Ajar.............................................................63Boot Ajar..................................................................63Brake System.........................................................63Cruise Control........................................................63Direction Indicator...............................................63Door Ajar..................................................................63Engine Coolant Temperature..........................64Engine Oil................................................................64Fasten Safety Belt...............................................64Front Airbag...........................................................64Front Fog Lamps..................................................64High Beam..............................................................64Low Beam Malfunction.....................................64Low Fuel Level......................................................64Low Tire Pressure Warning...............................64Parking Lamps......................................................64Rear Fog Lamps Indicator................................64Service Engine Soon...........................................65Stability Control....................................................65Stability Control Off............................................65

Warning Triangle..........................................140Washer Fluid Check.....................................158Washers

See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................169See: Wipers and Washers..................................51

Welcome Lighting..........................................57Mustang Projection Lamps...............................57

Wheel NutsSee: Changing a Road Wheel........................183

Wheels and Tires............................................171General Information............................................171Technical Specifications.................................189

Windows and Mirrors...................................58Windshield Washers.....................................52Windshield Wipers..........................................51

Intermittent Wipe..................................................51Speed Dependent Wipers..................................51

Winter TiresSee: Using Winter Tires.....................................178

Wiper BladesSee: Checking the Wiper Blades..................160

Wipers and Washers......................................51

Wrecker TowingSee: Transporting the Vehicle........................132

300


Index

Documents

2016 Ford Mustang Manual